JP2017189671A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine, in which reduction in game amusement is suppressed even a player, he paid a lot of burden for obtaining win in lotteries.SOLUTION: A prize ball number counter is increased as a response to entering first start hole 2201 or second start hole 2587b, and a number based on the prize ball number counter of game balls are paid to the player with a trigger of big win. In addition, a larger number of changeable display of special pattern is increased after termination of big win play mode, a larger number of game balls are paid with a trigger of next big win so that number of game balls suitable for the player's burden are paid. Therefore, even a player, he paid a lot of burden for obtaining big win, he has a likelihood to feel big win play mode based on the big win, thus reduction in game amusement may be suppressed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 110

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that performs a lottery on whether or not to win based on the winning of a game ball at a starting opening, and generates a big hit gaming state when the lottery result is a win. In this big hit game state, it is possible to win a large amount of prize balls in a short time by opening the big prize opening as a prize opening which is normally closed and letting the game balls win one after another in the big prize opening It is.

JP 2013-48980 A

  However, the above-described gaming machine has no change compared to the conventional board surface, and there is a risk that the gaming interest will be lowered.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

(Solution 1)
A game panel in which a game area where game balls can flow down is formed;
A center accessory provided in the game panel;
A game machine having a right passage area part into which a game ball that flows down over the upper part of the center role of game balls to be driven into the game area can enter;
The right passage region portion is
An area entry portion that is an entrance portion of the right passage area portion;
A discharge portion that is an exit portion of the right passage region portion and discharges a game ball that has flowed down inside the right passage region portion to the downstream side of the right passage region portion;
A first variable receiving port having a switching member that switches between accepting and not accepting a game ball;
A flow path of a game ball flowing down inside the right passage region portion, the first flow path in which the game ball may be received in the first variable receiving port;
A flow path of a game ball flowing down inside the right passage area, and a second flow path in which the game ball may not be received in the first variable receiving port,
The discharge part is
A first discharge portion for discharging the game ball flowing down the first flow path to the downstream side of the right passage region portion;
Separately having a second discharge portion for discharging the game ball flowing down the second flow path to the downstream side of the right passage region portion;
The first flow path and the second flow path are configured such that the possibility that a game ball flows down the first flow path is higher than that of the second flow path. Only the first flow path is configured to selectively switch between a flow path communicating with the first discharge portion and a flow path communicating with the first variable receiving port,
Furthermore, a gaming machine characterized in that a second variable receiving port capable of receiving a game ball released from the first discharge part of the discharge part is provided on the downstream side of the right passage region part.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a back perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment or detachment structure of the upper-axis support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the figure of (A) from the downward direction. It is a reverse view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a locking member. It is a reverse view of the upper metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of a left side decoration unit with a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected in the site | part of the ball rental unit of the tray unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state which pressed the press operation part in the operation unit. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle apparatus in a door frame and was seen from the front, (B) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle apparatus and was seen from the back. (A) It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame and was seen from the front, (B) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view shown in the state where a front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. It is a rear view of a ball feeding unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case. (A) is a top view of the tamper-proof member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the tamper-proof member, (C) is a perspective view of the tamper-proof member viewed from the front, (D) These are explanatory drawings which show the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cuts and shows a door frame in the up-down direction approximate center. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for the light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system | strain of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of a body frame. It is a left view of a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a prize ball unit in a body frame. It is a back perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen afterwards. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen afterwards. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout path, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the distribution | circulation passage of the ball | bowl in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball | bowl exit opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is a back surface perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the back. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board | substrate unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the terminal board box in a board | substrate unit, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the terminal board box in a board unit, and was seen from the front. (A) is a front view of a launch power supply board box, (B) is a sectional view of an AA line shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the fastening mechanism in a back cover and was seen from the rear side. (A) is the left view of the locking device in a main body frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the locking device in a main body frame from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a door frame slide rod and a body frame slide rod provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which looked after disassembling the locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the sliding rod for door frames and the sliding rod for main body frames in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. FIG. (A) is the front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko machine, (B) is a front view which shows the other form of a function display unit. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming board using a gaming panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board which looked at FIG. 103 from back. FIG. 110 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board in FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board using the front structural member of embodiment different from examples, such as FIG. 103, and was seen from the front. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear in FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view which shows the crime prevention structure in the shaft support side of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back in the state which accommodated the game board in the main body frame. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally behind. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnected the game board at the approximate center of the up-down direction, and was seen from the upper side. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnected the game board in the center of the left-right direction and was seen from the right side. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attacker unit and was seen afterwards. It is the perspective view which looked at the starting port unit of a front unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the starting port unit of a front unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the start port unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the start port unit and was seen afterwards. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front side unit of the front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front side unit of the front unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front side unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the center character of a front unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center accessory for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center accessory for every main member and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the distribution member of a center accessory from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the distribution member of a center accessory from back. It is front sectional drawing which shows the left route | root in a center combination with a part of warp passage. It is a perspective view which shows the lower warp channel | path member and stage member in a center accessory. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd attacker unit of the center accessory from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd attacker unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd attacker unit of the center accessory and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd attacker unit of the center accessory and was seen from the back. (A) It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd starting opening unit of the center accessory from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd starting opening unit of the center accessory from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd starting port unit of the center accessory, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd starting port unit of the center accessory, and was seen afterwards. (A) is front sectional drawing which shows the right route in a center object, (b) is BB sectional drawing in (a). (A) is front sectional drawing which expands and shows the principal part of the right route when the 2nd starting port of a center accessory is an open state, (b) cut | disconnects in the site | part of the 2nd starting port in (a). FIG. It is front sectional drawing which expands and shows the principal part of the right route | route when the 2nd big winning opening in a center role is an open state. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member and was seen from the back. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the main process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, (b) is the interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for lottery processing for jackpots, (B) is a reach determination table used for lottery processing for reach, and (C) is a lottery processing for types of jackpots. It is a symbol determination table used for. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special gate part passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16ms regular process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a timing chart in the case of performing a fate branch production based on 16R probability variation big hit. It is a timing chart in the case of performing a fate branch production based on big hits other than 16R probability variation big hit. It is a concrete effect image in a liquid crystal display device when a fate branch effect is performed. It is a concrete effect image in a liquid crystal display device when a fate branch effect is performed. It is a concrete effect image in a liquid crystal display device when a fate branch effect is performed. It is a timing chart in the case of performing a fate selection chance production. It is a concrete effect image in a liquid crystal display device when a fate selection chance effect is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the payment appearance issue execution process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prize ball process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view illustrating a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame constituting the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, main body frame, game board constituting the pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

  1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3, a game area 1100 in which a game ball as a game medium is inserted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side, and a front face of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 A door frame 5 that is pivotally supported to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. The door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 stores a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a game ball placed below the game window 101 and storing game balls. A dish-shaped upper plate 301 and lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5, are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in which the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 extend in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. The horizontal width of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width dimension. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the left end front side of the outer frame 2. The right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 moves to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  The pachinko machine 1 has a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 when viewed from the front, and protrudes forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

  Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100. However, the player can recognize the inside of the game area 1100. A hand or the like is inserted so that a game ball or obstacle nail (not shown) in the game area 1100, various winning holes, or an accessory cannot be touched. In addition, various control boards are provided on the rear side of the main body frame 3, and a back cover 900 that closes the back of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detaching structure between the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of the lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 that extend in the horizontal direction, and left and right sides that extend in the vertical (vertical) direction. Frame plates 12 and 13, and four connecting members 14 that connect the end portions of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, and each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 is connected by the connecting member 14. They are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape) by connecting them together. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, And an engagement notch 15 that is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. A mounting step 10a that is recessed from the other general surface is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support fitting 20 to be described later is attached to the mounting step 10a. It is like that.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. The protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) is provided, and the strength rigidity is enhanced (see FIGS. 9 and 108). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, etc. While being able to hold the pachinko machine 1 easily as a finger hook, the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there is also a drawing in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

  The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the horizontal direction. The plate-like horizontal piece 17 extending to the side, the plate-like vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 are opposite to each other A plate-like engagement piece 19 that extends in the direction and can be inserted and engaged in the engagement notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are asymmetrical to each other. The vertical piece 18 is divided into front and rear parts. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes, respectively. Has been.

  In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is an engagement notch between the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, a predetermined screw passes through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19 and is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame It is fixed to the plate 11. The connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 passes through the side frame plates 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper side inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like that. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 passes through the side frame plates 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower side inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. The side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled into a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of the present example is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower portion of the left side frame plate 12 that is disposed so as to face the upper support bracket 20 and the upper support bracket 20 that is fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10. Fixed to the lower support bracket 21, the reinforcing bracket 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support bracket 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13, and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcement bracket 22. The decorative cover 23 is provided. The upper support bracket 20 and the lower support bracket 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so that they can be opened and closed.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixed piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support protruding piece 20b protruding forward from the front end of the fixed piece 20a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion. The support side wall 20c formed by being cut out so as to bend toward the center of the tip from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b, and the left side frame depending on the left end of the fixed piece 20a and the support protruding piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that contacts the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that continues to the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 20b (see FIG. 14). 14) and a stop drooping portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the drooping wall 20e and is inclined inward at the entrance end of the supporting saddle hole 20c. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper shaft support bracket 630 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is detachably engaged with the support hole 20c in the upper support bracket 20. Further, the upper support bracket 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by a fixing piece 20a and a hanging fixing piece 20d.

  The strength of the support protrusion 20b is enhanced by a hanging wall 20e depending from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b. The details of the upper support metal 20 will be described later. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the player can be concealed so that it cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. Further, the supporting hole 20c formed in the supporting protruding piece 20b has a shape bent in a square shape so as to be inclined from the side of the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width of the support hole 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support bracket 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a that is placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece that rises upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and is fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projecting piece 21c Support projections 21d. A main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in a main body frame shaft support bracket 644 (see FIG. 66 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. After the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21 is inserted into the body frame shaft support hole of the body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the body frame 3, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 of the body frame 3 is inserted. The main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported so that it can be freely opened and closed by locking it to the support hole 20c.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 that are disposed at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction inside the right side frame plate 13. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described in detail later, the hooks 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing plates 24 and 25 by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and turning it to one side. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. The guide plate 26 is used to smoothly guide the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is mounted and fixed in a replaceable manner.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b in the upper support metal fitting 20, and the support projecting piece 20b is supported by a rivet 28. On the other hand, it is pivotally supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from a position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from the position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operation part 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the opposite side of the position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operation part 27b, and the front end of the stopper part 27a are formed to bulge forward. An arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a increases.

  As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, the lock member 27 is configured such that the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27 c is the hanging wall when supported by the support protrusion piece 20 b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state). 20e is in contact with the inner side surface of the stopper 20a, and the stopper portion 27a is configured to block a part of the support hole 20c bent into a square shape, and the distal end portion of the stopper part 27a is deepest in the support hole 20c. The part is not closed, and a space is formed in which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted in the deepest part of the support rod hole 20c.

  The support mechanism for the shaft support pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example is such that the shaft support pin 633 is inserted into the deepest portion of the support bore 20c and the distal end side of the stopper portion 27a is at the entrance end. In this state (in this state, there is a slight gap between the side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f and no contact is made). In the shaft support state, the centers of the shaft support pin 633 and the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a located at the deepest portion of the support hole 20c formed by bending are in a state of facing each other while being shifted in an oblique direction. ing. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 supporting the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support saddle hole 20c. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. In addition, since the arcuate tip end surface 27d is provided at the tip of the stopper portion 27a, the lock member 27 is smoothly rotated when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. It has become. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft support pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the support hole 20c formed in a square shape and comes into contact with the arcuate tip surface 27d, the acting force F is The component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the tip end surface 27d) acting on the contact portion between the support pin 633 and the arc-shaped tip end surface 27d, and the contact between the shaft support pin 633 and one side inner surface of the support collar hole 20c. When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27), so that the tip of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is supported. A moment to rotate in a direction away from the protruding piece 20b (clockwise in the figure) does not act, and the shaft support pin 633 is sandwiched between the tip of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and the inner surface of one side of the support hole 20c. Hold the state. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded even in a normal shaft support state or in a state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, and is an elastic formed integrally with synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c and to prevent the pivot pin 633 from coming off from the support hole 20c over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction away from the support projecting piece 20b (clockwise in the figure), one side of the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a. Does not rotate in a direction in which it comes into contact with the stop drooping portion 20f and disengages any further, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude beyond the support protruding piece 20b.

  Even if the shape of the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1 or the distal end portion of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the axis fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times. Since the one side of the tip end of the stopper portion 27a only abuts against the stop drooping portion 20f even when the member 27 rotates, the present applicant points out that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support protruding piece 20b. I have confirmed.

  The action of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed, a lower support bracket is mounted on a main body frame pivot support hole (not shown) formed in a main body frame pivot support bracket 644 (see FIG. 63). 21 support protrusions 21d need to be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed against the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27, thereby pushing As shown in FIG. 16B, the lock member 27 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 27c, so that the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support rod hole 20c. When the shaft support pin 633 reaches the deepest portion of the support saddle hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not come into contact with each other, so that the lock member 27 is elastic. The stopper 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again and closes the inlet portion of the support hole 20c at the same time as it is biased by the elastic force of the piece 27c. The shaft support pin 633 faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out of the support hole 20c.

  This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support saddle hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, the finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support rod hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the main body frame 3 is lifted, and the main body frame 3 is detached from the outer frame 2 by releasing the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal 21. It can be removed from.

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are made of wood, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal ( For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility lined up in a game hall, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing it at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such an operation is performed by nailing nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nails can be easily nailed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used without problems in existing island facilities. It can be installed. In addition, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, it becomes possible to form a thin wall while maintaining strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. The left and right widths when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63, etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 has a large horizontal dimension. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12, 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and the connecting member 14 is engaged with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased, and it is sturdy. It can be made into a rectangular frame. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be attached in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right rear. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back.

  The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a gaming frame 101 having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape) as shown in the figure. The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery, and the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 are provided.

  Further, the door frame 5 passes through the tray unit 300, the tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the door. A handle device 500 that is attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 that is disposed on the rear side of the tray unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. A foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side, a ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be closed. The glass unit 590 is provided.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 28 shows the wiring state for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view which expands and shows.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is a door having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a substantially elliptical shape having a vertically long shape. A frame base body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 disposed on the left and right sides of the lower end of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110, and speakers for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base body 110 A bracket 132 and a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner when viewed from the front on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 are provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like outside the right side speaker 130 in front view. A cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111 and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or removed. It has become.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is configured so that the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the lower surface of the gaming window 101 are covered with the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in a rear view. ) And a launch cover 191 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the gaming window 101, and a rotational position of the handle device 500 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 below the launch cover 191. The handle device relay board 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100 and the rear side of the handle device relay board 192 are covered. A door frame that is disposed on the opposite side of the middle device relay board cover 193 and the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192 across the center in the left-right direction (right side (axial support side) from the center in the left-right direction in rear view). A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base body 110, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a pivotally supported on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. And a wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of a wiring cord 196 (see FIG. 28) that connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the present example has an overall rigidity increased by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 in which metal sheet metal is assembled with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has a strength capable of sufficiently supporting the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 to be described later. 4, and an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs the amplified signal to the speakers 130, 222, and 262. In this example, each decoration unit 200, 240, 280, each decorative board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, dial driving motor 414 or sensor 432a, 432b provided in the operation unit 400, 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the wiring cord 196 that connects the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, etc. As will be described in detail later, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate of the main body frame 3 are extended to the rear by being held by the wiring holding member 197. 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape with a synthetic resin as shown in FIGS. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the gaming window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right side and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, whereas the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. In addition, a rectangular notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in a front view) is provided on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the gaming window 101 in the door frame base body 110. Is formed. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101 and widths on the left and right sides of an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, a pivot supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body 110 in a front view. Accordingly, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It is like that.

  In addition to the gaming window 101, the door frame base body 110 is disposed on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, and attaches and fixes the ball feeding unit 580 and the speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130. A ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) and a game ball penetrating in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and stored in the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 to the ball feeding unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supply and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140 inclined obliquely so that the right side (open side) end of the front surface which is arranged in the lower right corner portion and bulges forward in the front view is retracted Portion 114, a wiring passage opening 115 through which the wiring from handle device 500 can pass through in a front-rear direction at a predetermined position of handle attachment portion 114, Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base main body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 and a door frame base main body 110 in a rear view. Board mounting portion 118 for mounting the door frame base substrate 194 disposed on the lower right side (shaft support side) of the game window, and the placement closer to the center than the speaker mounting portion 111 on the left side (open side) in the rear view of the lower end of the game window 101 A security cover mounting portion 119 for projecting rearward from the rear and mounting a mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180. In addition, the door frame base main body 110 has a glass unit support step 110a that is recessed forward along the inner periphery of the gaming window 101 and the front outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 590 on the rear side, and the gaming window 101. Two locking member mounting portions 110b that protrude rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery and rotatably support the glass unit locking member 190 are further provided.

  Further, the rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a door frame protruding piece 110c protruding a predetermined amount rearward from the lower side thereof, and the door frame protruding piece 110c is an engagement groove 603 of the main body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even so, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. The rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a positioning projection 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in rear view and engages with the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. The positioning projection 110d is fitted into the fitting groove 612 so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like. In addition, a large number of attachment holes for attaching the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base main body 110 has an attachment portion 110g for attaching the speaker bracket 132 for attaching the side speaker 130 and an attachment hole 110h (see FIG. 18 etc.) for attaching the side speaker cover 338 at appropriate positions. Is formed.

  In addition, the door frame base main body 110 includes a lower dish ball supply port 310g and a foul cover unit 540 in the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the substrate mounting part 118. A rectangular ball passage opening 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

  Furthermore, the door frame base main body 110 is formed on the front side above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 and includes a shallow dish-shaped crime prevention recess 120 that is recessed substantially backward in a triangular shape. A security member 121 formed in a shallow box shape is inserted into the security recess 120 from the front side. The security member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape whose front side is opened by bending a metal plate. Thereby, in order to perform an illegal act with respect to the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, it is made of a metal that can be drilled with a thin drill or the like from the joint portion between the side decoration units 200, 240 and the dish unit 300. It can be blocked by the crime prevention member 121 and can prevent an illegal act.

  The pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is not shown in detail, but the intersection of the central axes is a predetermined distance from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view (for example, 0.2 m to 1). .5 m), the sound is delivered most efficiently to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the side speaker 130 mainly outputs middle and high range sounds, and is disposed at a position as far away from the pachinko machine 1 as possible in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high stereo feeling.

  The outer periphery of these side speakers 130 is sandwiched between a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 disposed on the rear side, so that the door frame It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side with a predetermined screw.

  The door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side open as shown in FIGS. A step portion 195a that is recessed forward is provided at a position slightly below the center. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the horizontal direction and having a cross section in an I-shape as shown in FIGS. It is formed of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 includes a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in the upper and lower parts in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. The wiring holding member 197 has an end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled, and a step 195 a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the vertical direction Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 rotates to the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, so that the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. The door frame base substrate cover 195 can be accommodated in the stepped portion 195a.

  This wiring holding member 197 has a predetermined bundling in a holding hole 197a which is paired up and down with the wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side. By inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198, the wiring cord 196 can be held (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. It will be pushed forward by the part and will turn in the direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Thereby, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves in a direction away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). Thus, the wiring cord 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is unfolded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wiring cord 196.

  As described above, according to this example, the end of the wiring frame holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the door frame base substrate cover 195 is moved so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. Since it is pivotally supported on the rear surface and a part of the wiring cord 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction, the main body frame 3 When the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring cord 196 can be folded or unfolded laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions (breakage of the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.) due to pinching.

  Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when a force acts through the wiring cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to prevent blurring in the vertical direction, and the wiring cord 196 can be reliably folded in the horizontal direction to prevent occurrence of problems.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a bridge is hung between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Is partly bridged by the wiring holding member 197, so that it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 196 from hanging even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, and the wiring cord 196 hangs down to other members. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as being disconnected by disconnection or being unable to close the door frame 5, such as a main control board 4100, a peripheral control unit 4140, a payout control board 4110, etc. And decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, speakers 130, 222, 262 as door side electric devices, rental Unit 360, the handle device 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of defective wiring cord 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  In addition, a part of the wiring cord 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197. Even when the wiring cord 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. Since the force can be released, the wiring cord 196 can be prevented from being pulled, and the wiring cord 196 can be pulled and disconnected, and the connection connector can be disconnected. Can be prevented. Further, a part of the wiring cord 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is merely partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. The wiring cord 196 does not slide as in the case of Japanese Patent No. -213675), and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 196 from being rubbed and causing problems such as leakage and disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the holding holes 197a that are disposed in a plurality at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring cord 196 is held by the binding band 198. It is possible to prevent the binding band 198 holding 196 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and the wiring cord 196 is dropped together with the binding band 198 from the wiring holding member 197. It can be surely prevented.

  Even if the position where the wiring cord 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged at a position away from the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the wiring cord is held by the wiring holding member 197 as described above. Since the wiring cord 196 can be satisfactorily prevented from hanging down when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding the guide 196, the strength and rigidity of the side-supported side of the door frame 5 is increased. It can be set as the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5, and it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention with respect to a fraudulent act.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with ridges that protrude at least from the both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction to the side along which the wiring cord 196 lies, the pair of ridges and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197 The three sides of the wiring cord 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring cord 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from being bent when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good state.

  Further, the length from the base end to the tip end of the wiring holding member 197 is substantially the same as the distance from the axis center of the door frame 5 to the base axis, and the extension of the main body frame 3 in the wiring cord 196 is performed. The predetermined position is set to a position closer to the axial center side of the door frame 5 than the front end of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened and closed, a pantograph-like link is formed by the axis of the member 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring cord 196 extends in the main body frame 3. The wiring holding member 197 and the wiring cord 196 can be moved smoothly, making it easy to perform opening and closing operations, and reducing excessive force on the wiring cord 196 etc. To prevent problems from occurring Can. Further, a pantograph-like link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion of the wiring cord 196 that extends from the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back on the tip side so as to be along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring cord 196 can be folded and gathered compactly, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring cord 196 can be reduced.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 that pivotally supports the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 being closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the step 195 a that can store the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and the wiring frame holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base substrate cover 195. Since it is housed in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 or The wiring cords 196 can be gathered in a compact manner, and the wiring cord 196 can be prevented from being caught by other members, thereby preventing problems from occurring.

  Further, the wiring cord 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 being closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring cord 196 can be made as small as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5. It is possible to reliably achieve the function and effect. Moreover, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for relatively holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 which can hold the game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 by enlarging the game area 1 and can attract the player's interest strongly by having the large game board 4 is provided. it can.

  Further, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes a cylindrical tube portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tube portion 141 from the rear end of the tube portion 141 as shown in FIGS. An annular flange portion 142 extending outward in a right angle direction, and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding into the cylindrical portion 141 and arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment portion 114 in the door frame base body 110. Although not shown in the drawings, the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially coincident with the wiring passage opening 115 in a state of being attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. The three grooves 502a are arranged and formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 coincide with each other. Yes. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 that is inclined obliquely so that the shaft of the cylinder portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) toward the front in a front view. Similarly, the shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 is also inclined obliquely.

  Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the rear side of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door frame base main body, as mainly shown in FIGS. 110, a pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the pivot-side side part back surface, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the open-side side part back surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. And a lower reinforcing metal plate 154 attached along the lower back surface of the gaming window 101, which are fastened to each other with screws, rivets or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having shaft pins 155 provided on the upper and lower ends of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the upper surface, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. So that it can be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the horizontal width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side end edge of both long side edges thereof. A lower bent protrusion piece 159 bent toward the front (see FIG. 25), and an upper bent protrusion piece 160 bent forward toward the front right side (open side) of the upper long edge. And a vertical bent projecting piece 161 that is bent rearward at the central portion of the upper long edge and is extended in the vertical direction. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent protrusion piece 159, the upper bent protrusion piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to be engaged and locked with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the vertical bent protruding piece 161 is locked to the locking piece 592 b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 is moved in the horizontal direction and It is possible to restrict movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 has a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101a of the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes an open side outward bent protrusion 163 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154, As shown in the figure, the open side inner bent projecting piece 164 is formed so as to extend rearward longer than the open side outer bent projecting piece 163. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 to be described later is provided at the lower rear side of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 that extends rearward to the outer end of the long side and opens to the outside of the shaft support side (see FIG. 108). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent protrusions 167 bent rearward on both sides of the long side.

  The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. Although there is a possibility that an action may be easily performed, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the present example includes the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that a front end piece 952b of a side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the U-shape (see FIG. 108), the insertion of the tool can be prevented, and only the pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. This crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4. Are formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and the upper side thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 A formed contact recess 181 and a post-crime prevention protrusion 182 protruding rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181 are provided. In addition, the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180 are respectively provided with crime prevention rear end protrusions 183 that protrude rearward along the shape of the ends. Note that the right (axial support side) crime prevention rear end protrusion 183 in a rear view is longer than the opposite (open side) crime prevention rear end projection 183. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention projection piece 184 that protrudes along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and the left and right sides outside the projection piece 184 before the crime prevention. And a U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end.

  The security cover 180 has a mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) attached to the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100 in front view and a mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side). By attaching to the security cover attaching part 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. In a state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, detailed illustration is omitted, but the pre-crime projection piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bent protruding piece 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the post-crime protruding protrusion 182 protruding rearward is inserted into the lower surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 and the half on the open side is front. The component 1110 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool enters the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the post-crime projecting piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  The crime prevention cover 180 can cover the lower portion of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the door frame 5 closed by the back surface thereof. In addition, it is possible to prevent the hitting ball that flies or reversely feeds the guide passage portion from colliding with the glass plate 594.

  Accordingly, in this example, the crime prevention cover 180 covers the rear lower outer periphery of the glass unit 590 (the gaming window 101) in the door frame 5, so that the gaming window 101, the glass unit 590 and the like from the front side of the door frame 5 Even if a highly flexible tool is inserted between the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) and a fraudulent act is attempted, the crime prevention cover 180 can prevent the tool from entering, Thus, the pachinko machine 1 with higher safety can be provided.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with fitting portions 190a that are rotatably fitted to locking member mounting portions 110b that protrude rearward from the door frame base main body 110. And a locking piece 190b that extends in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locks the locking piece 592a of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 has a retaining screw fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is pivotally supported with respect to the locking member attaching part 110b.

  Although the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 is not shown in detail, the locking piece 190b has a protrusion protruding rearward on the rear side, and this protrusion rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook when operating.

  Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110, respectively. In addition, when the launch cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, the rear surfaces thereof are substantially in the same plane. The front surface of the ball striking device 650 attached to the main body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG. 29A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 29B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the exploded side.

  The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the figure, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side of the door frame base unit 100 is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, a side inner lens 212 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210, The right side upper decorative substrate 214, which is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from approximately the center in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted thereon, and the side inner on the lower side A right side lower decorative board 216 having a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface thereof, and a rear side of the right side upper decorative board 214. The right side attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative substrate 214. An upper decorative board cover 218, and a right side lower decorative board cover 220 that covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative board 216 and is attached to the side lens 210 and the side decorative frame 202 so as to sandwich the right side lower decorative board 216. ing.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is disposed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 while being disposed at a front surface of the side lens 210 and in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, while being attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210. A plurality of side flash lenses 204 extending radially from the center, a side upper inner lens 206 disposed between the upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and the side upper inner lens 206 as a side inner lens. An inner lens bracket 208 to be attached to 212 and an upper right speaker 222 to be attached to the side upper inner lens 206 are provided.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, a side outer cover 202, a side flash lens 204, a side upper inner lens 205, an inner lens bracket 208, a side lens 210, and a side inner lens 212 are formed of a translucent member. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

  Although not shown in detail, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surfaces of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the side upper inner lens 206, 216a, 216b, etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side. The front surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are white, and the right side decorative unit 200 is efficiently decorated with light by the light from the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b, and the like. The decorative boards 214 and 216 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The right side upper decorative board 214 and the right side lower decorative board 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can appropriately emit light so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be illuminated.

  The side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example has a right end and an upper end formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base body 110 in a front view, and a left end at the gaming window 101 as shown in the figure. It is formed in a curved shape along the right outer periphery. The side lens 210 includes a peripheral lens portion 210a composed of a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, a plurality of peripheral lens portions 210a divided into a plurality in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, and a plurality extending substantially concentrically with the gaming window 101. A radiating lens portion 210b having a prism surface. As shown in the figure, the plurality of radiating lens portions 210b in the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend on the radiation centered on the lower central portion of the game window 101 when viewed from the front, and from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. Is also formed so as to be recessed backward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

  Further, the side lens 210 includes, on the right side, a side diffusion lens portion 210c that extends in the front-rear direction and is arranged in the vertical direction. By the side diffusion lens portion 210c, light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 can be diffused widely in the right direction and the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1. Although not shown in detail, a plurality of through holes are formed in the portion corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker 222 in the side lens 210, and the sound from the upper right speaker 222 is sent to the player side. It can be transmitted well.

  The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent, and is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side. As shown in the drawing, a portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a in the side lens 210 is formed in a wrinkle shape. In addition, a portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface shape. Although not shown in detail, the side inner lens 212 is formed with a plurality of small-diameter lenses at the peak portion protruding forward in a wrinkled portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210 a of the side lens 210. The side inner lens 212 can diffuse and refract light by a wrinkled portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses. As well as letting you see it, you can make it look strange.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and are disposed at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the LEDs 214b and 216b disposed at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 have a relatively high irradiation. Those having a narrow angle (for example, 15 ° -60 °) are used. Note that the LEDs 214c of the upper decorative board 214 on the right side are red and green LEDs in this example.

  Like the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs a mid-high range sound, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the side upper inner lens 206. ing. The upper side inner lens 206 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion that extends diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side in front view.

  The upper right speaker 222 in this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, and this causes noise to other pachinko machines. It has become difficult. The side upper inner lens 206 also has a wrinkle-like front surface as in the side inner lens 212, and a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the crest-like projecting portion of the wrinkled portion. In addition, the light can be irregularly refracted and diffusely reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small diameter lenses.

  The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged to be inserted in front of the radiating lens portion 210b that is recessed to the rear of the side lens 210, and imitates a rocky surface that is rugged by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. The side lens 210 thus made can be accented. Further, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by the light emission of the LEDs 214b and 216a of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged on the rear side, and the peripheral lens portion 210a. Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each of them.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Next, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36. FIG. 32A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the exploded side. FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decoration unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing a light emission mode of the left side decoration unit with a photograph.

  The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the drawing, and the right side is the gaming window 101. The left side and the upper side are formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and are formed asymmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has a substantially same width as the right side decoration unit 200 and extends in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, and an oval shape disposed between the large window frames 242a. A frame-shaped side lower decorative frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, two large window frames 244a that are continuous with the upper side of the side lower decorative frame 242 and extend in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, and a large And a frame-shaped side upper decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b disposed between the window frames 244a.

  The left side decoration unit 240 has a side flash lens 246 fitted from the rear side to the small window frames 242b and 244b of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and the side flash lens 246 on the rear side. A transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a fitted from the rear side to the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the side lens 250 An inner decorative member 251 provided with a plurality of slits 251a disposed on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a and extending in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 and having a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 A plurality of bands extending in a radial pattern centered on the lower left and right center of the gaming window 101 A side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by the lens, and a.

  The left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and the left side upper decoration in which a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface. A substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256, which is disposed on the lower side from a substantially center in the vertical direction of the side inner lens 252 and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface. A left side upper decorative substrate cover 258 that covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and a left side that covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative substrate 256 Left side lower decorative board cover attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decorative board 256 It is provided with a 60, a.

  Furthermore, the left side decoration unit 240 includes a left upper speaker 262 disposed on the front side of the side inner lens 252 and on the upper right portion of the front view, and a transparent upper portion that supports the upper left speaker 262 and is attached to the upper right portion of the front surface of the side inner lens 252. The upper speaker bracket 264 and a diffusion part formed by a plurality of band-like lenses attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264 and inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 at the upper right of the front view and extending radially centered on the lower left and right centers And an upper right inner lens 266 having 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

  In the left side decoration unit 240, a side lower decoration frame 242, a side upper decoration frame 244, a left side upper decoration board cover 258, and a left side lower decoration board cover 260 are formed of a light-impermeable member. The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer of a predetermined color (in this example, silver). Further, the side flash lens 246 has translucency and is entirely made of a milky white synthetic resin. Further, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

  In this example, both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (the small windows with respect to the radial axial direction centering on the lower left and right central lower portions of the gaming window 101). On both sides of the frames 242b and 244b, there are formed opening frames 242c and 244c that pass through the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 in a state of being cut out, and the small window frames 242b and 244b and The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear side of the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 cannot be visually recognized by the milky white side flash lens 246. .

  On the other hand, the large window frames 242a and 244a in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 are closed by inserting the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 from the rear side. An inner decorative member 251 disposed on the rear side through 250a is visible from the player side. A diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, and light is irregularly refracted by the diffusion portion 252a so that the rear of the side inner lens 252 passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. The side cannot be clearly seen. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. Etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side.

  Further, the front surfaces of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white, and the left side decorative unit 240 is efficiently decorated with light emission by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, and the like. The decorative boards 254, 256 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit. The left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. The left side decoration unit 240 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light.

  The lower side decorative frame 242 in the left side decorative unit 240 of the present example has a shape extending in the vertical direction along the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the rear side open. The side lower decorative frame 242 is arranged between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small frame disposed between the large window frames 242a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. A window frame 242b, and an opening frame 242c that is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 242b (the game window 101 side and the outside of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface. Is formed.

  The side lower decorative frame 242 is configured such that the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is fitted from the rear side. That is, the side lower decorative frame 242 can form a peripheral lens portion 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and an outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively.

  Further, the side upper decoration frame 244 in the left side decoration unit 240 is continuous with the upper end of the side lower decoration frame 242 and extends from the upper left outer periphery to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in a substantially triangular shape. It is formed in a U-shaped cross-section with the side opened. The side upper decoration frame 244 includes two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small window frame disposed between the large window frames 244a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. 244b and an opening frame 244c that is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 244b (the game window 101 side and the outside of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface, and is formed of a synthetic resin. ing.

  The side upper decorative frame 244 is configured such that the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and the side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is fitted from the rear side. That is, the side upper decorative frame 244 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively. The side upper decorative frame 244 forms a design that is continuous with the side lower decorative frame 242 when assembled as the left side decorative unit 240.

  In this example, the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 are colored black, and the side lenses facing the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. 250 and the side flash lens 246 are highlighted.

  Further, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size that combines the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and has a size that extends from the center to the left side of the left and upper sides of the game window 101. Yes. The side lens 250 has a configuration in which the peripheral lens portion 250a fitted into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 is recessed from the rear side, and is recessed rearward between the peripheral lens portions 250a. And a radiation lens portion 250b in which a side flash lens 246 is disposed on the front side. The side lens 250 is formed by one curved surface in which the peripheral lens portion 250a is smoothly curved, and the radiation lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. The side lens 250 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

  Furthermore, the inner decorative member 251 in the left side decorative unit 240 includes a plurality of slits 251 a that are disposed on the rear side of each peripheral lens portion 250 a in the side lens 250 and extend along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the drawing, the inner decorative member 251 has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and is concentric with the center of the gaming window 101 as a center. Several are provided. In addition, the inner decorative member 251 has a front surface in which a plurality of slits 251 a are formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250. Note that the inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, and is visible from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. .

  In addition, the side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251 and has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Yes. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion portion 252a that bulges forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decorative member 251 is inserted into the inner decorative member 251 from the rear side. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed with a plurality of band-like lenses extending radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the gaming window 101 on the front surface, and the extending direction of the band-like lens is arranged on the front side. The decorative member 251 intersects (substantially orthogonal) with the direction in which the slit 251a extends.

  In the side inner lens 252, the diffusion part 252 a can be seen from the player side through the slit 251 a of the inner decorative member 251. The rear side cannot be clearly seen through the portion 252a. Further, as shown in the drawing, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion portions 252a, and light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side. Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

  The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and are larger than the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244. The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °). LEDs 254b disposed at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c (the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246) of the lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, 256b has a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 6 °). °) is used.

  Similar to the side speaker 130, the upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs a mid-high range sound and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. Yes. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion (not shown) that protrudes obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the back of the upper end of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via a protective plate 268 so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side in a front view. It has become. Further, the protection plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent the mischief of the left upper speaker 262 or the breaking of the cone of the upper left speaker 262 to insert an unauthorized tool into the pachinko machine 1. It has become. The upper left speaker 262 of this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below and is less likely to be noisy with respect to other pachinko machines.

  Next, a characteristic light emission effect in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 includes a side lens 250 including a transparent peripheral lens portion 250a that forms and curved the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240, and is disposed on the rear surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a metallic gloss plating layer and provided with a plurality of slits 251a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and disposed in the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the slit 251a. The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 on which a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a are mounted on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 and a side inner lens 252 having a diffusion portion 252a composed of a plurality of band-shaped lenses. (See FIG. 35 and the like). Thereby, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are caused to emit light, the light irradiated forward is diffused by the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. It is irradiated from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 toward the player side, so that the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated and decorated.

  By the way, a part of the light irradiated forward (side lens 250 side) through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is transmitted to the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a to irradiate the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. And since the inner decoration member 251 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected toward the inner decoration member 251 by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a is the surface of the inner decoration member 251. The light is reflected toward the peripheral lens portion 250a at the (front surface), and a part of the light reflected from the surface of the inner decorative member 251 passes through the peripheral lens portion 250a and is irradiated to the player side.

  At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the circumferential lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251 and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are smoothly curved, so The light reflected on the rear surface side converges and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) diffuses, and the peripheral lens portion 250a has a direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 and a peripheral light. The indirect light reflected by the front surface of the lens part 250a and the inner decorative member 251 is irradiated to the shifted positions. Further, the light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused in a stripe shape and intersected by the diffusion portion 252a formed by the plurality of band-like lenses in the side inner lens 252. It diffuses in the direction of (substantially orthogonal). Accordingly, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of striped lights having different shades extending in a direction that is longer than the width of the slit 251a and intersecting the direction in which the slit 251a extends. As a result, a fantastic luminous decoration with a sense of perspective can be made (see FIG. 36).

[1-2D. Upper decoration unit]
Next, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the rear.

  The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. 17 and the like, at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5 and between the upper edge on the center side in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the drawing, the upper decoration unit 280 includes an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extended frame 281b that extends from the upper part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes thinner toward the tip, and A front decoration member 281 having a frame-like lower extension frame 281c extending from the lower part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becoming thinner toward the tip, and an upper extension frame 281b and a lower part arranged on the rear side of the front decoration member 281 A translucent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a having a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a and a cylindrical shape that is inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282 while closing the inside of the extension frame 281c. A central sleeve 283; an upper central lens 284 inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward; and a surface disposed on the rear side of the upper central lens 284 A plate-like diffusion lens 285 having a plurality of fine prisms formed thereon, an annular lens support member 286 that holds the outer periphery of the diffusion lens 285 and supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the lens support member 286 A light shielding member 287 having a cylindrical portion 287a having a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286, and a position corresponding to the inside of the cylindrical portion 287a of the light shielding member 287 disposed on the rear side of the light shielding member 287. A plurality of LEDs 288a, and an upper central decorative substrate 288 on which a plurality of LEDs 288b arranged at positions corresponding to the outside of the tube portion 287a are mounted on the front surface.

  The upper decoration unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decoration member 281, the upper lens 282, the light shielding member 287, and the upper central decoration substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of front decoration units 280 disposed on the rear side of the unit base 289. The upper side decorative board 290 on which the LED 290a is mounted, the board cover 291 that covers the rear surface of the upper side decorative board 290 and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 289, and is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the board cover 291 and extends backward. A mounting bracket 292, an upper lower cover 293 attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extending rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281; An upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped into a shape.

  Further, the upper decoration unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward from the upper rear end of the front decoration member 281 in a plate shape, and has a notch 295a having a rear end opened at the center in the left-right direction. A cover 295; a plate-like lid member 296 that closes the notch 295a of the upper upper cover 295; and a decorative member 297 that is attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 when viewed from the front and shaped into a predetermined shape. .

  In the upper decorative unit 280 of this example, a plated layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decorative member 281 so that the front decorative member 281 glitters with light from the outside. The upper lens 282 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a central ring lens portion 282b facing the center frame 281a of the front decorative member 281 on the outer periphery of the through hole 282a, and an upper extension of the front decorative member 281. And an extended frame lens portion 282c facing the inside of the frame 281b and the lower extended frame 281c. In the upper lens 282, a plurality of band-like lenses extending radially are arranged in the circumferential direction on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b, and the axis of the through hole 282a is centered on the front surface of the extended frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of concentrically extending prisms are formed. As a result, the plurality of prisms and belt-like lenses of the upper lens 282 can diffuse light, so that the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be clearly seen.

  The upper central lens 284 of the upper decoration unit 280 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 has a smooth spindle shape on the front side, whereas a plurality of concentric lenses are formed on the rear side, so that light can be irregularly refracted. Is invisible.

  In addition, the upper central decorative board 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs, and within the frame of the central frame 281a of the upper central lens 284 and the front decorative member 281. The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 can be separately decorated with light emission. Furthermore, the upper side decorative board 290 of the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface as full color LEDs, and these LEDs 290a are the upper extending frame 281b and the lower extending frame 281c in the front decorative member 281. Are arranged at positions corresponding to the inside of the frame. The upper side decorative board 290 can make the upper extended frame 281b and the lower extended frame 281c of the front decorative member 281 have a light emission decoration by appropriately causing the LED 290a to emit light.

[1-2E. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view taken along a portion of the ball rental unit of the tray unit in the door frame.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls paid out from a prize ball device 740 to be described later, and games stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a ball hitting device 650 described later via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of the present example includes a substantially plate-shaped dish unit base 310 that is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and that extends in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped upper plate body 312 that is fixed at the approximate center of the front surface, opened upward and rearward, and has a large left side (axial support side) in front view and bulges forward. Upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction is projected forward, upper plate front decoration member 316 attached to the upper front edge of upper plate upper panel 314, and upper plate front part The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 disposed between the decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 is continuous with the right portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and is located on the right upper side of the upper plate upper panel 314. A dish upper right decorative member 319 on the cover, and a.

  In addition, the dish unit 300 is attached to the lower surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 from the right and left center to the lower surface on the right side, and is attached to the lower side of the board mounting base 320. And an upper plate decorative substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted thereon. A part of the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper right decoration member 319 can be illuminated by decorating the LED 322a of the upper dish decoration substrate 322 as appropriate.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the dish unit base 310 at the lower side of the upper dish body 312 and opened upward and rearward, and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in front view and the front end toward the center in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped lower dish body 324 formed to become lower toward the front, and fixed to the upper part of the lower dish body 324, and in the front view, the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in the same manner as the lower dish body 324. A plate-like lower plate top plate 326 that is curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 to be described later are provided at a portion that covers the lower end front end of the lower plate body 324 and extends to the right side in front view. A lower plate cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing it, and an upper opening formed coaxially with the lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 by decorating the right side from the position of the lower left and right center left sides of the lower plate cover 328 A lower tray right side cover 330 provided with a lower opening 330b of the handle 500 is inserted from the open front below the 330a and the upper opening 330a, and a.

  Also, the dish unit 300 is arranged at the lower end of the lower dish upper left side cover 332 and the lower dish upper left side cover 332 that are obliquely extended to cover the left side front end of the lower dish main body 324 and the left front end of the lower dish top plate 326, and the front and rear. A lower plate lower left side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 made of a metal plate that allows the sound to be transmitted by closing the opening 334a of the lower plate lower left side cover 334 from the rear side, and protection A frame-shaped holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower pan lower left side cover 334. The right front end of the lower dish top plate 326 is covered with an upper dish front decorative member 316.

  The dish unit 300 is attached to the upper left and right ends of the dish unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish upper left cover 332 are designed. A side speaker cover 338 formed in a continuous shape and having an opening 338a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338 A cover body 339 having a plurality of holes in the shape of a disk that is loosely curved so as to close 338a from the rear side and bulge to the front side.

  In this example, since the cover body 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to be deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 is possible. As long as it can be protected. The side speaker cover 338 has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The cover body 339 is colored black.

  Further, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 for removing game balls attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish body 312 and stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302, and a lower dish body 324. A lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 for pulling downward the game balls attached to the lower surface and stored in the lower tray 302, and installed on the upper left side in front view of the tray unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball rental unit 360 that operates a ball rental machine (also referred to as a CR unit, not shown).

  The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. The dish unit 300 constitutes a lower dish 302 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the lower dish body 324, the lower dish top plate 326, the lower dish cover 328, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper end edge extending in the left-right direction. Is provided. A ball rental unit attachment portion 310b for penetrating in the front-rear direction and attaching the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a. The dish unit base 310 is disposed on the lower side of the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner when viewed from the front) and has a horizontally long rectangular shape that passes through in the front-rear direction and an upper dish ball supply port 310c. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction below the right end of the decorative portion 310a on the lower side of the mouth 310c (substantially in the height direction of the plate unit base 310), and the upper plate And a pair of lower tray support portions 310e that are disposed directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper tray ball supply port 310c, protrude forward, and have the same upper surface. The upper dish ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower dish support part 310e arranged immediately below.

  The dish unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower dish support portions 310e and is fitted to the rear ends of the lower dish body 324 and the lower dish top plate 326, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular ring in front view. A groove 310f and a rectangular lower dish ball supply port 310g that is disposed in the lower right portion of the center surrounded by the lower dish support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction are provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply bowl 310h that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish bowl supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish bowl supply bowl 310h. A notch 310i formed on a side surface and having a size through which a game ball can pass.

  The upper tray ball supply port 310 c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base main body 110 and the cutout portions 101 a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. The unit 540 communicates with the first ball outlet 544a. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends in the right direction in the front view and is recessed backward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side when viewed from the front is slightly lower with respect to the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower with respect to the front-rear direction. As a result, the difference in height between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 increases toward the right end of the guide recess 310j. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 are: Since it becomes impossible to go straight into the front upper plate 301 from the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the paid-out game ball comes into contact with the game ball whose front side is closed and rolls. The direction is changed, and is guided to roll rightward in the guide recess 310j, and is released from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower stages in the upper plate 301, so that when the game ball blocks the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the player does not bring the game ball by hand. However, it is possible to continue to supply (release) the game balls that have been paid out into the upper plate 301, and to prevent the player from feeling troublesome about the storage of the game balls in the upper plate 301. , By dedicating the player to the game ball driving operation and the game using the game ball that has been driven in, it is possible to suppress the interest in the game from being reduced, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 Can be done.

  The upper dish ball outlet 310d of the dish unit base 310 includes an opening 344a of the upper dish ball removal base 344 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. Via the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply rod 310h extending rearward from the rear side extends rearward through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 It is connected to the ball passage 344c of the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  In this example, as shown in the drawing, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with an enlarged portion 310k that spreads leftward in a front view, and the lower dish ball supply port is provided by this enlarged portion 310k. The front end of 310g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at the lower plate ball supply port 310g at an early stage due to the game balls in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310g, and more games The sphere can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

  The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (the shaft support side) bulges forward from the center in the front view, and the bottom surface is entirely lowered at the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. Yes. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 has a rear end on the pivot support side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310 c in the plate unit base 310, and a rear end on the open side of the upper plate ball discharge port 310 d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed so as to be located in the vicinity of the middle position in the vertical direction, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 313 that can come into contact with the game ball from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 313 is electrically grounded (grounded) so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper dish body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper dish body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed which penetrates in the vertical direction to which an upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, which will be described later, is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape at the front end that is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312, and a decoration attachment portion 314 b for attaching the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper inner decoration member 318. And an operation unit mounting portion 314c that is formed in a step shape that is further lower than the decorative mounting portion 314b at a position in front of the upper plate body 312 at the center in the left-right direction and for mounting an operation unit 400 to be described later. Yes.

  The upper dish front decoration member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in a shape extending in a curved shape in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper dish upper panel 314. The upper dish front decorative member 316 is formed with a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape on the right side, while the left side is formed in a smooth shape from a position right to the center in the left-right direction. It is formed in such a rugged shape. Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish front decoration member 316 is omitted, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the rear surface on the right side formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and light can be irregularly refracted. The rear side is not clearly visible from the player side. The upper dish upper inner decorative member 318 is disposed on the rear side of the left smoothly formed portion of the upper dish front decorative member 316, and is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. As a result, the upper dish upper inner decorative member 318 can be clearly seen from the player side through the left side of the upper dish front decorative member 316 in the assembled state, whereas the upper dish upper inner decorative member 318 has a right side of the upper dish front decorative member 316. The part that can be seen through is unclear from the player side and looks like a feeling of distance.

  The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a plurality of curved surfaces whose surfaces are curved in a spindle shape, similar to the right part of the upper dish front decorative member 316. The upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of the upper dish ball removal button 341 which will be described later. Further, the upper dish upper right decorative member 319 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the back surface (lower surface), can diffuse light refractingly, and the lower side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. Yes. An upper plate decoration board 322 is disposed on the rear side of the right portion of the upper plate front decoration member 316 and on the lower side of the upper plate upper right decoration member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decoration board 322 is connected to the upper plate decoration board 322. By appropriately emitting light, the upper dish front decorative member 316 and the upper dish upper right decorative member 319 can emit light appropriately.

  The lower plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a that extends in a fan shape forward in a plan view and has a rear end that is formed in a straight line in the left-right direction and has a substantially lower center on the upper surface, and a center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from the front end and side end excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest on the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and the bottom plate 324a The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower dish top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear part of the upper end.

  The lower plate body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324 a and the side plate 324 c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310 f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by an opening / closing shutter 352 of a lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 disposed on the back side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower dish cover 328 is made of a black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower dish side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and provided with a plated layer having a silvery metallic appearance (matte state such as a sandblast treatment instead of a mirror surface) on the surface. The lower dish side cover 330 includes a plate-like portion that extends rearward from the lower end and forms a part of the bottom surface of the dish unit 300. The lock hole 328 a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330 a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

  The lower pan upper left cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The lower pan lower left cover 334 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plating layer having a red metallic luster on the surface, and extends rearward from the lower end to a part of the bottom surface of the pan unit 300. The plate-shaped part which forms is provided. An opening 334a of the lower left lower cover 334 is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of a speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 to be described later, so that sound from the speaker 821 can be transmitted to the player side. It has become. The protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower pan lower left cover 334 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed in a metal plate, and prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted therein.

  The dish unit 300 of this example is configured such that the bottom surface except the center in the left-right direction is closed by the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish left lower cover 334. Is closed by a lower dish ball removing mechanism 340 described later.

  The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 is provided for the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341 that is attached to the attachment hole 314a of the upper dish upper panel 314 so as to be movable back and forth, and the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341. The upper plate ball release button 341 is moved up and down more than the vertical movement of the upper plate ball 341 and is supported on the front side of the plate unit base 310. The operation piece 342 is supported so as to be operable (turnable), and the plate unit base 310 is supported. And a contact piece that slides up and down by the vertical movement of the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 and comes into contact with an operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583 in a ball feed unit 580 described later. An upper dish ball removal slider 343 that is provided on the rear side of the dish unit base 310 and includes an upper dish ball removal slider 34. The an upper pan ball vent base 344 attached to the rear side of the vertical direction slidably supported to be countersunk unit base 310, and a.

  Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 is omitted, an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper dish ball removal button 341 is arranged so that the upper dish ball removal button 341 is positioned at the upper moving end. The coil spring is urged upward. The upper dish ball removal slider 343 is biased upward by a coil spring provided between the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  The upper dish ball removal base 344 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper dish ball discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 and simultaneously communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to open forward 344a (see FIG. 43), and a ball guiding channel 344b that communicates with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper dish ball removing base 344 and guides the game ball that has passed through the opening 344a downward and then guided backward (FIGS. 42 and 44) and after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b, it extends toward the right side (axial support side) end portion in rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper dish ball removing base 344. And a ball passage 344c through which game balls can be distributed.

  In the upper dish ball removal base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper dish ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guide channel 344b communicated with the opening 344a is the ball of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is transferred to the ball feed unit 580 so as to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feed opening 113. Can be supplied to.

  Further, the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding channel 344b of the upper plate ball removing base 344 communicates with the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 through the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110. In addition, the lower end extending to the shaft support side communicates with the notch 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game balls discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 are It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The rear end lower portion of the bulb passage 344c is closed by an upper dish bulb passage cover 345.

  When the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward is also provided. Move down. Then, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 in a predetermined direction by moving the contact piece 343a downward. The partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are transferred from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 via the opening 344a and the ball guide channel 344b of the upper plate ball removal base 344. After entering, it is discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball outlet channel 344c of the upper dish ball base 344, and from the lower dish ball supply port 310g through the lower dish ball supply port 310h through the lower dish ball supply rod 310h. Can be discharged.

  Note that the ball removal member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is biased upward by the coil spring. Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent breakage and to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a.

  The lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 is arranged between the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish lower left cover 334 on the lower side of the lower dish body 324 and forms a bottom center part of the dish unit 300. A punching base 351, a plate-like opening / closing shutter 352 pivotally supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removal base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324, and the opening / closing shutter 352 are rotated. A lower dish ball removal slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removal base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower dish ball removal button 354 attached to the front end of the lower dish ball removal slider 353. Yes.

  The lower dish ball removal base 351 includes a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324. The open / close shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b, and a shutter ball extraction hole which is disposed on the front side of the closing portion 352a and penetrates in the vertical direction and can substantially coincide with the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b. 352b, and the closing portion 352a is biased by the coil spring 356 between the lower dish ball removal base 351 and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b and the base ball removal hole 351a. .

  Although not shown in detail, the open / close shutter 352 includes a contact pin that can come into contact with the lower dish ball removal slider 353, and the contact pin comes into contact with the lower dish ball removal slider 353. The lower plate ball removal slider 353 is rotated so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b move rearward, or the lower plate ball removal slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring 356. Be able to.

  Further, the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 is configured such that the shutter ball removal hole 352b of the opening / closing shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 and the base ball removal hole 351a of the lower dish ball removal base 351. In order to hold in the moving position, a holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower dish ball removal slider 353 in a predetermined position is further provided.

  The lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower dish ball removal button 354 is moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower dish ball removal button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower dish cover 328 or the like. Yes, the lower plate ball hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game ball can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (the lower plate 302). When the lower dish ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pushed rearward, the lower dish ball removal button 354 and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slide rearward and are opened and closed by sliding the lower dish ball removal slider 353 backward. The shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball hole 352b move backward.

  Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball hole 352b overlaps with the lower plate ball hole 324b and the base ball hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball hole 352b and the lower plate ball hole are formed. 324b matches, and the game balls stored in the lower dish 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 300 through the lower dish ball removal hole 324b. When the lower dish ball removal slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removal hole 352b and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is locked (held), the lower dish ball removal button 354 is left in the opened state, and the shutter ball removal hole 352b is provided in the lower dish ball. The game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball removal button 354 is not kept depressed, while being held in a state where it matches the hole 3324b.

  On the other hand, when closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b, when the retracted lower dish ball removal button 354 is further pushed backward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the lower dish ball removal slide 353, and the lower dish The ball slide 353 can be slid, and the open / close shutter 352 urged by the coil spring in the direction to close the lower plate ball removal hole 324b by the coil spring, the closing portion 352a is lowered by the urging force. It will rotate in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball removal hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removal slide 353 slides forward, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower dish ball removal button 354 is lowered. It returns to the position of the closed state substantially coinciding with the front surface of the dish cover 328 and the like, and the game ball can be stored in the lower dish 302.

  Note that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-described function, and a detailed description of the detailed mechanism is omitted.

  The lending unit 360 in the dish unit 300 includes a lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display portion 363 between the lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball lending unit 360 is pushed into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then pushes the ball lending button 361, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit 300. It can be lent out (paid out) into the upper plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the loaned portion is drawn and the cash balance or prepaid card that has been inserted is returned. Yes. Further, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

  The ball rental unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball rental unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. The ball lending unit 360 includes a security cover mounting portion 364 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

  More specifically, the lending unit 360 includes a transparent front cover 365 that covers the front side of the lending remaining display portion 363, a lending remaining display portion 363 that is disposed on the rear side of the front cover 365, and a lending button 361. And a ball rental unit board 366 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch operated by operating the return button 362 is attached, and the rear side of the ball rental unit mounting part 310b of the tray unit base 310 covering the rear side of the ball rental unit board 366. A rear cover 367 attached to the rear cover. The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 364.

  The ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the ball rental unit 360 is mounted is formed between the circular button opening 310m facing the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 and the button openings 310m. A transparent front cover 365 that closes the display opening 310n is provided with a rectangular display opening 310n that is closed by the cover 365, and a protrusion 310o that is formed on the outer periphery of the two button openings 310m and protrudes forward. The rental remaining display part 363 arranged on the rear side through the player can be seen from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protrusion 310o of the dish unit base 310 has a rounded front end.

  As shown in the figure, the ball rental unit 360 of the present example has a ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 disposed above the upper plate 301 and directly above the upper plate ball supply port 310c. It is arranged to face. In the rental unit 360, the return button 362 is disposed at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the rental button 361. In this example, the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 are colored differently from the plate unit base 310 (ball rental unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the lending button 361 and the return button 362.

  The ball rental unit 360 also includes a protruding portion 310o that protrudes forward (player side) from the outer periphery of the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362, and when the player inserts a hand into the upper plate 301. Since the hand touches the protruding portion 310o before the hand touches the lending button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be aware of the presence of the lending button 361 or the return button 362. It is possible to prevent erroneous operation of 361, the return button 362, and the like.

  The dish unit 300 of the present example includes an upper dish 301 and a lower dish 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as a conventional pachinko machine having two storage dishes. The pachinko machine 1 can be reminiscent, and even with the new pachinko machine 1 (new pachinko machine), it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 easy to select as a pachinko machine to play by reducing anxiety given to the player. It has become.

[1-2F. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50. 46A is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46B is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the pressing operation unit is pressed in the operation unit.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and a press that can be pressed by the player An operation unit 405, which can accept a player's operation or move the dial operation unit 401 in accordance with the gaming state, and not only a game ball driving operation for the player It is intended to be able to participate in production during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a columnar pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular follower coupled to the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disc-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 that is fixed to the rotating shaft of the drive gear 412, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support tube 416b that supports the pressing operation unit 405 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the press operation unit 405 disposed in the button support tube 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 are arranged. A spring 418 that biases upward, and an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a and the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 can pass are provided. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 422a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 that is attached so as to sandwich the base member 420 under the upper cover 422 and covers the lower surface of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass, and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c in the dish unit 300, and a plating which is disposed on the upper side of the cover body 426 and has a predetermined shape and has a silver metallic luster on the surface. An inner cover 427 provided with a layer and a transparent surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylinder 401c of the dial operation unit 401 can pass.

  Further, the operation unit 400 has an opening 430 a that is attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the button support cylinder 416 b of the operation section holding member 416 and the inner cylinder section 401 a of the dial operation section 401 can pass. A dial decoration board 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the ring of the ring, and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a that are fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 and detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401. 432b, a press detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface immediately below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decoration substrate 432 is latched and held on the lower surface of the operation portion holding member 416 by a substrate holding claw 416g of the operation portion holding member 416.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a material having translucency, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder part 401a extending in the vertical direction and outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder part 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extended surface, an outer tube portion 401c that extends downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b in a cylindrical shape, and is shorter than the inner tube portion 401a, and an outer tube And a flange portion 401d extending in an annular shape outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange 401 d in the dial operation unit 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a in the upper cover 422. Further, the dial operation unit 401 includes a connection locking portion 401e (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder portion 401a. The part 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a at a position that is lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401a. As will be described in detail later, the protruding portion 401 f can come into contact with the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By abutting on the portion 401f, the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) can be prevented from being further immersed into the inner cylinder portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the protrusion 401 f of the dial operation unit 401 and the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation unit 405 are arranged such that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation unit 401. In this case, the contact area is increased when they are in contact with each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose upper end is closed, a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 disposed inside the button body 407 and sandwiched between the upper end of the button main body 406 and the button cap 407. The button main body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape whose bottom surface is narrowed downward, and the upper end of a coiled spring 418 is inserted into the truncated cone-shaped bottom surface. In addition, a through-hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and the light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 through the through-hole 406a. It is like that.

  The button main body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b that extend downward from the lower outer periphery and protrude outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. By engaging with a locking projection 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward movement end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not come out of the button support 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button support tube 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 includes a contact portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is prevented from rotating within the button support cylinder 416b. A predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the button main body 406 has a predetermined angle by the gap. It can be rotated within the range.

  Further, the button main body 406 includes a pressing detection piece 406c that extends downward from a different position on the outer peripheral lower part of the locking claw 406b and can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decorative substrate 432. The press detection piece 406c is detected by the press detection sensor 432c when the button body 406 (press operation unit 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has an outer diameter lower than a substantially center in the vertical direction smaller than the upper side, and a stepped portion 407a between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a lower diameter than the step portion 407a smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and an upper side than the step portion 407a is a dial operation portion. The inner cylindrical portion 401a 401 has a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operation portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 contacts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. The button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner tube 401a (see FIG. 50).

  Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. A character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 includes a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on an annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b in the operation portion holding member 416, and an annular slide that contacts the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. A moving surface 410a is provided. When the sliding gear 410 is inserted into the button support cylinder 416b and the sliding surface 410a is brought into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It can be done.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connection locking claws 410 b that extend upward from a position at which the upper ends are opposed to each other and project inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation unit 401 are connected to each other so as to be integrally rotatable by being locked with the connection locking portion 401e of the inner cylinder portion 401a.

  The driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, and slits formed between the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c. By 410d, the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c. In this example, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410 and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle, and the drive gear 412 is driven to rotate by the dial drive motor 414 via the rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating forward and reverse rotations of the drive gear 412 (rotary shaft) in small increments by the dial drive motor 414. Further, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a predetermined rotation angle for a short time on the basis of detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, so that the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. A feeling can be given.

  Further, the operation unit holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. Button support cylinder 416b that slidably moves in the vertical direction, and a locking projection 416f that is formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and can be locked with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 49 and FIG. 50), and a through hole 416c that transmits light from the LED 432d that passes through the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and is mounted on the button decoration board 432 to the button support cylinder 416b (press operation unit 405). And a rotation detection sensor 4 attached to the button decoration board 432 through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. 2a and 432b, an opening 416d through which the bottom of the button support tube 416b passes in the vertical direction, and an opening 416e attached to the button decoration board 432 from the upper side. A pair of board holding claws 416g for locking and holding the extended button decorative board 432.

  Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support cylinder 416b, and forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and is locked. A plurality of abutting portions that can abut against the claw 406b are further provided. By this contact portion, the button main body 406 (the pressing operation portion 405) can be rotated within a predetermined angle range, and is not rotated in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although the detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning the base member 420 and the button decoration board 432, and the like are appropriately positioned. Is provided.

  The operation portion holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401) about a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 through the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing it on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so as to be rotatable. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button main body 406, and the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion) is arranged by the spring 418. 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, and the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is hit strongly. The base member 420 has a lower concave portion 420b that can be fitted to the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 and is recessed upward, and a bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b that vertically penetrates the operation holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c that is disposed on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b across the opening 420a and that is recessed downwardly so as to accommodate at least the driven gear 410. I have. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b and is attached to the motor mounting portion 420d for attaching the dial drive motor 414, and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and positioning holes 420f opening downward at the lower ends of the leg portions 420e are provided.

  The base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 disposed on the outer side of the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is located upward from a different position outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decoration board 430. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses and mounting holes for positioning each member at appropriate positions on the upper and lower surfaces thereof.

  The base member 420 is inserted into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower concave portion 420b, so that the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although the detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the top surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c when the operation unit holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 placed on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate within the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof fitted to a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424 described later. 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 accommodated in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

  Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor mounting portion 420d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. Thus, the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. Thereby, the overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and includes an opening 422a having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the flange portion 401d cannot pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation unit 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. The engaging claw 422b that protrudes downward is provided at both ends in the major axis direction, and the engaging claw 422b is engaged with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  Further, the upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer periphery of one side (front side in the pachinko machine 1) in the short axis direction (front and rear direction in the pachinko machine 1), and has a claw-like locking piece 422c that protrudes outward at the lower end. It has. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper dish front decoration member 316 in the dish unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper dish front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming out upward from the operation unit mounting portion 314c.

  The upper cover 422 is configured such that the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the base member 420 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422a in a state where the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration board 430, the dial member 401, and the like are attached. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass, it is possible to prevent the dial operation unit 401 from being pulled upward by the opening 422a.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially coincident with the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 includes engaging portions 424b that can engage with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at the upper portions of both ends in the long axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

  As shown in the figure, the cover main body 426 in the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that passes through the center in the vertical direction and through which the upper cover 422 can pass, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c, and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the lower surface of the outer periphery of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420.

  The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing part 426b of the cover main body 426. Although not shown in detail, the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment part 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached in a state where the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is slightly lifted from the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm). The cover body 426 can be elastically deformed to reduce the impact when it is pressed or hit.

  In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached with a predetermined screw to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and then The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover main body 426.

  In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has a circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The length in the direction is the same length. In addition, the pair of rotation detection sensors 432 a and 432 b attached to the button decoration board 432 has an interval in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 that is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410. It is said that. Accordingly, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and rotation by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b. In which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the detection piece 410c.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 of this example can rotate the dial operation unit 401 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 step by step by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, Rotation can be assisted, it can be prevented from turning on purpose, or a click can be added to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 forward and backward in small increments.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 50, in the operation unit 400 of this example, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed downward, the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401 f of the dial operating unit 401, and the button cap Since 407 (press operation part 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401a, the load applied to the press operation part 405 is dialed via the step part 407a and the protrusion part 401f. The operation unit 401 can be dispersed, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of this example presses the pressing operation unit 405 so that the dial drive motor 414 is adjusted in small increments while the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401 are in contact with each other. By repeatedly rotating and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be vibrated together with the dial operation unit 401, and the player can be surprised by the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 so that the game and production can be enjoyed. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if a player or the like hits the operation units 401 and 405 strongly, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely attached to the player. In addition to being able to operate, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and to prevent the player's interest in the game from deteriorating by enjoying the effects using the operation units 401 and 405. it can.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401. If the pressing operation unit 405 is struck strongly, the dial operation unit 401 is also struck, The force of hitting 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and it is possible to prevent the hitting impact from being concentrated and prevent the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 can be made to withstand strong hits, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to improve the operability of 405 and to entertain the performance using the operation units 401 and 405 and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As shown, when the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300 and the operation parts 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to give an impact or a load is applied, Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the cover body 426 can absorb an impact and a load by elastic deformation, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 is connected to the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, an impact is caused by the bottom of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (the dish unit 300). Since the load can be received, the impacts from the operation units 401 and 405 can be dispersed to avoid the concentration of the impacts, and the impact resistance and load resistance by the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 can be reduced. Can be increased.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of legs 420e protruding downward from positions where the operation parts 401 and 405 are supported, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the dish unit 300. Even when the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 is applied to the base member 420 by contacting the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not arranged immediately below the impact, so the operation portions 401 and 405 in the base member 420 are not provided. The portion that supports the base plate is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), so that the shock from the operation units 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. It is possible to reduce the impact and prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps the base member 420 in plan view. Even when the operation unit holding member 416 that holds the dial operation unit 401 moves away from the base member 420 when the operation unit 401 is struck from the upper side, the dial operation unit 401 comes into contact with the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 and can satisfactorily prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

  Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 disposed at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the gaming state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotation drive including vibration). Thus, the player can be surprised and attention can be paid to the effects produced by the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can be entertained. The effects using the 401 (press operation unit 405) can be made more difficult to get tired of, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in games from being reduced.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotation axis of the dial drive motor 414 is, as a matter of course, the dial operation unit 401 (driven gear). 410), even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, the impact is transmitted via the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401. Direct dial drive motor 414 can be avoided and damage to dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented.

  Furthermore, since the opening 420a of the base member 420 has a smaller diameter than the dial operation unit 401, the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can abut on the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 becomes the base member. It is possible to reliably prevent a drop from 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation portion holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and load from the operation.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotating the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 is driven. Although the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite being driven by the rotation, even if the amount of heat generated due to excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 increases, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated and radiated satisfactorily through the base member 420, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from being defective due to overheating. That can withstand high loads. Can be sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial driving means 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a press detection sensor 432c for detecting the press of the press operation unit 405 are provided, and the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 are provided. Rotation operation and pressing operation can be detected, so that it is possible to produce an effect according to the player's operation based on the detection signal, and it is more effective for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide an experience with a bodily sensation, and to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained. In addition, a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 for decorating the operation units 401 and 405 are provided, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be decorated with light emission, so that the operation units 401 and 405 emit light. Thus, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

  Further, when the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation portion 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are in contact with each other, so that the player can press the pressing operation portion 405. When the dial is pressed, the dial operation unit 401 is vibrated by repeating forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined angle range by the dial drive motor 414, thereby allowing the dial operation unit 401 to contact the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 via the step 407a. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation with respect to the pressing operation 405 without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, an effect using the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls. Further, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405 that the user thought would not move. It is possible to make it seem that there is something, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the interest from deteriorating. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the production using the operation unit 400. It is possible to facilitate the operation of the operation unit 400 to the player, and the enjoyment of the game by reducing the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other, so that the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even when the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed also on the dial operation unit 401 side, and load resistance and impact resistance against the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed. Can be increased. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent a player's interest in games from being reduced due to the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range with respect to the axial center extending in the vertical direction. When the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even if the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, the pressing operation unit 405 can be prevented from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can perform the dial operation in the operation unit 400. The role of each of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be surely recognized, and the player can easily enjoy the performance using the operation unit 400, and is guided to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. The “PUSH” characters that have been played can be easily read from the player without turning or tilting greatly, It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes from the inner periphery of the inner tube portion 401a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 has a smaller diameter than a predetermined position in the vertical direction. Since the step portion 407a is formed at the upper end of the operation unit 400, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible. It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 as much as possible, and the inside of the operation unit 400 through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dust to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate due to the entry of foreign matter, and it is difficult to press the pressing operation unit 405. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, which part of the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation unit 401 is selected. Since the contact can be made even at a position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed with a feeling that it is tilted (a position that is biased toward the outer periphery from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), the dial operation unit 401 is reliably contacted. Therefore, the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are annularly contacted, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operation unit 401 side. Impact resistance can be further increased.

  Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed radially outward in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, and the load is prevented from being concentrated. The loadability and impact resistance can be reliably increased, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased, and the occurrence of problems during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward / reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 is not simply rotated, but can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, or forward / reverse. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and that exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the dish unit 300 having the upper plate 301 for storing game balls, the strength and rigidity of the dish unit 300 is high in order to store a large number of game balls. Thus, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a smashing of the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to easily entertain using the operation unit 400.

[1-2G. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51A is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 51B is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as seen from the back. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 through the lower opening 330b of the lower plate side cover 330 in the plate unit 300. A handle base 502 that is fixed and cylindrical and has a front end that bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis, a handle body 504 that is disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and a front surface of the handle body 504 A front end cover 506 disposed and fixed to the handle base 502 and rotatably supporting the handle body 504 in cooperation with the handle base 502.

  In addition, the handle device 500 has a rear end and a front end rotatably supported by an inner base 508 attached to the front surface of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle main body 504, and the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506. A shaft member 510 that can rotate integrally with the shaft 504 and has a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 that meshes with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a that can rotate integrally with the transmission gear 511. And a rotational position detection sensor 512 sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

  Furthermore, the handle device 500 has one end attached to the inner base 508 and the other end attached to the transmission gear 511, and the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 511. Auxiliary spring 514 for biasing, a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, a firing stop switch 518 attached to a different position on the rear surface of the inner base 508, and the inner base 508 A single-shot button 520 that is pivotally supported and operates a firing stop switch 518, and one end side is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end side is attached to the handle body 504 so that the handle body 504 is in an initial rotation position (counterclockwise in front view). Energized to return to the rotation end in the direction of A handle return spring 522 that includes a.

  As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present example is configured to have a rear end portion that is open at the front side and has a rear end portion that extends in a cylindrical shape rearward from a front end portion that bulges rearwardly. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 have one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three protrusions 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. Has been placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the tube portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a is fitted to the protrusion 143.

  In the handle device 500, an arc-shaped slit 504a arranged concentrically with the rotation shaft is formed in the handle body 504, and three mounting bosses 506a projecting rearward are formed in the front end cover 506. These mounting bosses 506 a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504 a of the handle body 504. Accordingly, the rotational range of the handle body 504 is restricted by the circumferential end of the slit 504a in the handle body 504 coming into contact with the mounting boss 506a of the front end cover 506.

  Further, in the handle device 500, a locking projection 504b protruding rearward is formed on the handle main body 504, and the other end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking projection 504b. By being locked, the handle main body 504 is biased so as to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 at one end side.

  The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 is inclined so that its mounting surface faces the outside (open side) in a plan view as viewed from above. The device 500 is also tilted outward in plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1). 5 to be fixedly attached. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grasp the handle device 500, and there is no sense of incongruity in the rotation operation, and it is easy to perform the rotation operation.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor. When the handle main body 504 (the handle device 500) is rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is connected via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft portion 512a rotates. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball hitting device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Thus, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle main body 504 and the front end cover 508 are conductively plated, and the touch sensor 516 detects contact when the player touches the handle main body 504 or the like. Then, when the touch sensor 516 detects a player's contact, when the handle body 504 rotates, the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation, and the game ball is shot. Can be done. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be driven, It is possible to reduce a load (burden) related to the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed by preventing the player from playing a game different from the original game.

  Further, when the player presses the single button 520 while the handle device 500 is being rotated, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single button 520 and the firing control unit 4120 (see FIG. 153) controls the firing solenoid 654. The rotational drive can be stopped. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle apparatus 500, while launching of a game ball can be stopped temporarily, before operating the single button 520 by operating the single button 520 release operation. A game ball can be launched with a driving strength.

  In the handle device 500 of this example, the rotation operation of the handle body 504 is electrically detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512, and then the launch control unit 4120 detects the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational driving strength of the launch solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launch device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are connected to the door as in a conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism so that the frames 5 are linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed and the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. It is possible to eliminate the occurrence of defects in the joint unit, and to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating due to game ball driving defects It has to be able to bet.

[1-2H. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. 52A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 52B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back. FIG. 53 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the front cover removed.

  A foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to a rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100 and is fired by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 to be described later, or a ball hitting device 650. Nevertheless, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 having a front side opened and having a plurality of game ball passages therein, and a front cover 544 closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (B), the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 includes a first sphere inlet 542a that is disposed in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a cover that communicates with the first sphere inlet 542a. A first sphere passage 542b that expands to the right when viewed from the front side toward the front end of the base 542, and a second sphere inlet 542c that is disposed outside the first sphere inlet 542a (on the right side when viewed from the rear) and is larger than the first sphere inlet 542a. And a second sphere passage 542d that communicates with the second sphere inlet 542c and extends downward and slopes downward toward the lower right corner when viewed from the front. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the drawing, the second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 has a height of a portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end, which is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. An accommodation space 546 that can accommodate a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 can be guided to the upper part in the vicinity of the downstream of the foul ball inlet 542e and the foul ball inlet 542e, which is disposed at a substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and opens upward, and communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e. A foul ball passage 542f. The cover base 542 includes an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542g contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, and is disposed in the upper left corner of the front view and communicates with the first spherical passage 542b of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first sphere outlet 544a and the second sphere outlet 544b that is disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second sphere passage of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310 c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the rear end of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit 300 is connected to the second ball outlet 544b through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 of the present example passes the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b. From 544a, the plate unit 300 can be supplied to the upper plate 301 through the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d. From 544b, it can be supplied to the lower plate 302 through the lower plate ball supply rod 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g of the plate unit 300 (see FIG. 82).

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 will be described in detail later, but when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is positioned below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball inlet 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges (supply) the game balls received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d. ) Can be.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and can swing by a game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. A swing member 548 pivotally supported by the shaft, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that biases the swing member 548 in a non-detection state by the full tank detection sensor 550. 552. As shown in FIG. 53, the swinging member 548 is pivotally supported at the lower end with respect to the cover base 542, and the upper end is turned to the left when viewed from the front. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where the swinging member 548 is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the swinging member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by a full tank detection sensor 550. .

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end in the rear view of the cover base 542, respectively. , And can remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance caused by circulation of game balls.

  In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. When the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the upper plate 301 is full, the game ball stagnates in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770 When the normal passage 773 upstream of the full tank branch unit 770 becomes full, the game ball flows to the full tank passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79). From the full ball outlet 776 to the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d and the second ball outlet 5 It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via 4b.

  When the inside of the lower plate 302 of the tray unit 300 is filled with game balls, the game balls can no longer come out from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and are stuck in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and more game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 will move to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 153) stops the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700, and the game A notification for urging a person to discharge the game ball in the dish unit 300 to the outside is provided.

  When the game ball in the storage space 546 (the lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 is returned to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the full detection sensor 550 detects the detection piece 548a. The non-detection is made, and the payout of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is resumed.

[1-2I. Ball feed unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57. 54A is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and FIG. 54B is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 55 is a rear view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 56 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 56 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case. Further, FIG. 57A is a plan view of the tamper-proof member in the ball feeding unit, FIG. 57B is a front view of the tamper-proof member, and FIG. 57C is a perspective view of the tamper-proof member viewed from the front. (D) is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 can be pulled out to the lower dish 302 by operating the upper dish ball removal button 341.

  In this ball feed unit 580, game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 that has a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b that opens to the lower side of the entrance 581a and is opened at the rear, and the rear end of the front cover 581 is closed and the front is opened. A rear cover 582 having a hitting ball supply port 582a for supplying a game ball that has penetrated in the front-rear direction and entered from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the rear cover 582 and the front cover. A partition 58 that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. a ball-extracting member 583 having a, and game balls on the partitioning portion 583a of the ball-extracting member 583 are sent one by one to the hitting supply port 582a of the rear cover and extend vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. A ball feeding member 584 supported so as to be rotatable around the axis, and a ball feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feeding member 584. In this example, as shown in the drawing, the ball feeding member 584 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 581a in the front view, and the ball removing member 583 is disposed on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is disposed on the right side. Has been placed.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 includes an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 583c of a ball punching member 583, which will be described later, extends from 581c to the front. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a. When the front cover 581 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guide channel 344b in the upper dish ball removal base 344 is assembled. Is formed to close.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 has a partition portion 583a and a partition portion 583a, which partition the entrance 581a and the ball exit 581b below the entrance 581a and the upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feed member 584. A shaft extending from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584 to the lower side, bent from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b, and bent at the lower end in the front-rear direction A pivot collar portion 583b that is pivotally supported by the pivot rod section 583b, a rod-shaped actuation collar 583c that projects forward from the upper end of the pivot collar section 583b, and a pivot collar section 583b below the actuation collar 583c. A weight portion 583d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side of the partition portion 583a. An operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 54), and a ball feed opening of the door frame base body 110 The upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300 is in contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 584a and a blocking portion 584a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583. A sphere holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end to the rotation axis side, and a rod-like flange portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 584b are provided. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b in the ball feeding member 54 are formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to hold one game ball. The ball feed member 584 rotates about the rotation axis when the flange 584c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585. ing.

  In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the direction of the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b faces the direction in which it communicates with the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b moves in the direction of the partition portion 583a. It is designed to rotate between the holding positions that face it. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 582a to the hit ball launching device 650 and enters the partition portion 583a from the advance port 581a. The ball is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) by the blocking portion 584a and stays on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the flange portion 584c side closes the hitting ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Further, the ball feed unit 580 is moved back and forth by a ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip is swung vertically by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and a movement of the tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 which is swung vertically. And a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 and extends in the left-right direction, and the side of the engagement portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operation rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is supported between a front cover 581 and a rear cover 582 so as to be pivotable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a ball feed member 584 extending upward from the shaft 587b. And a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 584c (see FIG. 56) that protrudes downward from a position that is eccentric with respect to the rotation center.

  The ball feed unit 580 of this example transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 586 that swings by the driving of the ball feed solenoid 585 that moves forward and backward by the ball feed actuating rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587. 584 can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the tip of the swing is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 654.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 that is pivotally supported in the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example is configured to apply a moment that rotates counterclockwise by the weight portion 583c. The operation rod 583c protruding forward comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300, so that its rotation is restricted. In a normal state, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 partitions the entrance 581a and the ball removal port 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball removal port 581b side. Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and comes into contact. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, the ball removal member 583 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the entrance by the partition portion 583a. The partition between the ball outlet 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet passage 344c of the upper dish ball outlet base 344 of the dish unit 300. Then, it is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

  Since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 against which the operating rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 abuts is biased upward by a coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. It is possible to prevent the partition portion 583a from bouncing back.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 582b (see FIG. 56B, etc.) that is recessed forward in the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a in the rear cover 582. At the same time, a tamper-proof member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feeding unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is attached to the inside of the mounting recess 582a of the rear cover 582 so as to be detachable from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed in a horizontally-oriented rectangular shape in the rear view, and is located on the opposite side from the substantially vertical center at the tip which is the left side in the rear view. The upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c, which are divided vertically with a dividing line 588a extending a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side), and the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c are mutually connected. A V-shape formed between the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c by bending the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b in the vertical direction (rearward) with respect to the general surface of the tamper-proof member 588 so as to move away. And a sloped portion 588e formed at the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cut portion 588d.

  As shown in the figure, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed by bending the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b so that the distal end (the left end side in the rear view) of the upper piece portion 588b moves backward, It is formed in a V shape in plan view, and a wire rod Iw attached to an illegal game ball I is inserted into the V shape. The cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588 has a state in which the lower side of the upper piece portion 588b and the upper side of the lower piece portion 588c intersect each other at a predetermined angle in plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the base end side. It is formed as follows.

  Further, the inclined portion 588e of the fraud preventing member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be guided and guided into the cutting portion 588d by the inclined portion 588e. It is like that. In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, as shown in the figure, a tamper-proof member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 from the rear side, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 is shown. A portion corresponding to the portion where the is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction and at the same time communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in a shape in which the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

  According to the fraud prevention member 588, the illegal game ball I attached with the wire Iw is supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the hit ball launching device 650, and the hit ball launching device 650 sends the illegal game ball I to the game area of the game board 4. When the player hits the inside 1100, the illegal game ball I launched by the hitting ball launcher 650 moves obliquely to the upper left along the launch rail 660 in the front view, and moves between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. An attempt is made to enter the game area 1100 through the game. At this time, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the momentum of the hit game ball I, and the wire rod Iw differs from the movement trajectory of the illegal game ball I, and the path of the game ball It moves along the route connecting at the shortest distance. Accordingly, the wire Iw extending from the dish unit 300 through the hitting supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 to the hitting ball launcher 650 moves the game ball I in the upper left direction in the front view (upper right direction in the rear view). Thus, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the hitting ball supply port 582a so as to move to the shortest route, and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed at the upper right of the hitting ball supply port 582a in the rear view. The wire Iw that has moved to the portion (inside the mounting recess 582b) that extends rightward in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the anti-fraud member 588 disposed at the position. After being guided into 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the force of the illegal game ball I.

  As a result, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled in the direction of narrowing the gap (leftward in front view) by the cutting portion 588d of the anti-fraud member 588 by the force of the illegal game ball I. In this state, friction and shearing force are applied by the cutting portion 588d, and the wire Iw is cut (see FIG. 57D). At this time, since the momentum of the illegal game ball I attached with the wire Iw is attenuated by friction or the like acting on the wire Iw, it does not enter the game area 1100 between the outer rail 1111 and the launch rail 660. Will be discharged through.

  Accordingly, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the anti-fraud member 588. Can be prevented. Even if an illegal game ball I enters the game area 1100, as described above, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, so that it is impossible to perform an illegal act. Even if the wire rod Iw could not be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw bites into the V-shaped cut portion 588d, thereby reducing the momentum of the illegal game ball I and playing area 1100. It is possible to prevent intrusion, so that it is possible to prevent illegal acts.

  As described above, according to the present example, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 301 and the game ball is supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, and then the player holds the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. When operated, the game ball is sent to the ball hitting device 650 by driving the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580, and the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 by the ball hitting device 650, thereby playing the game window 101 of the door frame 5. A game is played in the game area 1100 that can be viewed via the player, so that the player can be entertained, and a feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 or ball feed solenoid 585 is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and a discharge mechanism (ball removal member 583) are disposed, so that only the ball feed member 584 and the ball removal member 583 are provided. The ball feeding member 584 and the ball hitting device 650 are also brought as close as possible, and when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, it remains on the ball feeding member 584 side. It is possible to reduce the number of game balls as much as possible, and to prevent the player from feeling lost, and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 provided with the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball can be thrown in. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early or the game balls in the upper plate 301 from being filled up early due to the operation. Since the player can be less annoyed and the interest can be prevented from being reduced, and the plate unit 300 can be downsized while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301. The area 1100 can be enlarged (widened) to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention.

  Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided with the ball feed member 583, the ball feed member 580 is simply attached to the ball feed member 580 as compared with the ball feed member 584 and the ball feed member 583 separately. 584 and the ball punching member 583 can be attached, the labor involved in the assembly can be simplified, the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and a defect occurs in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball punching member 583. Even so, the problem can be easily solved by replacing the ball feeding unit 580.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper plate ball is compared with the ball feeding unit 580 provided on the main body frame 3 side. There is no need to configure the transmission mechanism (the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340) that transmits the operation of the removal button 341 to the ball removal member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 that can be opened and closed. The configuration related to the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (when the door frame 5 is opened, as compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side). By shutting off the upper bowl removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism will be consumed at an early stage, causing malfunction or damage, and reliability for the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feeding unit 580, etc. And durability can be increased.

  Further, since the upper plate ball removal button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 or the upper plate 301 by simply pressing the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward. Can be stopped, and the player can easily perform the ball removal operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removal button 341.

  In addition, the partition 583a of the ball removal member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 that slides in the vertical direction according to the operation of the upper plate ball removal button 341, and the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is moved. At the same time, the partition portion 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the partition portion 583a can be made as small as possible. The unit 580 can be reduced in size, and the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is urged upward, and the partition portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 communicates the entrance 581a and the hit ball supply port 582a when the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is in the raised position. Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously comes into contact with the partition portion 583a, the impact can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removal member) 583) can be improved. Further, since the impact applied to the partition portion 583a can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper dish ball removal slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult to repel even when the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing problems.

  In addition, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, the movement of the partition portion 583a when a load of a game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a is compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. The friction loss can be reduced, and the operability can be improved by lightening the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341, and the moving range of the partitioning portion 583a can be reduced in the planar projection. The effect of this can be achieved.

  Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other, the partition portion Is rotated by its own weight so that the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication with each other, and the game ball in the upper plate 301 is hit by a ball even though the upper plate ball release button 341 is not operated. Since it is discharged to the player side without being sent to the device 650 side, the player can be made aware that a defect has occurred in the pachinko machine 1, and to the pachinko machine 1 having no defect. It is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating by moving.

  Furthermore, since the ball removing member 583 is rotated via the rotating hook part 583b bent, the rotating hook part bent when the game ball collides with the divider 583a. It is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotating shaft by dispersing it by 583b or by absorbing it by bending of the rotating collar portion 583b, and to improve the durability of the ball removing member 583. Can be increased.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged, the right and left of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580 are The movement of the direction can be minimized, and the game ball can be discharged well by improving the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feed unit 580 can serve as a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, the ball feeding unit 580 can be prevented from being unnecessarily enlarged.

  Further, the fraud prevention member 588 is attached to the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the fraud prevention member 588 (cutting portion 588d) is disposed as close as possible to the ball hitting device 650. Therefore, the wire Iw adhering to the illegal game ball I in the fastest (momentary) state immediately after being fired by the ball hitting device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d. As the wire Iw is pulled quickly (strongly), the wire Iw can be surely cut, and the force of the illegal game ball I is attenuated to prevent entry into the game area 1100. It is possible to reliably prevent an illegal act from being performed by the illegal game ball I.

  Further, since the tamper-proof member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting recess 582b that is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rear cover 582, the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed. The upper piece 588b bent rearward can be prevented from projecting rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the upper piece 588b of the anti-fraud member 588 is injured by an operator during assembly. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the anti-fraud member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I, the upper upper piece 588b is bent backward with the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material interposed therebetween. Thus, since the V-shaped cutting part 588d is formed, the cutting part 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

[1-2J. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 is demonstrated mainly with reference to FIG.22 and FIG.23. This glass unit 590 has an opening of approximately the same size as the gaming window 101 and has an annular, vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 and two sheets for closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592. A transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 108). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 has two stopper pieces 592a disposed on the upper sides of the left and right sides and extending outward in a plate shape, and a plate-like engagement extending in the left-right direction along the lower end and extending downward. Stop piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end to engage with the vertical bent protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. After that, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190. The base unit 100 is detachably attached (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[1-2K. Molding decoration on door frame]
Next, modeling decoration in the door frame 5, that is, shape decoration, will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 58. FIG. 58 is a cross-sectional view showing the door frame cut at a substantially vertical center. The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls arranged vertically below the vertically long oval gaming window 101 as shown in the figure. In order to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 disposed on the rear side of the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101 on the right side of the lower plate 302 in front view. A handle device 500 is arranged. The door frame 5 includes a right side decoration unit 200, a left side decoration unit 240, and an upper decoration unit 280 so as to surround the left and right sides and the upper side of the gaming window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the gaming window 101. Thus, the dish unit 300 is arranged.

  The door frame 5 is greatly different in appearance on both sides across the gaming window 101, and the right side has a natural rock-like appearance crumpled by the side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. On the other hand, the left lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 that are visible on the left side from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decorative unit 240 give a metallic sharp and artificial appearance. ing.

  58, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 have different amounts of forward projection, as shown in FIG. 58, and the right side decoration unit 200 has a left side decoration unit. It protrudes forward larger than 240. In addition, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a gently curved flat shape.

  Thereby, when the door frame 5 of this example is seen from the front right side, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 look similar to each other (see FIG. 19), whereas the left front part When viewed from above, the right side decoration unit 200 appears larger than the left side decoration unit 240, and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 becomes almost invisible, and a different impression can be given depending on the player's standing position with respect to the pachinko machine 1. It is like that. That is, since the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1 and can be given an illusion like a pachinko machine of a different model, the player who is selecting the pachinko machine to play, etc. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

  In addition, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is asymmetrical left and right, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is arranged in a plurality of rows in the left and right direction in the island equipment of the game hall, the whole appearance of the island equipment is smooth and solid. The appearance (atmosphere) that gives the player a rhythmic impression and excites the player by alternately arranging the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 in different forms. It is possible to increase the appeal to the player and attract the player's interest strongly.

  Further, the door frame 5 emits LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 and the like provided in the respective units 200, 240, 280, 300, thereby causing the gaming window 101 to emit light. It is possible to decorate the light emission with an arbitrary light emission color so as to surround. Of the LEDs mounted on the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, and 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214b and 216b disposed on the rear side of the side flash lenses 204 and 246, respectively. , 254b, 256 are turned on and off to change the mode of the light-emitting decoration surrounding the game window 101.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration on door frame]
Next, the light emission decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of the LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. FIG. 60 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the dish unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 on which LEDs are mounted. The outer periphery can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery excluding the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of peripherals in the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210 a and 250 a are arranged along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centered around the lower portion of the gaming window 101 at the center in the left-right direction. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

  In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 is. The peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one smooth loose curved surface. In the door frame 5, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are disposed on the rear side of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a is disposed between the peripheral lens portion 250a and the side inner lens 252 in the side lens 250.

  Further, the door frame 5 has a right side upper decorative substrate 214, a right side lower decorative substrate 216, and a left side upper decorative substrate 254 on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. , And a lower left side decorative board 256 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256. ing.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are provided with peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246) are provided. . In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiating lens portions 210b, 250b are relatively high in luminance. LED. The two LEDs 214c arranged at the upper right end of the upper decorative board 214 on the right side are a green LED and a red LED.

  In this example, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the lights from the player side are reflected by the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and deteriorating in appearance, and by reflecting the light from each of the LEDs 210a and 210b that emit light to the player side by the substrate, The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly decorated.

  As described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the upper side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 facing the center side in the left-right direction of the door frame 5. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 disposed at the center in the left-right direction, an annular central annular lens portion 282b disposed on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and outward outward from the central annular lens portion 282b. And four extending frame lens portions 282c extending to the right. The front surface of the extended frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side in front view is covered with an upper lower decorative cover 294.

  The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central decorative substrate 288 disposed on the rear side of the central ring lens portion 282b of the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and the upper lens 282 extending in the left-right direction from the upper central decorative substrate 288. And an upper side decorative substrate 290 disposed on the rear side of the upper central decorative substrate 288. On the upper central decorative substrate 288, a plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the central annular lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface, and the upper central lens 284 and the central annular lens portion 282b are mounted. And can be individually decorated with light emission. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extended frame lens portions 282c are mounted on the front surface of the upper side decorative substrate 290 so that each extended frame lens portion 282c can be decorated with light emission. . The LEDs 288a, 288b, and 290a on the upper central decorative board 288 and the upper side decorative board 290 are full-color LEDs.

  Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and the appearance is continuous with the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. In this dish unit 300, an upper dish decoration board 322 is arranged on the rear side of the upper dish decoration element 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322 a mounted on the upper dish decoration board 322 are used in the upper dish decoration element 316. The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 that decorates the right part and the front outer periphery of the upper dish ball removal button 341 can be decorated with light emission. In this example, the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is a full color LED.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a ring-shaped dial operation unit 401 having translucency and a columnar pressing operation unit having translucency disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are disposed below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED with high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  By the way, the door frame 5 of this example corresponds to the peripheral lens portions 210 a and 250 a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the gaming window 101. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are a first annular group 102 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 59 and 60) close to the gaming window 101, and a second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102. (In the range of the cross hatch in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60), the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are made to emit light appropriately, so as to surround the gaming window 101, and are substantially concentric. A plurality (two in this example) of light emission can be decorated. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are caused to emit light, the hatched area near the gaming window 101 is decorated in a ring shape, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are activated. When all the lights are emitted, the cross hatch area away from the game window 101 is illuminated and decorated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, LEDs 214 b, 216 b, 254 b, 256 b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiation lens portions 210 b, 250 b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are provided. The radial group 104 (in FIGS. 59 and 60) that extends radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the gaming window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction. Within the shaded area). The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104 can appropriately emit light so that the outside of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission in addition to the ring shape of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 The light emitting decoration can be decorated so as to be divided in the circumferential direction.

  In the door frame 5, the LED 214 c of the upper right side decorative board 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decorative unit 200 is set as the notification group 105. It is possible to notify various information to a person or a game hall employee who installed the pachinko machine 1.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 288 a and 288 b corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and the central annular lens portion 282 b in the upper decorative unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the gaming window 101 are the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The upper center group 106 is configured to illuminate and decorate the upper center. The LED 288a and 288b of the upper central group 106 can appropriately emit light so that the upper center of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission, and the reference of the annular light emitting decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 It is possible to make a light emitting decoration that becomes a dot. The LED 290a corresponding to the extended frame lens portion 282c in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper central side group 107 that decorates the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be decorated with light emission.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 322 a corresponding to the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper right decoration member 319 arranged on the lower side of the gaming window 101 is used to decorate the upper dish 301 with light emission. The dish group 108 is set. In the door frame 5, the LEDs 430 b and 432 d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged at the lower center of the gaming window 101 and in the upper center of the dish unit 300 An operation unit group 109 for decorating light emission is used. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be changed. The player can be informed.

  The light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 in this embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, and 109 to which they belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250, respectively. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. It has been.

  The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into 8 systems 104a to 104h for each side flash lens 204 and 246 (radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250). ing. The two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems, that is, a central part 106a, a right part 106b, and a left part 106c. The seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper central side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

  Further, the eleven LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d on the front and rear sides and on the right and left sides. The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405, and a pair of left and right 109a and front and rear 109b. The two LEDs, one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405, is divided into three systems. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems. ing.

  In the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, and 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems in order to emit light in full color. In the light emission control, there are three times 84 systems. The LEDs 288a and 430b are high-intensity white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high luminance. Two systems are connected, and in actual light emission control, there are twice as many as eight systems.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs having normal luminance, and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED, and belongs to the two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system, so that there are ten systems of the same number in actual light emission control.

  Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting / flashing is controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, a rich light-emitting effect can be achieved.

  As the lighting effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color) to spread outwardly around the gaming window 101. Light emission effect, or conversely, light emission effect that converges from the outside toward the gaming window 101 by emitting light sequentially from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color), Alternatively, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can emit light at the same time, so that a light-emitting effect or the like can be performed so that the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 emits light widely.

  Further, by coordinating with LEDs (not shown in detail) provided on the game board 4, the LEDs of the game board 4, the LEDs of the first annular group 102 close to the game window 101, and the first annular group 102 With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged on the outer side, it is possible to produce a more expressive light-emitting effect, which can attract the player's interest strongly and entertain the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, each of the systems 102 a to 102 j and 103 a to 103 j is appropriately caused to emit light, so that the upper portion of the upper decoration unit 280 is aligned along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. It is possible to produce a light emission effect such that light moves toward the central lens 284 or light moves from the upper central lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions). However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light circulates around the outer periphery of the gaming window 101.

  Further, by emitting light only from the radial group 104, a light emission effect is produced in which the light is emitted radially around the gaming window 101, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. To produce a light emission effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or to cause the radial group 104 to emit light (light on / flash) while the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 emits light. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect that gives an accent to the light emitting decoration. In addition, by causing each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to produce a light emission effect such that the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiating lens portions 210b and 250b) circulate.

  Further, by causing the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105 to emit light, an opportunity or a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability variation gaming state, a short time gaming state, a probability variation short gaming state) , Etc.) can be performed.

  Furthermore, by appropriately emitting light from each of the systems 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, a light emission effect for lighting and decorating the upper plate 301, or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 or pressing operation is performed. A light emission effect that prompts the operation of the unit 405 can be performed. In addition, the system 109a, 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 is appropriately caused to emit light so as to prompt the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or guide the rotational operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper central group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to produce a lighting effect with different gradations such as luminescent color and brightness for each 109 or for each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, 109c. A rich lighting effect can be performed.

[1-3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 62 is a rear view of the main body frame. FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, FIG. 65 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the outer frame 2 and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can hold the game board 4 detachably from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrates in the front-rear direction to have a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, and a main body frame base An upper shaft bracket 630 and a lower shaft bracket 640 that are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end portion of the front view 600 and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and the main body frame base 600. A ball hitting device 650 for driving a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front surface of the game board 4 and a game ball delivered to the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 And the flow of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. Open the ball exit It includes a unit 790, a.

  The main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes various control boards for controlling electrical components provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except the game board 4, a power supply board 851, and the like. Are combined into a unit board unit 800, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opens and closes the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. FIG. 69 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of synthetic resin, and the outer shape of the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 and is approximately in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a certain depth D (see FIG. 65). Accordingly, when the main body frame base 600 is faced down when attaching the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the depth D of the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed, and workability relating to the assembly of the main body frame 3 is improved. Can be improved.

  As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a gaming board holding port through which the entire range of about 3/4 penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction from the upper part to the lower part so that the outer periphery of the gaming board 4 can be fitted and held. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the front frame of the front end frame portion 602 is recessed from the front to the rear. Door frame protruding piece 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the frame, upper bent protruding piece 167 protruding rearward from the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and open side protruding rearward from the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153 And an engaging groove 603 into which the outer bent protrusion 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spread in a plate shape in the left-right direction 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and forms the inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. By this peripheral wall portion 605, the free ends (upper and lower left ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like that.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall part 604, and a game board placement part 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placement part 606. A game board of the game board 4 that is formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 and a positioning projection 607 that protrudes upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can come into contact with the upper end of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction. A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be fitted into the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 to restrict the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. Yes. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 when viewed from the front will be described later, movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is mounted with a bracket for mounting the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 on the rear surface of the free end portion (upper left and right end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. Part 610 (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 and the like, the bracket mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs whose front side extends vertically and horizontally, and attaches the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 with sufficient strength. Can be done. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through-hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and is formed at the lower left of the cylinder lock through-hole 611 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits the positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from the door frame base main body 110 and the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 that is formed in the lower left of the fitting groove 612 when viewed from the front are accommodated. A solenoid housing recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step further to the rear side than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, The ball striking device 650 is attached to the front surface from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 is accommodated in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state in which the ball hitting device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall 604, as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, A foul space 626 extending downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e in the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  The main body frame base 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in a front view, and on the upper side of the opening 614 and on the left and right sides of the front view. A through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 66 and the like), and passes through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692 so that the lower rear wall portion 604. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. The plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having a front wall on the front side.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 has a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper front end of the lower rear wall 604 above the opening 614. 616 and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 when viewed from the front and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around an axis that is pivotally supported by the fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. And an operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise when viewed from the front). The game board fixing tool 690 is pivotally supported on the fixing tool support 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixing tool 690 in the clockwise direction in front view. Then, the fixed piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board mounting portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 mounted on the game board mounting portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. Further, the game board fixing tool 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is regulated by contacting the stopper 617. It has become.

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the lower rear surface from the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressure is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 includes three pieces penetrating vertically in the front-rear direction on the inner side (axial support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 in front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock locking hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction under the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and is arranged in the left-right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and the approximate center in the vertical direction. The upper and center door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes 621 are engaged with and locked by the locking projections 1004 provided at the upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000, and the front end frame 602. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side of the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 protrude forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. 1010 protrudes forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 descends slowly and obliquely downward from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the rear view, and then the lower rear wall 604 at the substantially center in the left-right direction. Is provided with a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 that is allowed to circulate from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly upward. The main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is closed at the rear side by a substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and will be described in detail later. A game ball that has circulated through the ball extraction passage 741d in the prize ball device 740 is provided. It comes to circulate.

  A plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the back, and the back cover shaft support portion 623 rotatably supports the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 obliquely upper left in the front view of the opening 614, and the locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) of the peripheral wall portion 605 in front view. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, the main body frame base 600 has mounting bosses and mounting holes for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, and the like as appropriate. Is formed.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the metal mounting portions 610 on the upper left and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. Thus, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported to the outer frame 2 to be openable and closable.

  First, the upper shaft support metal 630 is attached to the upper metal attachment part 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment part 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like extension extending forward from the upper end of the attachment part 631. A front extending portion 632, a shaft supporting pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 632, and a shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side in front of the shaft supporting pin 633. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63 and the like) penetrating in the vertical direction is inserted, and the door frame 5 is pivoted downward from the left end of the front extension portion 632 when viewed from the front. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 109) for restricting the end. In the upper shaft support 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 is disposed below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. A main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft bracket 642 in the lower shaft bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and forward from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a. A plate-like front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front extending portion And a stopper 642d that is erected upward from the left end of the front view 642a and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support 642 is integrally formed with a mounting portion 642a, a front extension 642b, and a stopper 642d by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends from the bottom of the attachment portion 644a in a plate-like attachment portion 644a. A front extending portion 644b extending forward and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. The main body frame shaft support 644 is also integrally formed with an attachment portion 644a and a front extension portion 644b formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support 640 of this example is in a state in which the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction. The front extension 642b of the shaft support 642 and the front extension 644b of the main body frame support 644 are attached to the lower metal attachment 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance therebetween in the vertical direction. It is like that.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640 Are positioned on the same axis, and the body frame shaft support hole of the body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is placed on the outer frame 2. The main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by being inserted into the support hole 20 c of the upper support fitting 20.

  Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640. The metal fitting 642c is coaxially positioned, and the door is such that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal 642 in the lower shaft support metal 640. After the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is placed on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction. When the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. Once the door shaft 5 is slid downward and the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 are vertically overlapped, the shaft pin 155 is slid upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launcher 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. This hitting ball launching device 650 can drive the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  In the ball hitting device 650 of the present embodiment, a metal plate launch base 652 attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the main body frame base 600, and a rotary drive shaft 654a projecting forward on the lower rear surface of the launch base 652 are projected. The launching solenoid 654, the hitting ball 656 fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, the tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and the movement locus of the tip 658. The tip of the hitting ball 656 between the firing rail 660 that extends obliquely to the upper left in front view and is attached to the front surface of the firing base 652 and the firing rail 660 at the upper base end of the firing rail 660. The ball stop that holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball cannot pass at the same time as the ball 658 can pass. The ball 66 槌 (tip 658) is prevented from rotating toward the firing rail 660 from the hitting position where the game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 can be hit by the piece 662 and the ball stop piece 662. A stopper 664.

  The firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 is not shown in detail, but the drive shaft 654a is reciprocally rotated at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the ball striking ball 656 of the ball striking device 650 includes a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a tip extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A collar portion 656b that faces the normal direction and has a collar portion 656b fixed to the tip, and a stopper portion 656c that extends to the opposite side with respect to the collar portion 656b and can be brought into contact with the stopper 664c. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball basket 656 is in contact with the stopper 664, the tip of the tip 658 is rotated to the firing rail 660 side from the hitting position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Being regulated.

  In addition, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launcher 650 has a loose arc shape that is recessed downward so as to be substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98) and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center is shaped like a V-shape, and the game ball hit by the hitting ball 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 has a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of the stopper 664 that can regulate a rotation end of the hitting ball 656 toward the hitting ball position, and a rotation of the hitting ball 656 at a position away from the hitting ball position. And a stopper 668 for restricting an end (a rotation end in a clockwise direction in a front view). The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example has the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, so that it can absorb the impact when the hitting ball 656 abuts and suppress the generation of noise due to the abutment. Be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, the hit ball launching device 650 of the present example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, the lower side of the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601) is located outside the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111. The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example hits the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by firing the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the front view from the launch rail 660. Can be done. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 A game ball that has not been driven into a foul ball falls into the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

  In addition, the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the firing control unit 4120 with a driving strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580 is used. It is made to drive in synchronism with the drive. Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hit ball launcher 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball, and the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven from this state. When is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the ball hitting device 650 side, so that the ball launching solenoid 654 of the ball feed unit 580 is driven almost simultaneously. By turning on (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting ball cage 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. 72 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit as seen from the exploded position. FIG. 78 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing a sphere circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball supplied from the island facility side to the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then gives a predetermined payout instruction. Is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 which is attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receives and stores game balls supplied from the island facility side. And a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and a predetermined payout of the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the instructions, and the game balls paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit, and are paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls. And a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding bracket for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the winning ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface thereof, and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a in rear view. The back cover fastening hole 780b is formed (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape so that the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 are along the front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are arranged on the upper side. In addition, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a reverse L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view with the upper side of the main body frame base 600 as shown in the figure. And is integrally formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 has a peripheral wall portion 710a that extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and a predetermined width that extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a and is disposed in a substantially identical plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall 710 a is formed to extend backward from a position that is one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The award ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space that can accommodate the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

  The prize ball base 710 includes a tank attachment part 711 for attaching the prize ball tank 720 to the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall part 710a, and the side of the tank attachment part 711 (right side in the rear view). External terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the rear end of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear side of the vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b A prize ball apparatus mounting portion 714 for attaching the prize ball apparatus 740, a prize ball passage 715 for guiding a game ball paid out from the prize ball apparatus 740 downward adjacent to the prize ball apparatus attachment portion 714, and a rear wall. An attachment locking portion 716 for attaching the full tank branching unit 770 to the lower end of the portion 710b.

  Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 has a relief hole 717 for letting out a payout motor 744 and the like that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and projects forward from the prize ball device 740, and the like. And a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although the detailed description is omitted, the mounting holes and mounting bosses for mounting the winning ball tank 720, the winning ball device 740, etc., or mounting to the main body frame base 600 are appropriately positioned on the winning ball base 710. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top opened, and is a bottom wall portion that is substantially rectangular in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and has only a right rear portion (open side rear portion) that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 in a rectangular shape in plan view, and an outer peripheral wall portion A discharge port 723 formed by a portion projecting rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 at the rear right side in 722 and a plate-like shape from the left side (axial support side) in plan view of the discharge port 723 to the left end of the prize ball tank 720 A hook portion 724 extending to the rear, a rod-shaped shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower left end of the flange portion 724 in plan view, and a prize ball formed near the base end of the shaft portion 725 and at both front sides of the outer peripheral wall portion 722 Place tank 720 on prize ball base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the winning balls tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by an outer peripheral wall portion 722 so that a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. The prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the spherical leveling member 727 is supported at one end side by a shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side is suspended by its own weight. . The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, so that game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned. In addition, the collar portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that the game ball can be prevented from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lowered toward the right side in plan view, The right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) in plan view is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. Thereby, the flow of the game ball can be made smooth, and the occurrence of the ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720 can be suppressed, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game balls can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extending in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl shape with a predetermined depth with the upper part open, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two lines in the front-rear direction. The bottom is inclined so as to be low. The tank rail 731 includes a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward to the left (shaft support side) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at a substantially center in the front-rear direction, and a front end lower surface And a plurality of locking protrusions 731c (see FIG. 74) that protrude downward and are locked to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 from above.

  The tank rail 731 has an end on the right side (open side) when viewed from the front, which is positioned immediately below the discharge port 723 in the prize ball tank 720. The game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 After receiving, it rolls to the left and can be delivered from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the winning ball base 710 by locking the locking protrusion 731 c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the winning ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 when viewed from the front. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper portion of the tank rail 731 and a ball stop piece that can be moved forward and backward in the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. 735, and a grounding plate 736 that is disposed in the tank rail 731 and that can contact a game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the drawing, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731 b of the tank rail 731. The ball retainer plate 734 includes an attachment portion 734a to which a ball stop piece 735 is attached at an upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in the vertical direction and into which the protruding piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 can be inserted.

  In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported on the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above into the upstream side (open side) of the ball presser plate 734. The game balls discharged from the outlet 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b. It can be done. The ball retainer plate 734 is for forcibly making the game balls that have not become one step by the ball leveling member 727, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 narrows toward the discharge port 731a. It is attached to the tank rail 731.

  As shown in the drawing, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game balls that have flowed down the tank rail 731 flow down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls aligned in two rows are alternately awarded one by one. To the device 740.

  A narrow groove penetrating vertically is formed at the bottom of the tank rail 731 so that foreign matters such as dust rolling along with the game ball in the tank rail 731 fall downward from the narrow groove. It has become. The ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not shown in detail, but is grounded to the outside via the grounding metal fitting 782 and the grounding connector of the power supply board 851. The game ball comes into contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731 so that the charged static electricity can be removed.

  Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 rotatably attached to the attachment portion 734a of the ball retainer plate 734, and the protrusion 735a of the ball stop piece 735 passes through the slit 734a in the tank rail 730. , The two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the protruding piece 735a, and the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 can be stopped. Yes.

  Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the state of a game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. Is. As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the prize ball device 740 includes a unit base 741 extending in the vertical direction attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the drawing, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is provided on the rear surface side with a supply passage that opens to the upper end and extends to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b having a predetermined space communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a, and a lower left side (open side) lower end of the distribution space 741b in communication with the lower left side (open side) and bent substantially in a letter shape. A prize ball passage 741c that opens to the left side surface and a ball extraction passage 741d that communicates with the lower right side (axial support side) bottom of the distribution space 741b and extends downward and open to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a back cover 742 that is shorter in the vertical direction than the unit base 741 and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742. A plate 743, a discharge motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotation shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor support plate 743, and a rotation shaft 744a of the discharge motor 744 are integrated. A first gear 745 that is rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and meshes with the second gear 746. A third gear 747 that is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and a payout circuit that rotates together with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741b of the unit base 741. The body 748 and the payout rotating body 748 are fixed to the opposite side so as to be integrally rotatable with the third gear 747 interposed therebetween, and have a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. 749.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of game balls attached to the unit base 741 and circulating in the prize ball passage 741c. A counting sensor 751 for measuring the rotation angle, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 that is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. A sensor board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball break switch 750, a counting sensor 751, and a prize ball relay board 754 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 by relaying the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110. I have.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749). ), And a gear cover 756 that covers the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 interposed therebetween, and a supply passage ground that can contact a game ball that circulates in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741 The metal fitting 757, the screw 744 for fixing the payout motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween, and the back cover 742 are detachably supported with respect to the unit base 741. A detachable button 759.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example has a rear cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d are opened at the rear end. Is supposed to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be reduced. It can be done. Further, the unit base 741 is partially cut out at one side (left side in the rear view) of the lower side of the supply passage 741a from the position bulged rearward and outside the position where the supply passage 741a is cut out. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball break switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a front and rear direction penetrating below the prize ball passage 741c. A motor insertion hole 741g that is formed and into which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball break switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operation piece of the ball break switch 750 forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the game ball to be played, the ball break switch 750 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball in the supply passage 741a. In a state where the game ball in the supply passage 741a is not detected by the ball break switch 750 (a state where the ball is broken), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and it is determined that the ball is out of the player or the hall. It is notified to the side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotary body 748), and between the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. An earth metal fitting attaching portion 741i for attaching the supply passage earth metal fitting 757, and a button support hole 741j for supporting an attaching / detaching button 759 for attaching / detaching and supporting the back cover 742 arranged on the upper portion of the unit base 741. I have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 to the ground metal fitting attachment portion 741i. The front surface of the supply path grounding metal fitting 757 is in contact with the rear surface of the lower end of the U-shaped earthing metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game balls flowing through the supply path 741 a is removed via the supply path grounding metal fitting 757. Can be done.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape, and its upper end bulges backward. The upper part of the back cover 742 has a button insertion hole 742a through which the detachable button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and the relay board mounting. The sensor board attaching part 742c which is arrange | positioned under the part 742b for attaching the sensor board 753, and the through-hole 742d which the paying-off | rotation body 748 can pass are provided. The relay board mounting portion 742 b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the ground metal mounting portion 741 i of the unit base 741.

  Further, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and comes into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, and heat generated by the payout motor 744 is generated. It is possible to facilitate heat dissipation.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 includes three recesses 748a each having a size that can accommodate one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are stored one by one in the recess 748a and can be paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d. The three detection slits 749a of the rotation detecting board 749 that rotate integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the space between the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748. The detection slit 749a is formed by the rotation angle sensor 752. By detecting, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

  The prize ball apparatus 740 of this example receives a payout motor 744 by inputting a payout command from the main control board 4100, a loan command from the CR unit, or the like, or operating the ball removal switch 860b to the payout control board 4110. Is rotated so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744 a of the payout motor 744 is driven to rotate, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744 a rotates, and at the same time, the second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 rotates, and further the second gear 746. Is rotated. The third gear 747 has a payout rotator 748 on the front side and a rotation detection board 749 on the rear side so as to be able to rotate integrally therewith. It is designed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in the prize ball device 740, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c, and the payout rotation The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotator 748 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the ball removal passage 741d. The game balls paid out to the side of the ball extraction passage 741d are discharged from the lower end of the ball extraction passage 741d into a ball extraction passage 778 of a full tank sorting unit 770 described later, a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, It can be discharged outside the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 in 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

  Note that the unit base 741 in the prize ball apparatus 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled in the main body frame 3, the award is given from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and a defect such as a ball clogging can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75, and 79. The full tank sorting unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710 and guides the game ball paid out to the prize ball path 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. In addition, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game ball can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 so as to be paid out.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the rear surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part of the rear end and the latching part 770a latched to the attachment latching part 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the substantially upper center in the front-rear direction. Fixing portion 770b. The full tank branching unit 770 is suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at a substantially horizontal center in the upper part of the rear end. A prize ball receiving port 771 for receiving a game ball flowing down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710 and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball receiving port 771 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). And a normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball from directly under the prize ball receiving port 771 to the front side in the branch space 772, and a game ball that has circulated through the normal passage 773 forward and the front end of the front end. A normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the view and a full passage 775 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball toward the front side from a position on the right side of the rear view rather than just below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772. A), a fill-up passage 775 game ball that has flowed through the discharge forward a full sphere outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball outlet 777 that opens upward at the left end of the rear end upper part when viewed from the front and receives the game ball flowing down the ball extraction passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, A ball extraction passage 778 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball received at the opening 777 to the front side, and a game ball flowing through the ball extraction passage 778 is discharged forward, and a normal ball outlet 774 and And a ball outlet 779 opened at a position behind the full tank outlet 776.

  When the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are respectively the first foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and communicates with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. The ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right side of the main body frame base ball outlet passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 so that the game ball released from the ball outlet 779 is released from the main body frame base 600. It is delivered to the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is configured such that a game ball paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 is received by the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. The game ball that has flowed into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and passes through the first ball outlet 544a to the top of the dish unit 300. It will be supplied to the plate 301.

  By the way, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (the prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 is full of game balls, the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540 is provided. The game balls that can no longer come out from the 544a toward the upper plate 301 stagnate in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540 and eventually fill up the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branching unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, starts to move laterally in the branch space 772, and moves laterally. A game ball enters into the full tank passage 775 and passes from the full tank exit 776 to the bottom of the dish unit 300 via the second ball entrance 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball exit 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  The full tank branch unit 770 of the present example is formed entirely of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, foreign matter such as dust and debris that has entered the full tank branch unit 770, the occurrence of clogging, etc. can be easily found without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. .

  In this way, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example automatically plays the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the game balls are full in the upper plate 301 until the game balls are full. Since the upper plate is full like the conventional pachinko machine, the game ball is not supplied to the ball hitting device by operating the ball pulling button on the upper plate. It is possible to avoid interruption of game ball driving, and it is possible to eliminate the annoyance during the game and suppress the interest in the game from being reduced.

  In addition, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example branches the path of the game ball to be paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear part of the pachinko machine 1, when the upper plate 301 becomes full. Since the game ball staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branching unit 770 is paid out to the upper plate 301, the game ball in the upper plate 301 and the game ball in the normal passage 773 are used as a ball hitting device. A game ball that can be directly struck by 650, and the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as in the conventional case are stored in the upper plate 301. Can do. Accordingly, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider gaming area 1100 can be obtained. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player, and the player can be entertained by the wide game area 1100.

  Further, since the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right sides, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage dish (the first sphere inlet). Even when there is only one 542a and the second ball inlet 542c), the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Accordingly, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be able to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game ball (full tank branching unit 770) in the main body frame 3. And it can suppress that the cost concerning the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frame 5 from which the number of storage dishes differs differs.

  In addition, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be handled without changing the main body frame 3, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 is achieved. Thus, various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, a game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray. Even if it is exchanged, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray through the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so the time lag from payout to storage can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to a lack of game balls for driving, and to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays. .

  In addition, as long as the upper plate 301 is not full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. This makes it possible to devote the player to a game ball driving operation and the like, and to prevent the player's interest in games from being reduced.

  Even if the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side and the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the first sphere The position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a and the like can be set to the same height as the first ball inlet 542a and the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage plates. It becomes possible to avoid the depth becoming shallower, the storage tray can be deepened to secure a sufficient amount of game balls, and the game can be played without frequently worrying about the amount of storage for the player. Can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the like increases. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branching unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Even if the game ball can no longer come out from the normal ball exit 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball exit 774 to the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. The amount of substantial game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. In addition, in the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray becomes full of game balls and the game balls can no longer come out from the normal ball exit 774 or the full tank exit 776, Since the position where the full tank path 775 branches from the normal path 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are provided not only in the normal path 773 but also in the full tank path 775. Can be stored, and the substantial amount of game balls stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls in each door frame 5 is maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). The pachinko machine 1 can be increased to a limit and can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

  In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 are wide enough to allow game balls to circulate in a plurality of rows, and the stopping amount (reserved amount) of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 is determined. Since it can be increased, even if the number of storage dishes provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to prevent the substantial storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 from decreasing. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that can correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3 can be obtained.

  Moreover, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with transparent resin, the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. In this case, it is possible to easily find the place where the ball is clogged from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and it is possible to solve the problem at an early stage and increase the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 80 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 81 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to an attachment portion 624 formed in the vicinity of the upper left end of the main body frame base 600 in the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 moves to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of game balls.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-like opening / closing shutter 792 slidably held on the shutter base 791, an opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the up-down direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 ascending through the opening / closing crank 793. And an open / close spring 794 for urging.

  The shutter base 791 of the bulb outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a pair of slide grooves 791a extending in the vertical direction for holding the open / close shutter 792 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b that penetrates between the pair of slide grooves 791a in the front-rear direction, and a crank that is disposed in front of the left end portion in front view and supports the open / close crank 793 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side of the opening 791b in front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed in the vicinity of the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in front view.

  The opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a flat shutter body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. , And a horizontally elongated drive hole 792b that is disposed at a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding protrusions and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

  Furthermore, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a that is supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a right-side outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a. From the front end of the opening 791b and projecting rearward from the front end of the driving lever 793b and slidably inserted into the driving hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792. A driving pin 793c, a contact portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery on the lower side in front view of the shaft portion 793a, and a spherical shape at the tip, and the other end (lower end) of the open / close spring 794 formed on the upper surface of the driving rod 793b. And a spring locking portion 793e for locking.

  In this example, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is configured such that the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are arranged on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792 even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised. The normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 in the full tank branching unit 770 are visible.

  In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the driving pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in the vertical direction at the same time as the opening / closing crank 793 rotates about the axis extending in the front-rear direction. The open / close shutter 792 is slid in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b in which the is inserted. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is in contact with the opening / closing operation piece 542 g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered so that the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal bulb outlet 774 and the full bulb exit 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. Be able to.

  As described above, in response to opening / closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically switches the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game ball is prevented from spilling from the normal ball exit 774 and the full tank exit 776. Can be done.

[1-3F. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. FIG. 83 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the exploded position. FIG. 87 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. 88A is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 88B is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. FIG. 89A is a front view of the launch power supply board box, and FIG. 89B is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG.

  The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the rear left side of the board unit base 810, and a board unit base. Of the power supply board box 830 attached to the rear face of the right end of the front view 810, the power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear face of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the fired power supply board box 830 from the rear side, and A power supply board box 850 that is attached to the rear face and has a rear end that is substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear face of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end portion of the front view of 860, and a main-side relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 attached to the front face of the board unit base 810. I have.

  As shown in the figure, the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of the present example is configured to extend in the left-right direction, and the substantially central portion in the left-right direction is stepped downward and gradually tilted upward as it goes to the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding forward from the front surface, an opening portion 812 that is disposed above the position of the shielding wall portion 811 that is one step lower in the center in the left-right direction, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the lower side of the shielding wall portion 811 And a board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, which is formed on the front surface in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, and a rectangular shape that is horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813 when viewed from the front. A plurality of vertically long slits penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the penetrating cylindrical duct portion 814 and the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface. A hole 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  The board unit base 810 is formed such that the shielding wall portion 811 is along the lower side of the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. The game ball can be prevented from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the board unit base 810 can be increased. Further, the board base unit 810 sends the game balls flowing down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 disposed on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. Be able to.

  The board unit base 810 has a board mounting portion 813 for attaching the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. In the state where the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are located on the front side from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It comes to face. Further, the board unit base 810 can transmit sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side satisfactorily by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Further, the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box housing portion 816 is arranged on the rear side. The box housing portion 816 and the front box housing portion 843 Thus, a housing recess for housing the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 is literally provided with a speaker 821 attached facing the front side. The speaker box 820 has a horizontally elongated opening 822 formed on the left side of the speaker 821 when viewed from the front, while covering the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound behind the speaker 821 and moving forward. The bass-reflex type speaker box is capable of emitting a deep bass to the diameter of the speaker 821. Note that the duct portion 814 in the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that sound radiated from the opening 822 can be transmitted well forward. ing.

  The launch power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with the rear open, and includes a launch power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. This launching power supply board box 830 accommodates various electronic components attached to the launching power supply board 831, and heat from the electronic parts etc. through slits 830a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to the outside.

  This launching power supply board box 830 is detached from above in a housing recess opened upward by a box housing part 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box housing part 843 of a power board box holder 840 described later. It is designed to be accommodated as possible. Thereby, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a problem occurs in the launch power supply board box 830, the launch power supply board box 830 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 to be replaced or repaired. (See FIG. 63).

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 89, the launch power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging power from the DC / DC converter 831a. The combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 and driven. This launching power supply board box 830 is formed with slits 830a as heat dissipation holes on the upper and lower surfaces in order to release the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the launching power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

  In addition, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the launch power supply board box 830 on which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed is provided as a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, the launching power supply board box 830 has a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. And the bottom inner wall are integrally formed from the bottom surface to the end opening edge. Thus, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 and the interior space of the launch power supply board box 830 is closed, the interior space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Two spaces, an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a, and an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are formed. , Functioning as a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting the housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a.

  The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat radiation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. By being discharged to the outside via 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is a heat radiation hole formed in the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830d with the outside air, respectively. As a result, the released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is stored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a combined current that flows to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 are not provided on the power board 851, but are fired separately from the power board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the launch power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, the emission power board 831 can be easily handled by downsizing the discharge power board 831 and the replacement work of the emission power board 831 can be facilitated, which contributes to shortening the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement operation, the launch power supply board box 830 can be exchanged in a state where the launch power supply board 831 remains attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830, that is, the launch power supply board box 830.

  In addition, even if the pachinko machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the driving firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game has to be interrupted, it is easy to replace the firing power supply board 831. It is possible to eliminate the interruption of the game at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the impossibility of firing due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 very easily, and it is possible to resolve the interruption of the game due to the impossibility of firing at an early stage and resume the game, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 deteriorates at an early stage due to repeated charging and discharging, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time driving firing by the firing solenoid 654 is performed. In contrast, the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from an AC power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, but is not repeatedly charged and discharged at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. Therefore, the lifetime is extremely long compared to the launch power supply substrate 831. In other words, the fired power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life relatively early due to deterioration associated with charging / discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply board 851 reaches the end of life due to secular change. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the launch power supply board 831 separate from the power supply board 851. Thus, electronic components accompanying long-term aging can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component accompanying a long-life change over time from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 can be detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, it has a capacity for changing the driving characteristics. Even if an attempt is made to change the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to a different one, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to remove the launch power board 831 and it is difficult to replace the launch power board 831. It is possible to prevent fraud, and it is possible to suppress fraud that deliberately changes the driving strength of the launch power supply substrate 831 that has been tampered with and optimized, and to make fraud difficult. A pachinko machine 1 that can prevent a player who has been frustrated from developing into a fraud such as a fraudulent act can be provided.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 can be exchanged so as to be removable, even if an unauthorized operation is performed on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launch power supply board 831, the launch power supply board 831 can be replaced immediately and the unauthorized use can be made. It can be eliminated, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game of the player.

  Furthermore, the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch controller 4120 that controls the hitting ball launcher 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4. When the game board 4 is replaced due to a model change or the like, the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can be easily replaced, so it matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. Replacing the launching power supply board 831 equipped with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a capable of realizing the driving characteristics makes it possible to change the driving characteristics of the hitting ball launcher 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 to a new game. It can be matched to board 4. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the driving characteristics of the game ball with the concept of the game board 4, so that the game with the new model of the game board 4 can be fully enjoyed, and the interest of the player is reduced. can do.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be detached from the front side, when replacing the launch power supply board 831, there is no need to open the main body frame 3 for island facilities such as a game hall, It is possible to simplify the time and labor required for exchange, and it is possible to exchange in a short time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side. Further, since the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) can be exchanged so as to be removable, the driving characteristics are changed as compared with the case where the entire launch control unit 4120 (dispensing control board 4110) is exchanged. Cost can be reduced, and the burden on the hall side or the like can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when changing the model etc., only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 can be used as they are. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launch power supply board 831 is deteriorated, as described above, the launch power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side. It can be exchanged to solve the problem, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to quickly eliminate the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, the launch power board 831 (launch power board box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the launch power board 831 is held in the game board holding port 601 for detachment. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing an illegal act enters the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the illegal tool reaches the launch power supply board 831 by the game board 4. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from performing an illegal act on the launch power supply substrate 831 and has a high defense against the illegal act.

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601, and the position where the launch power supply board box 830 is supported is more rearward than the front surface of the main body frame 3. A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the launch power board box 830 and exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided in the firing power supply board 831. Since the firing power supply board 831 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is likely to deteriorate, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply substrate 831) can be easily replaced, and the malfunction can be solved at an early stage to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Also, The power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 is In front view, on the left front rather than the left and right center, A discharge ball receiving portion 841 that receives a game ball that is released upward and discharged downward from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4; A discharge passage 842 for guiding and discharging the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward; A front box housing portion 843 that is open forward and upward on the front side (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 and can accommodate the rear side of the launch power supply substrate box 830; A rear box housing portion 844 that is formed so that the entire rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 is recessed forward, and can accommodate the front end of the power board box 850; It has.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is configured such that the opened front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810 and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 faces the discharge passage 842. The rear side of the substrate unit base 810 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 through the body frame base ball extraction passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 is formed. The game ball that has flowed down and the game ball that has been discharged from the out-ball discharge unit 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841, which will be described in detail later, pass through the discharge passage 842 to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1. Can be discharged.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 has a front box housing part 843 formed at a position corresponding to the box housing part 816 of the board unit base 810, and the box power supply board 816 and the front box housing part 843, An accommodation recess for accommodating the box 830 can be formed.

  Furthermore, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the front open, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally transfers heat from the electronic parts and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released. As shown in FIG. 86, a power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

  The power supply board box 850 is a standing wall that protrudes rearward along the lower side of the opening where the power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to the lower side of the power switch 852 in the power supply board 851 faces the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 disposed on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a large gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece to be locked with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece. And the connector terminal 855 is prevented from being detached from the power supply terminal 853.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the power board box 850 has a standing wall 850b slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851. It is formed so as to protrude. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 is turned from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be hooked to the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. A terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, when the connector terminal where the wiring cord extends is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board, and then the wiring cord is pulled to the board side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension from the wiring cord. Since it is in a state of being pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the front end side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even when pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed around the connector terminal 855 so as to be turned back (turned back) from the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent a force from pressing the terminal 855 toward the power supply terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 includes the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, The protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be moved toward the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 is drawn from the standing wall portion 850b. Since the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b and the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d, a series of operations are continuously performed. It can be performed, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified.

  The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board box holder 840 are formed such that the dimensions in the front-rear direction in the assembled state are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When mounted on the rear panel, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

  Further, in this example, the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851, and then the connector is connected by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is connected to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. The connector terminal 855 can be prevented from being disconnected by the wiring cord 854 and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851 can be prevented. Can be easily removed, and maintenance such as substrate replacement can be easily performed.

  In addition, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the bending of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where there is no standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from being disconnected due to the unreasonable force and causing a failure.

  Further, a standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 where the power terminal 853 faces. The wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 can be extended to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a force from acting and to prevent problems such as disconnection.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851 is provided with the standing wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the standing wall portion 850b, and the assembly work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, dust and dirt that cause a failure can be prevented from adhering to the power supply board 851 and mounted on the power supply board 851. It is possible to make it difficult to touch or replace electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) and to increase the defense against fraud. It has become.

  In addition, the direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 in the power supply board 851 is substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-rear direction), and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or removing the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply substrate 851, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853. Can be prevented from being energized and causing a failure of energization or the power supply terminal 853 being detached from the power supply board 851, and the pachinko machine 1 that is less prone to malfunction can be obtained.

  Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means using the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b so that the wiring cord 854 is Even if a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in such a direction as to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being released. Connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent problems such as poor contact and poor energization.

  Further, since the projections 850c projecting rearward are provided at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b. Even if it slides along the side, the projection 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall 850b. The pachinko machine 1 that reliably prevents the above-described effects can be realized.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b is moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 is not easily detached from the standing wall portion 850b. In addition, the above-described effects can be surely achieved, and the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and then the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. Thus, a series of operations can be performed continuously, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost.

  Also, the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and opened rearward, and a thin box-shaped cover that is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and opened front. 862 and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 153) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in the rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862, and are provided at one location of the plurality of separation cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 must be cut so that the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been opened and closed illegally. In this example, the dispensing control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In the payout control board box 860, an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, and the like attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through a cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). The payout control board box 860 has various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like facing rearward through the cover 862.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and includes a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side in the rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end in the rear view. The board base 871 is provided, the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 is attached to the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872a is attached to the rear surface, and the board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871 A connection terminal plate cover 873 having an opening portion 873b that is attached from the rear side and extends in the vertical direction on the rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a that faces rearward from the opening portion 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. CR unit connection terminal plate 8 supported in the connected terminal plate cover 873 And 4, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871, together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. Note that the board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and externally connected to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the CR unit connection terminal from the outside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. Also, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, the contents of error codes displayed on the frequency indicator, CR unit, etc. installed on the island facility side when a defect such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1 are displayed. A state display sticker 876 is pasted.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the board base 871 in the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with the rear end opened. The substrate base 871 is formed on the inner upper portion of the substrate mounting portion 871a and a fixing piece (not shown) for fixing the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and is formed on the inner lower portion of the substrate mounting portion 871a. A locking claw 871i for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872, and the peripheral piece relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871i. ing.

  The substrate base 871 is formed in a thin box shape in which the substrate cover mounting portion 871b is opened to the rear side, and the size of the inner periphery thereof is set such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted. In addition, the inner peripheral wall is an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The substrate base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b and contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 through a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side when viewed from the back. Two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided on the left outer side in back view of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b. The protrusion 871e on the substrate base 871 is in a state in which the amount of backward protrusion is slightly less than that of the outer piece 871c, and as much as possible on both side ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, as shown It is arranged to be close to the position.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is disposed on the rear right side rear surface of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b so as to be vertically separated from each other, and a pair of bearing portions 871g for pivotally supporting the substrate box cover 875, and a left end in the rear view. And a rectangular tube-shaped locking portion 871h disposed on the rear surface in the vicinity of the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting part 871b surrounded by the outer piece part 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a for closing the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening portion 873b penetrating the rear wall portion 873a and extending in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner periphery of the opening portion 873b An inner wall portion 873d extending forward (from the substrate base 871) from 873a, and the upper and lower outer wall portions holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And a pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

  Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is arranged at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a, and an approximately vertical direction. A box-shaped protective portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is opened on the left side when viewed from the back side, and extends outward (rightward) from the right side end when viewed from the back side of the outer wall portion 873c. A pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing hole 871d, and an elastic claw-like engagement that is formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the back and can be locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. A pawl piece 873i. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the inner wall part 873d extended ahead also in the upper and lower sides of the inner periphery in the center opening part 873f provided with the protection part 873g is formed.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape whose front side is opened by an outer wall portion 873c and a rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is configured to restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 rearward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. In addition, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving forward, and thus the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. It has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 has the fixing piece 873h inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and the locking claw piece 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871, thereby The base 871 can be detachably attached to the board cover attaching portion 871b.

  The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front side (rear side). In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. Yes.

  Further, the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape that covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and is opened to the front side, and is disposed on the right side surface as viewed from the rear side. A pair of shaft portions 875a pivotally supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through-hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873, penetrating in the front-rear direction, and forward from both left and right ends of the through-hole 875b And a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

  The board box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the board base 871 so as to be openable and closable together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft parts 875a on the bearing part 871g of the board base 871. Yes. Further, the board box cover 875 has a length in which a wall 875c on the side close to the shaft portion 875a (side supported) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and a wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective barrier walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surfaces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It is like that.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, the CR unit is connected to the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a square two-piece connector, and is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the terminal board box 870 of this example has an outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and a board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the assembled state. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece 871c of the connecting terminal plate cover 874 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874 are the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the shaft portion 875a of the board box cover 875. Since the barrier wall 875c on the side exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, even if an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is to be inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the plate 874, and to reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit attached as a CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if a D-sub connector in which a gap is formed between the connection terminal plate 874 and the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, illegal acts can be prevented. It is like that.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft portions 875a on the shaft portion 875a side of the through-hole 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a to the substrate box cover 875 pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. A barrier wall 875c having a length in between is provided, and the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier wall 875c. Therefore, a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the board box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed. It can be made expensive.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 of this example is configured so that the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, an illegal act of inserting the needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord in a state where the connection terminal on the wiring cord side is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b formed as a two-piece connector. However, the protection part 873g and the board box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrode, and can also prevent an illegal act on the internal connection terminal 874b.

  Thus, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are attached from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through a gap between the front and back of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the accommodated CR unit connection terminal plate 874 even if the distal end of the unauthorized tool is inserted. It is possible to prevent illegal acts against the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 with certainty.

  When the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate are in the direction along the front surface (back surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece 871c of the base 871, and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the substrate of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are in the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the barrier wall 875c of the box cover 875 exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. In an analogy, an unauthorized tool with excellent flexibility tries to enter between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary). However, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the unauthorized entry of the tool from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be surely prevented. The pachinko machine 1 that can reliably prevent an illegal act on the unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b can be obtained.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the substrate as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and illegal acts can be surely prevented.

  Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 so that the rear surface of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be opened and closed, and the opening 873b of the connection terminal board cover 873 is opened. And a board box cover 875 having a plate-like barrier wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the pivotally supported side of the through-hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the substrate base 871 to form a gap to allow an unauthorized tool to enter, an unauthorized tool is connected to the connection terminal by the barrier 875c. Reaching to the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) side can be prevented, and illegal acts can be prevented. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the connection box board cover 873 after opening the board box cover 875, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Can increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the substrate box cover 875 is formed. Can be prevented from being distorted to prevent the formation of a gap, making it difficult to perform fraud and making it highly deterrent.

  Furthermore, it is possible to perform an illegal act of inserting a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the protective portion 873g and the board box cover 875 cover the rear side of the opened opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector body, the outer side of the terminal board box 870 ( A needle-like electrode that cannot be inserted into the gap between the connector body from the rear side) and that prevents unauthorized acts on the terminals of the connected wiring cord. It can be.

  In addition, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with a substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c extends to the front side from the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even when a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 to form a gap in order to perform an illegal act, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves rearward together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). The CR unit connection terminal on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of a transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from the outside without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Whether an unauthorized tool is inserted into the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 accommodated therein, or the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 itself is not replaced with an unauthorized one. Or, it is possible to easily check whether electronic parts (for example, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 have been replaced with unauthorized ones. , It can make it easier to detect fraud, and it also makes it easier to find fraud. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 3 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like is directed to the rear side, When the main body frame 3 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 3 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 are turned to the worker side (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 in the board unit 800 include a peripheral control unit 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, etc. 5 for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 include a plurality of connection terminals for connection to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and are formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIGS. In addition, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIG. 1 and FIG. 28).

  Further, the main relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a remaining loan display portion 363, and a rotational position detection sensor of the handle device 500 in the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the connection of the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side is relayed. Further, the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 is provided on the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400 arranged on the door frame 5 side, and the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288 provided in the operation unit 400. , 290, 322, 430, 432, and the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b, 432c provided in the operation unit 400, and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. It is for relaying.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. 90A is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 90B is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. FIG. 91 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover as seen from the rear side. The back cover 900 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. . The back cover 900 has a plate-like main body portion 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body portion 902, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of juxtaposed vertical rows, projecting downward and pivotally supported by the back cover pivotal support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper left and lower sides of the main body 902 when viewed from the front. An engagement piece 908 that engages with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780 respectively, and the back cover 900 is placed in the vicinity of the lower engagement piece 908. 3 is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in a non-openable / closable manner.

  The fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the left in the rear view of the lower engagement piece 908 in the main body 902 of the back cover 900 as shown in FIGS. 921, a vertically long rectangular locking port 922 that is arranged at a predetermined distance on the left side in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a strip 923a on one end side and a horizontally long slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and inserted into the slot 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921 and a guide member 923 on the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 Includes a retaining member 925 attached so as to sandwich, the. Note that the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

  The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked in a loosely fitted state with respect to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. You can play with. Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. It can be slid in the left-right direction and is not dropped from the long hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, the fastening mechanism 920 has a fastening member 924 that protrudes forward through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

  The back cover 900 of this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 on the back cover shaft supporting portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. By engaging the engagement pieces 908 with the main body frame base 600 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, the engagement pieces 908 can be closed. Note that when the back cover 900 is in a closed state, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially aligned.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male thread portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even if the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw portion 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923b of the guide member 923 locked to the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off from the back cover 900. A state of being positioned on the rear side of the main body 902 is maintained.

  Then, by inserting the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924 from this state, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screwed). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. It should be noted that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example allows the fastening member 924 to be fastened even when the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is inclined with respect to the main body portion 902 when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male thread portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be satisfactorily moved to the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by a single fastening mechanism 920, so that it can be easily fastened or fastened only by operating one fastening member 924. The maintenance work can be improved by simplifying the labor involved in opening and closing the back cover 900.

  The back cover 900 includes a connection notch 910 that is cut upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 when viewed from the front, and a confirmation opening that penetrates the connection cutout 910 in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. 912 and a notch portion 914 for confirmation cut out in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body portion 902 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, through the connection notch 910, the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4, the test terminal 4100f, and the like. Comes to the rear. Further, the back cover 900 has a confirmation opening portion 912 through which a board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 101) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the rear side. The sealing part 1176 of the main control board box 1170 faces through the notch part 914. Thereby, even if the back cover 900 is not opened with respect to the main body frame 3, it is possible to perform operation confirmation, appearance confirmation, management state confirmation, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100.

  The back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 that are elongated in the main body 902 and the side portion 904, and heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 is generated in the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged outside the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through-holes 918 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction that are wide and extend in the up-down direction at a position slightly to the left in front view from the center. These through-holes 918 are in a state in which the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the game board 4 is accommodated and held in the main body frame 3, so It is positioned behind the cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided on the side, so that the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be exhausted satisfactorily. It has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

  Accordingly, in this example, the fastening member 924 that fastens the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is fixed to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. When the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 and maintenance of the rear side of the game board 4 is performed. Even if the fastening of the fastening member 924 that fastens and fixes the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 remains the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left in the pachinko machine 1 from being attached to the back cover 900. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from dropping from the opened back cover 900, so that it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 whose fastening has been released in a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. Further, it can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

  In addition, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 is extended at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a is reliably in a correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be securely fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Further, since the holding member 925 that holds the fastening member 924 in a freely movable manner with respect to the guide member 923 in cooperation with the head of the fastening member 924 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is provided. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming out of the elongated hole 923 b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be prevented. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by the gap and the long hole 923b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating the holding member 925 is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male threaded portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 passes through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back of the main body frame 3. When the cover fastening hole 780b is fastened, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be housed in the housing recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are in close contact with each other. Thus, the protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of problems. And can improve the appearance.

  Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female threaded portion and is screw-coupled with the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it is fastened only by pulling compared to engagement by a simple locking claw. Can not be released and the back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the guide member 923 has flexibility and the guide member 923 can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 relative to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921) can be further increased. The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is easily positioned in a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, and the male screw portion 924 is easily moved straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 770b. The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  In addition, in the state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is in contact with the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking port 922 of the back cover 900, the locking port Since it is elastically locked to 922, the shaft extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 on the distal end side (the long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 that is movably mounted The locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the distal end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be easily performed.

  Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 to be engaged, and by engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is described. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using only one fastening part using the fastening member 924, and work such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. Can increase the sex. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closed range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 (the rear side of the game board 4) can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening member 924.

  Further, the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pins 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover pivot support portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600). Therefore, by simply rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction and closing the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily aligned, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 through the insertion hole 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 can be opened even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and the back cover 900 is opened during maintenance or the like. It is possible to keep the cover 900 pivotally supported on the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time and effort required to open and close the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Side security board]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 that is extruded in a shallow U shape in plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed to the top and bottom near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. A positioning member 956 that is fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engages with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  A main body 952 of the side security plate 950 includes a side plate piece 952a having a length substantially the same as the height of the main body frame base 600 and extending in the vertical direction and having a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a right side when viewed from the front end of the side plate piece 952a. A front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c that is disposed so as to form a predetermined amount of gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and has a smaller protruding amount than the front end piece 952b, and a front face from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d extending longer than the front end piece 952b in the rightward direction (see FIG. 108). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by a side plate piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d, and the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 is interposed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d. A left side portion in front view with the game panel 1150 is inserted (see FIG. 108).

  The side security plate 950 of this example is configured such that the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. When the side security plate 950 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is connected to the shaft side of the shaft side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped projecting piece 166 and to prevent the insertion of a tool for performing an illegal act between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side when viewed from the front. (See FIG. 108). The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, and has a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and a middle piece 952c arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 are increased, so that the overall strength of the main body frame 3 can be increased to favorably support the game board 4, the door frame 5, and the like. It has become.

  Thus, according to this example, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed with the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is interposed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side security plate 950. The rear side piece of the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952b is inserted into the pivot-side U-shape. Therefore, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped protrusion 166 on the pivotal side of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the pivoted U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3 and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened. And can be used to perform illegal acts such as opening the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3 It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be stopped.

  Further, since the side security plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is set. The body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance in the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the main body frame base 600 that supports the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, the side security plate 950 on the side that supports the door frame 5 (the shaft support side) is formed of metal. Compared with the case where the entire main body frame 3 is made of metal, the cost associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 that locks the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is provided with a reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one location between the upper and lower ends and the upper and lower ends. The hook cover 165 is locked, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041. Even if the open side is beaten by an unauthorized tool such as a bar, it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 from spreading, and to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly opened. it can.

  Further, the rear end of the side plate piece 952a in the side crime prevention plate 950 is extended rearward from the front surface (the game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the dimension in the front-rear direction of the side plate piece 952a is increased. Since the bending rigidity with respect to the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 as a whole can be further increased, and the side security plate 950 can be prevented from being forcibly bent to perform an illegal act. .

  Further, since the side security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by a metal extrusion mold, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined cross-sectional shape having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily obtained. It can be formed, and even if the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, the increase in cost can be suppressed, and defects such as a decrease in strength that occur during processing are compared with the case where the metal plate is bent. It can be reduced as much as possible, and the side crime prevention plate 950 having high durability and strength can be obtained.

[1-3I. Locking device]
Next, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. FIG. 93A is a left side view of the locking device in the main body frame, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the locking device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 94 (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and FIG. 94 (B) is a sliding frame for a door frame and a sliding frame for a body frame that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a rear perspective view which shows these, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device as seen after disassembling, and FIG. 96 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the door frame sliding rod and the body frame sliding rod in the locking device. FIG. 97 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the tamper-proof member in the lock device.

  The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the right side (open side) of the front end frame part 602 in the main body frame base 600 and a lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall in the main body frame base 600 A plurality of lock mounting portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The U-shaped sliding rod 1040, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be illegally slid. A first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001 are provided.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and includes a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a main body frame sliding rod 1050. Are slidably arranged. Note that the U-shaped base 1001 has an extremely thin lateral width as compared to a conventional locking device integrated into a base having an L-shaped cross section. Thereby, the horizontal dimension of the locking device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased. 1100 wide game board 4 can be provided.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is attached in a state in which the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600. The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 are formed on the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate vertically on the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002, a screw fixing portion 1003 projecting outward in the upper part and middle of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and a screw fixing part 1003 protrudes forward from the open side (front side) upper and middle portions of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the projections 1003 are provided, and from the lower ends of the open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The locking protrusion 1004 is provided.

  Screw fixing portions 1003 and locking protrusions 1004 of the U-shaped base body 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 1003 is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and moved upward, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

  The locking device 1000 is mounted not only on the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also on the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and in the vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 611. Also, the lock attaching portion 625 is fixed to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower part of the lock device 1000 is also attached.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three locations on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are connected to the upper and lower door hook holes 620 and the locking locking holes. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame base 600 with a very simple structure. It can be firmly fixed to (main body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing of the front side and the rear side of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 constituting the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) protrudes from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Since the screw fixing part 1003 constituting the fixing structure on the rear side protrudes from the side surface 1001b contacting the peripheral wall part 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 to the peripheral wall part 605 side, the front locking structure is connected to the peripheral wall part 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b in contact therewith.

  The U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating left and right in the upper, middle, and lower sides of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are inserted inside the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 with the body frame sliding rod 1050 stored. Can be slidably mounted in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 formed at the upper, middle and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. As shown in (B), a rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end portions of long holes 1055 and 1061 for rivets formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 respectively for the body frame sliding rod 1050. The door frame sliding rod 1040 can be moved upward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 protrudes from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the open-side main body frame base 600 and protrudes laterally. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, an insertion vertical opening 1020 penetrating through the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief horizontal hole 1022 are formed. The fraud prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described later in detail, but the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is advanced and retracted. Further, the lock mounting piece 1008 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is located on the side surface 1001b so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame base 600. Projecting from the front end to the side, the lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 are mounted at two locations on the top and bottom. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in the screw and a screw stopper 1003 drilled to mount the lower part of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

  The U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 that urges the second tamper-proof member 1032 upward, and a clearance lateral hole 1022 that forms a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034; It has.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting substrate 1011 for fixing to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 1011. At the same time, an engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side is a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating.

  This cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 from the rear side, and attachment holes 1013 formed at two positions on the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008.

  The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base body 1001 of the lock device 1000 do not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key, but fraudulently for the main body frame with a piano wire, a wire, etc. It is for preventing lowering. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034 as shown in FIG. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be swingable about the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is positioned together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 through the swing shaft hole 1025. A lower insertion hole 1005 and a rivet 1006 are attached.

  In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 opens vertically in the plate-like surface at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The protruding piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 passes through the projection piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The raised engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 are engaged with each other. Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely on the outer front side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging protruding piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. The inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 97 (B).

  Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 that protrudes toward the U-shaped base 1001 side from an obliquely lower lower side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. A regulation protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that pass through the front side of the regulation protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is intruded into and engaged with the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066 of the main body frame slide rod 1050 when the main body frame slide rod 1050 is locked. Thus, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from sliding illegally. Further, the restricting protruding piece 1031 of the first fraud preventing member 1023 abuts on the second fraud preventing member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud preventing member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). The movement can be restricted.

  Further, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connecting hole 1030 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is for connecting the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 in a pivotable manner by a connecting pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted “te” -shaped plate material, and has a connection hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 at the lower end. The second fraud prevention member 1032 can be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be relatively rotatable by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. It can be done. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base body 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. Thus, the spring 1035 is biased upward. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is configured such that the abutting portion 1037 abuts on the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with door frame hook portions 1041 projecting forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side. The door frame hook 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped substrate 1001 in a state where the door frame sliding rod 1040 is housed in the U-shaped substrate 1001. When the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door protrudes forward from a door hook hole 620 (see FIG. 63, FIG. 68, etc.) formed in the main body frame base 600. It can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the frame 5. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the figure, and thereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are lifted by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  Also, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed in the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces, and has a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, below the uppermost rivet slot 1042, and for the door frame. A guide protrusion 1043 protruding in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided at the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040. The rivet slot 1042 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is configured such that a rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is slid into the door frame. It is formed in a vertically long shape so as not to disturb the ascending operation of the ridge 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 is in contact. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted such that the guide projection 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050. Thus, the sliding movement between the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be guided.

  In addition, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed with a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048 at the upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding is performed by the spring 1048. The collar 1040 is biased downward, and the main body frame sliding collar 1050 is biased mutually upward. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is stamped from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be prevented from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is like that.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is provided at the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. This constitutes a space in which the part can move. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the rising engagement hole 1045 and rotated, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016. It is for engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 that is notched larger in the vertical direction than the tamper-proof notch 1007 behind the vertical side. This escape notch 1049 is obstructed by the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is securely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The corresponding part is notched so as not to become.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1053 that connects the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and It has. That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not formed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at the upper end portion, and a long rivet hole 1055 penetrating in a horizontal direction in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 that passes through the rivet long hole 1055 in the left-right direction, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057 And a contact hole 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper part on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward.

  Further, the rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which the rivet 1006 has penetrated, the rivet 1006 has penetrated the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055 so that the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The upper hook member 1051 has a protruding piece moving hole 1056 into which the guide protruding piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1040. The mutual movement with 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. Further, the connection hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is inserted with the upper end of the connection wire rod 1053 bent. Further, the abutting portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001. There is no backlash and it can slide smoothly.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is for the rivet penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052 and the hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from the lower end portion. A long hole 1061, a downward engagement hole 1062 arranged below the long hole 1061 for rivets, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engagement hole 1062, and a lower part of the free hole 1063 A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 drilled in the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement formed in the lower part of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. A joint notch 1066 and a contact portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward. The rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet slot 1061 has a rivet. In a normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

  Further, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotates, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. It is for engaging. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 has a second engagement protrusion 1018 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It is possible to form a space in which the distal end portion of the can move. Further, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding plate are inserted. The mutual movement with the palpit 1050 can be guided.

  The lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be smoothly slid without play.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described. To assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by a connecting wire rod 1053, and the guide projection of the door frame sliding rod 1040 in that state is connected. The piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet slot 1042 and the rivet slots 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped. While being overlapped, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame are used. After inserting the sliding rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base body 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005. .

  When the rivet 1006 is inserted, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet long holes 1055, 1061, 1042. When the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 and attach the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are coupled by the coupling pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is coupled to the pin hole. It is necessary to insert the guide pin 1028 into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after it is fixed at 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Furthermore, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the distal end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this way, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While being inserted, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding in a bowl shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in this state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is provided. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by matching the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b that contacts the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the front locking structure contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to be loose.

  Next, the operation of the locking device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. Further, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to depress the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and is connected thereto. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locking state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the main body frame 3 is removed by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. The frame 2 can be opened.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. 96A). , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is formed on the closing plates 24, 25 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since it contacts the lower end, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again, thereby sliding the main body frame. The hook 1050 is raised and returned to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 rotates in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hook state 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook part 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined part of the hook part 1041 for the door frame is hooked to the hook cover 165 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised upward, and the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are re-engaged with each other. The pail 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the full length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from the inside. The act cannot be performed.

  Thus, the locking device 1000 of the door frame 3 of this embodiment releases the locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. The door frame 5 can be unlocked with respect to the main body frame 3 by rotating. Further, the locking device 1000 of this example performs an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and lowering it without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010. Can not be. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97A, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact It has become a state. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the stopper piece 1027 is intrusion prevention notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. As a result, even if the piano frame or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is properly unlocked by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the clockwise direction shown in the figure, and also moves so as to be retracted from the tamper-proof notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the hooked state of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. Can be done.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97 (A) is obtained. Thereby, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Even in the lock mechanism that is the first tamper-proof structure described above, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first tamper-proof member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the internal The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the housing are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, and are completely covered. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to pull down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 This prevents the unauthorized tool from entering the closed space, so that the unauthorized action cannot be easily performed.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment has the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame in the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 whose width is extremely thin as compared with the conventional lock device concentrated on the L-shaped base. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided and the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 is attached to the U-shaped base 1001 at a position below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the up-down direction is greatly increased and the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 is firmly attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be installed.

  Moreover, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered by the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is not possible to easily perform an illegal act such as pulling down a main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided by inserting a piano wire or the like.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. The structure is such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. With this structure, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

  In the locking device 1000 of this example, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 as a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 with screws. Although the structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is attached to the lock. It is good also as a structure which forms the lock attachment hole penetrated through the piece 1008 on the upper and lower sides of the cylinder lock penetration hole 611. Even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 at the rear of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed sufficiently firmly on the back surface of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped substrate (tablet substrate) and the first side wall 540. It is good also as a structure which accommodates 1050, and there can exist the same effect as the locking device 1000 mentioned above.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (front-rear direction) on the rear side of the body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710 The prize ball tank 720 for storing game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are aligned to the rear wall portion of the prize ball base 710 A transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of 710b, and a game ball released from the tank rail unit 730 to the upper frame 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction, the rear wall portion of the winning ball base 710 A prize ball device 740 that is partially attached to the rear side of 710b and a side portion 904 that extends to the rear end of the main body frame base 600, and a rear surface of the tank rail unit 730 and a prize ball device 74 are provided. Since it has a transparent back cover 900 arranged substantially in the same plane as the rear surface, the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. The rear side and the rear side surface can be visually confirmed, and the rear side of the game board 4 can be easily inspected (visually inspected) without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4. A pachinko machine 1 can be obtained.

  Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc. When the game board 4 is removed from the front side to the 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, remove them. Therefore, it is possible to easily find out from the above, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of any malfunction due to the residue.

  Further, as described above, since the rear surface and rear side surface of the game board 4 can be viewed from the outside, unauthorized devices and tools for performing illegal acts are attached to the rear side and side surfaces of the game board 4. Even if it is done, it can be easily discovered, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed, and it is also possible to easily find unauthorized devices attached to the game board 4 from the outside, The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraudulent behavior can be provided, which can be used to prevent unauthorized installation of devices.

  Also, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the game machine 4 is installed come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign matters such as dust and dust from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to keep the game board 4 in a good state and suppress the occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position that is approximately twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 (see FIG. 65) from the front end of the main body frame base 600. Since the depth D of the frame base 600 is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. An effect can be reliably produced. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to obtain a flat shape. Further, it is possible to facilitate the attaching operation of attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

  Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made into a substantially flat surface, and it can be caught or brought into contact with other members in the island facility to be installed by eliminating protrusions on the rear side. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, it is possible to use a buffer material with a simple shape and to increase the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency). The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

  In addition, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through-holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. The rear side of 4 can be further easily seen, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the back side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 and the like of the back cover 900. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from accumulating, and the control of the game is unstable due to the heat, and the occurrence of problems due to deformation of members such as synthetic resin is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 are sized so that the game ball cannot pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring due to the game ball entering.

[1-4. Basic configuration of game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 98 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. FIG. Further, FIG. 102 (A) is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit in the game board in a state attached to the pachinko machine, and FIG. 102 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

  FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the game panel of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 and the like, as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of a board. FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction. Further, FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the front structural member of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 103 and the like, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 is a game board as viewed from the rear of FIG. FIG.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 4 according to the present embodiment has a front configuration in which an outer periphery of the game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven by a player operating the handle device 500 is substantially rectangular in shape. A member 1110, a plate-like game panel 1150 that is arranged on the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defines the rear end of the game area 1100, a board holder 1160 that is arranged on the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a board holder 1160 A main control board box 1170 that houses a main control board 4100 that controls the game content that is attached to the rear surface of the game ball 1100 and controls the game content that is performed by driving the game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined signal based on a control signal from the main control board 4100 A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying the game status and attached to a predetermined position of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible to the player. To have. The game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. It is further provided (see FIGS. 110 to 117).

  The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by a front component member 1110, a game panel 1150, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. A detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4) is formed by the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170. Here, a basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and a detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component member 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1110 has an outer rail 1111 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left end toward the left side from the center in the left-right direction in a front view and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction in the front view. An inner rail 1112 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1111 inside the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the upper left side when viewed from the front. An inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the counterclockwise circumferential direction when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111 , The inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, which can be contacted with the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111. Is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 at the boundary of the outer area, and is supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to be rotatable, and closes between the outer rail 1111. In this way, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where the outer rail 1111 is opened by rotating in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. And a backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

  When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component member 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 as shown in FIG. It is positioned on the extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and the game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the hit ball launcher 650 is Then, it jumps over the space and is driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is used. The player can enter the game area 1100 by rotating it toward the open position against the urging force.

  In addition, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that rolls along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by the game ball coming into contact with the stop 1114, and the game ball rolls continuously from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It can be prevented from moving. Note that even if a game ball that has entered (or has been driven into) the game area 1100 attempts to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Accordingly, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  In addition, if a game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is not received in a winning slot (a general winning slot, a starting slot, a big winning slot, an accessory winning slot, etc.) of the table unit 2000 described later, It flows down to the lower end of the region 1100 and is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and the rear lower side of the game board 4 from the out port 1151. To be discharged.

  On the other hand, when the game ball launched from the hitting ball launcher 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 A foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is opened from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. It falls and is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the foul space 626 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  Note that the outer rail 1111 in the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball is enhanced, and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the stopper 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin on the surface, so that even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is alleviated. The game ball can be repelled inward.

  Further, the front component member 1110 includes a wall-shaped crime prevention projection 1117 protruding forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially center in the vertical direction along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from the lower side of the out-port guide surface 1115. And a groove-shaped rail crime prevention groove 1118 that is recessed from the front end by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security protrusion 1117 in the front structural member 1110 overlaps with the rear end protrusion piece 183 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot support side (left side in front view), the unauthorized tool can reach the game area 1100. Can not be.

  Further, when the front structural member 1110 of the present example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the post-crime protruding piece 182 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. The post-crime protruding piece 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface of the inner rail 1112 (opposite to the game area 1100). Even in the inner rail 1112 and the rail crime prevention groove 1118 and the post-crime projection piece 182, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has entered from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

  Further, the front component member 1110 is spaced apart in the vertical direction at the left end in the front view and is recessed from the front to the rear and opened to the left end, and is spaced in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120, a fixed recess 1121 which is disposed on the left side of the front view of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward, and has an arc shape on the upper side and is recessed from the front side. In the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower end, there is provided a spherical passage cutout portion 1122 that is cut out in a rectangular shape extending long in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted with a positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 is viewed from the front. However, it is possible to restrict movement in the front-rear direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board. By being locked by the locking portion 608, the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  Further, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 is a front view of the game board fixture 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. When rotated clockwise, the fixed piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixture 690. It is like that. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is connected to the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the notches 1122 and 1152 for the ball passage.

  Further, the front component member 1110 has a laterally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end of the front end at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction from the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the through hole 1123 to the left side of the front view. A fastening portion 1124 formed thinly and a certificate sticking portion 1125 disposed on the left side of the through hole 1123 as viewed from the front is attached. Although the detailed illustration of the fastening portion 1124 in the front component member 1110 is omitted, when the game board 4 is attached to the conventional main body frame, a predetermined fastening band is formed with respect to the fastening holes formed in the conventional main body frame. The game board 4 can be made difficult to remove and the game board 4 can be prevented from being illegally removed.

  Further, in the front component member 1110, a display unit 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed on the outer right side of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and in the lower right of the front view. The front component member 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 projecting rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing it, the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fitted into an inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 to fix the inner rail 1112 at a predetermined position of the game panel 1150.

[1-4B. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The gaming panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and the outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. This gaming panel 1150 is horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side in front view of the lower end in front view and the out-port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-out guide surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front , And is opened downward and has a spherical passage cutout portion 1152 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110, and a rearward projecting portion of the function display unit 1180 that penetrates the lower right corner when viewed from the front. An insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

  Further, in the gaming panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 and the positioning protrusions 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed near the lower left and right ends. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1156 which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and whose lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 101). And a notch 1157 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 of the present example can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110, and within a range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front surface, A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the gaming panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is positioned at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100 in the front component member 1110 when assembled to the gaming board 4. The game ball guided rearward by the out port guide surface 1115 thus made enters the out port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front. The substrate holder 1160 has an out sphere discharge portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion is an out sphere. A game ball that is formed so as to become lower toward the discharge unit 1161, is discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit or the back unit, and is supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the substrate holder 1160, The ball is discharged from the out ball discharge unit 1161 downward. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is positioned directly above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3. All the game balls discharged from the board pass through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800 and are discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixed bosses 1162 that protrude forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520 and then fitted to the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110. In a state of being fitted to the boss 1126, a predetermined screw is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160, so that the substrate holder 1160 is attached to the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the substrate holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 in which a fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the lateral side to the left end portion of the rear wall in the rear view when viewed from the rear. And a locking portion 1164 that is disposed so as to face 1163 and that can lock the elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 from behind. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160 by the fixing part 1163 and the locking part 1164 of the board holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 has a thin horizontal box-shaped board base 1171 whose rear side is opened and a thin horizontal box shape that covers the rear surface of the board base 1171 and is opened on the front side, and is fitted into the board base 1171 from the rear side. A board cover 1172 to be combined, and a main control board 4100 having electronic components and terminals mounted on the rear side at the front end of the board cover 1171 are provided. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left side end of the board base 1171 when viewed from the back and is fitted to the fixing part 1163 of the board holder 1160 and from the right side of the board cover 1172 when viewed from the right side. And an elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 101 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed at the right end of the back view two times up and down across the elastic fixing piece 1175 and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) pasted between the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the hermetic seal A protective cover 1177 and a substrate management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 1172 are provided. The sealing part 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation cutting part 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and caulking is fixed in any one of the four sealing parts 1176. Has been. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the caulking-fixed sealing portion 1176 so that the main control board box 1170 remains open and closed. It has become. Thus, it can be clearly determined from the outside whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been opened illegally.

  In this example, four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided, so that the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. In addition, the main control board box 1170 of this example has a hermetic seal applied across the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. When the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated, the hermetic seal is cut. It is necessary to peel off or peel off, and even in this hermetic seal, a trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified or replaced with an illegal main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such illegal acts from being performed.

  The main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening, Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face the rear side. The main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170 by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f facing the rear surface of the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-described sealing portion 1176 and the sealing seal are cleverly crafted, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed other than visually, and the pachinko machine 1 having high crime prevention performance is obtained. Be able to.

[1-4E. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110. The display unit 1181 is disposed on the front surface of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible from the player side. A rear projecting portion 1182 projecting rearward from the rear surface.

  In the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 102 (A), the game state that changes depending on the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end of the front view. A game status indicator 1183 consisting of one LED for the purpose of playing, and two pending LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the game status indicator 1183 to display the number of suspensions related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first start port 2201 The first special symbol memory display 1184 for the first special symbol memory and the first special symbol stored on the right side of the first special symbol memory display 1184, and the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball to the first start port 2201 As a first special symbol display 1185 comprising one 7-segment LED, and a second starting port 258 disposed diagonally to the right of the first special symbol display 1185. a second special symbol display 1186 comprising one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to b as a second special symbol, and a second special symbol display 1186 And a second special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of reserves relating to the reception of game balls to the second start port 2587b, which is composed of two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side.

  Further, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 has a normal symbol memory display 1188 composed of four LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the passage of the gate unit 2585a by the game ball, and a lower part of the normal symbol memory display 1188. The normal symbol display 1189 composed of one LED for displaying the normal lottery result which is arranged on the side as the game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a as a normal symbol, and the diagonal symbol upper right of the normal symbol storage display 1188 When the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit” or the like, the number of times the open / close pattern of the first big prize opening 2102 and the second big prize opening 2509 is repeated (number of rounds) is displayed. And a round indicator 1190 composed of two LEDs.

  The game status indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange. Various game states (for example, a probability variation state, a time shortening state, a probability variation short state, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, etc.) can be displayed by the combination.

  The first special symbol memory display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the first start port 2201 when the first special symbol display 1185 cannot display the first special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the first special symbols on which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. This first special symbol memory indicator 1184 has two first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b made of predetermined LEDs, and is put on hold according to the lighting / flashing pattern of the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b. Numbers can be displayed. More specifically, for example, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on when the number of holds is 1, and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is turned off. When the number of holdings is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a flashes and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is blinking. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  In addition, the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the second start port 2587b when the second special symbol display 1186 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the second special symbol that is suspended (stored) is displayed (stored). The second special symbol memory indicator 1187 has two second special symbol memory lamps 1187 and 1187b each having a predetermined LED. Numbers can be displayed. Specifically, for example, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on when the number of reserved is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is turned off, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b when the number of reserved is two. When the number of holds is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is lit. When the number of holds is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are both It is blinking. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Further, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are drawn by the first special lottery that is drawn by receiving the game balls to the first start port 2201 and the second start port 2587b. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed. The 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first 7-segment LED light emission pattern (special symbol) is stopped. The player can recognize the special lottery result and the second special lottery result.

  Further, the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange, and a combination of the emitted emission color and lighting / flashing. Thus, it is possible to display a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball through the gate portion 2585a. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after the fluctuation display is performed for a predetermined time similarly to the special symbol.

  Further, the normal symbol memory display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 holds the start of the variable display when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a when the normal symbol cannot be displayed in the normal symbol display 1189. The number of stored (stored) ordinary symbols is displayed. The normal symbol storage indicator 1188 includes four normal symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from below, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol storage lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holds. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved normal symbols. In this example, up to four normal symbol fluctuation displays are held (stored).

  Furthermore, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 is provided with a two-round display lamp 1190a and a 15-round display lamp 1190b made up of predetermined LEDs, and each lamp is turned on to turn on a round in the “big hit” game. Numbers can be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 102A, the function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. In addition, the game status indicator 1183, the first special symbol memory display 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187, the normal symbol memory of the function display unit 1180. The display 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 153). Further, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, the function display unit 1180 has a function as compared with the case in which the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150. The display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that is embodied by the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different, the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change. The store clerk in the hall can recognize the position of the display unit 1181 without being confused. To have.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may be configured as shown in FIG. In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 configured by 7 segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. The first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are each constituted by four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory indicator 1188 is constituted by two LEDs.

  The function display unit 1180 can achieve the same effects as described above, and the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are configured by eight LED groups. Compared to the case where the segment LED is used, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since the content displayed on the function display unit 1180 is difficult to understand, it is possible to suppress the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming concerned about the display during the game, and it is possible to suppress difficulty in concentrating on the game. The game can be more enjoyed by devoting itself to movable effects and effects images.

[1-4F. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a gaming panel 1200 having a form different from the gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the front component member 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 103 to 105 have the same configuration as described above, and a detailed description thereof is omitted here. The gaming panel 1200 of the present embodiment is thinner than the gaming panel 1150 described above, and has a plate shape that can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 that is partitioned by the front component member 1110 from the outer shape of the front component member 1110. The panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-like panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110.

  The panel plate 1210 in the gaming panel 1200 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than that of the gaming area 1100. Synthetic resin plates such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, glass, metal, etc. It is formed with the inorganic board. The thickness of the panel plate 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently retained even if the obstruction nail is installed on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 formed of round holes arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, a long hole 1212 disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction, It has. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1213 whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 1213 is cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 1100 in the same manner as the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  The panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 to the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Further, the panel plate 1210 has a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 such as the attacker unit 2100 and the center accessory 2500, the details of which will be described later. The attacker unit 2100 and the like are inserted and fixed (not shown).

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the gaming panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel board 1210 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape. 20 mm) of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1220 includes a holding step portion 1221 that holds the panel plate 1210 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 1100 inside the holding step portion 1221. It mainly includes a through-hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction.

  The holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be almost the same surface. In addition, the holding step portion 1221 has a front inner peripheral surface of a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 includes an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging step portion 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engagement claw 1224 is disposed on the upper holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engagement step portion 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. It protrudes toward the end and is elastically engaged with the engaging step 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and is positioned between the front surface of the holding step 1221. It is configured such that a predetermined amount is extended toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 in a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed. The panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220 by engaging the engagement step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engagement claws 1224 and the engagement pieces 1225.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the attachment boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted, and the attachment boss of the front component member 1110 is inserted into the boss insertion hole 1226. By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component member 1110 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side, which is recessed by a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave the lower center and the outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. The mounting support portion 1227 causes the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 to be recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the rear outer peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of the depression ( The depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) that can accommodate the flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c (see FIG. 114, etc.) of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the mounting support portion 1227. It is desirable to be between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3010c from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 The pachinko machine 1 can be securely installed and mounted in the game board holding port 601.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in a rear surface side mounting support portion 1227 and capable of being screwed with predetermined screws in a predetermined arrangement. In addition, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion (illustrated) protruding forward from a fixing portion 3010c formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 3010 in the back box 3010). Is omitted))). In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

  It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, the inner diameter of the hole is mixed with a large diameter and a small diameter so that the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size or weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the thinned portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 103, these thinning portions 1230 are not formed within a predetermined range from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height, and within that range, the panel holder 1220 Since the front surface is a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component member 1110 disposed on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the game ball launched from the ball hitting device 650 is smoothly guided. It has become so. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a thinned portion 1230 so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and supports the panel holder 1220 and maintains the strength of the panel holder 1220. For this reason, a box-like rib is formed.

  The panel holder 1220 is formed with a positioning unit 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) or an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 1150 on the obstacle nail planting device. Can be set in the state. Further, at the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front. The ball passage cutout portion 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 and the rear protrusion portion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front lower right corner portion when viewed from the front are inserted. An insertion hole 1234.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out sphere discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 104) which is depressed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and whose lower end side is opened downward. And a notch portion 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. The panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The out-ball discharge groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is formed in the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600) when the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. The game board 4 is moved relative to the main body frame 3 in the left-right direction when the out-ball discharge groove 1235 is fitted with the positioning protrusion 607. Being regulated.

  In the gaming panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engagement claw 1224, the engagement piece 1225, and the engagement step portion 1213 are engaged. By combining them, the panel holder 1220 can hold the panel board 1210, and the front side of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. Even if the installation device is not modified, it is possible to set the panel plate 1210 to the conventional obstacle nail planting device with the panel holder 1220 held, and to suppress the cost for planting the failure nail. Can be done.

  In addition, although not shown in the drawing, the gaming panel 1200 of this example has a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. At the same time, a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thus, since the thin panel plate 1210 supports only the front unit 2000, the panel plate 1210 can be prevented from being distorted by the load of the front unit 2000.

  Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220, even if the panel board 1210 is a transparent board, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the gaming panel 1200 as a whole. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen by the player through the board 1210 can be realized, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

  In addition, since the gaming panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 whose position such as an obstacle nail or a winning opening changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 including the game board 4 that can be used for various models can be obtained by replacing only the panel plate 1210.

  Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the rear unit 3000 that are mounted and fixed on the rear side of the panel holder 1220 according to the model Even if the positions are different, the panel holder 1220 can be made a common part of the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228. It has become.

[1-4G. Second embodiment of front component]
Next, a front component member 1110A having a form different from that of the front component member 1110 in the gaming board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming panel 1200, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 106 and 108 are the same as the embodiment of FIGS. 103 to 105 in that the outer shape of the panel plate 1210 and the inner shape of the through-hole 1222 of the panel holder 1220 are the same. The configuration is the same as that of the example of FIGS. 103 to 105, and detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  The front structural member 1110A shown in FIGS. 106 and 107 is different from the front structural member 1110 described above in that a part of the inner peripheral shape penetrating in the front-rear direction is different and the function display unit 1180 is not provided. The point is very different. In addition, about another structure, it is the same as that of the front structural member 1110, and while attaching | subjecting the same code | symbol, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. Further, in the game board 4 using the front component member 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 (in this example, the front unit 2000).

  As shown in the figure, the front component member 1110A has a frame-like inner peripheral shape that extends from the out-port guide surface 1115 in the clockwise direction in a front view to the inner rail 1112 and the stop portion 1114 of the outer rail 1111. The shape is the same as that of the above-described front component member 1110, and the shape from the stop portion 1114 to the out port guide surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from that of the above-described front component member 1110. ing. Specifically, a portion extending from the stopper 1114 to a position immediately above the right-side certificate sticking portion 1125 disposed immediately below the stopper 1114 is formed in a gentle arc shape, and from the arc-shaped lower end to the outlet. It is formed in a straight line inclined so that the distance to the guide surface 1115 becomes lower toward the out-mouth guide surface 1115.

  The front component member 1110A of the present example can secure a wider game area 1100 than the above-described front component member 1110, and the wide game area 1100 can make the player more entertaining. It can be done.

  In the example of FIGS. 106 and 107, the game panel 1200 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110A. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it attach the game panel 1150 which consists of one board as shown to 101. FIG.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machine]
Next, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 108 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 109 is a perspective view seen from the back in a state where the game board is housed in the main body frame.

  First, as shown in FIG. 108, the security structure on the pivot support side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example is a side surface on the pivot support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of the synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. And a metal side security plate 950 attached to the door frame 5 and a metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 formed of a synthetic resin in the door frame 5.

  As described above, the side security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of an extrusion mold material made of metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component member 1110 (1110A) and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 are combined. This side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction and extends in the front-rear direction to form a plate-like side plate piece 952a that forms the side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end that extends from the front end of the side plate piece 952a to the inner side (open side) in a substantially right angle direction. A piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending along the front end piece 952b from the side plate piece 952a so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance on the rear side of the front end piece 952b, and extending inward in a substantially perpendicular direction from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d. As a result, the front end of the side security plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

  Further, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) has the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 by the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. The strength of the main body frame 3 is increased and the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported.

  On the other hand, the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed in a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 using spot welding, rivets, or the like, as described above. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft support side is provided with a shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened outward (the shaft support side). In the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased by the support-side U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. .

  By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 on the shaft support side. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the security structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed on the inner side of the front end of the side security plate 950 are provided. A rear side piece of the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952b is pivotally supported. The side U-shaped projecting piece 166 is sandwiched. Accordingly, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft-supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. Since the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 can be prevented from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3, the closed door frame 5 can be prevented from being opened, and the main body frame can be prevented. It is possible to prevent a fraudulent act such as opening the door frame 5 with respect to 3.

  Further, since the side security plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is set. Since the strength and rigidity of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance can be improved.

  Further, since the rear end of the side plate piece 952a in the side security plate 950 extends rearward from the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side plate piece 952a is assumed. Even if the player is destroyed, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire cannot be entered from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1150). Can be surely prevented. As shown in FIG. 108, the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the outside of the side crime prevention plate 950, so that the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. It can be fully countered against the destruction of the. In general, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed within the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side From the (front side), it is almost impossible to allow unauthorized tools to enter the rear side of the rear end of the side plate piece 952c, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further improved.

  Next, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the game board 4 is connected to the rear side or the side of the game board 4 accommodated in the main body frame 3. Even if it is not removed from the main body frame 3 or the back cover 900 is not opened, it can be viewed from the rear side of the main body frame 3. As a result, even if an unauthorized device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily discovered and illegal acts can be prevented. Further, since it is possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach an unauthorized device, and it is possible to increase deterrence against unauthorized acts. ing.

  In addition, since the rear side and the side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the main body frame can be used for maintenance and model change. When the game board 4 is attached to or detached from the board 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4, remove them. Therefore, it is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring, and to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of game board]
Next, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 117. FIG. 110 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine, FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the diagonally right front, and FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the diagonally left front. FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the rear. In addition, FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 115 is an exploded view of the main members constituting the game board and obliquely viewed from the rear. FIG. FIG. 116 is a cross-sectional view of the game board cut from the approximate center in the up-down direction and viewed from above, and FIG. 117 is a cross-sectional view of the game board cut from the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right side.

  The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium when the player operates the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component member 1110A that partitions and forms the inner periphery of the game region 1100 to be driven, and a predetermined shape at a position corresponding to the game region 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110A so as to close the game region 1100 A plate-like game panel 1150 having a plurality of openings 1158 (see FIGS. 114 and 115 and the like) penetrating in the front-rear direction and defining a rear end of the game area 1100.

  The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wooden plywood such as a plywood board.

  The game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and a rear side of the back unit 3000 from the player side. A main liquid crystal display device 1900 that is attached so as to be visible and can display a predetermined effect image, a substrate holder 1160 that is attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 from the rear side, and And a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the present example is arranged in the lower part in the game area 1100 at the upper right of the out port 1151 in the front view, and on the left side of the attacker unit 2100, directly above the out port 1151. A start port unit 2200, a front side unit 2300 extending in an arc shape along the inner periphery of the game area 1100 on the left side of the start port unit 2200, and a function display unit 1180 attached to the front side unit 2300 and capable of displaying a game state. And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 arranged at a substantially central portion of the game area 1100.

  Further, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150, the front side is opened, and an opening 3010b through which the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 faces in the front and rear direction is formed in the rear wall 3010a. A back box 3010, a panel relay board 3020 attached to the rear wall 3010 a of the back box 3010, a lamp driving board 3021, a motor driving board 3023, and a front lamp relay board 3025.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back lower middle production unit 3100 having a sub liquid crystal display device 3111 mounted in the back box 3010, a back lower left production unit 3200 attached to the left and right sides of the back lower middle production unit 3100, and the back. A lower right effect unit 3300, a ball discharge unit 3400 attached to the front of the back lower left effect unit 3200 and the back lower right effect unit 3300, a rear rear effect unit 3500 attached to the left and right sides of the back box 3010, A back left effect unit 3600 and a back right effect unit 3700, which are respectively arranged on the front side of the rear effect unit 3500, and a back effect unit 3800 attached to the front side of the back effect unit 3500 are provided.

  Further, on the back side of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control that houses a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 153) having a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150, as will be described in detail later. A substrate box 1910 is provided.

  In the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is attached to the gaming panel 1150 so that the main liquid crystal display device 1900 faces the player at the approximate center in the gaming area 1100. Yes. At least a part of each of the left and right ends of the center accessory 2500 extends to the inner periphery of the game area 1100 and divides the game area 1100 vertically. Although details will be described later, a game ball that is driven into the game area 1100 can flow down the left and right outside of the window 2501 of the center accessory 2500. In the game area 1100, the upper left area of the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front and the area from the lower side to the approximate center in the vertical direction on the left side are formed in a relatively wide area where the game ball can circulate. In these regions, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement.

  In the game board 4 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is driven into the left side of the front view, that is, on the left route 1100L side from the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500, the plurality of protrusions of the center accessory 2500 It passes between the parts 2512 and flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when entering the warp inlet 2503 opened in the peripheral wall portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500, the sorting member that sorts to either the warp outlet 2505 supplied to the stage 2506 or the discharge outlet 2508 returned to the game area 1100 2520 and distributed to either one. As a result, the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2503 can be made to be thrilled and irritated by being concerned about whether or not the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2503 is distributed to the warp outlet 2505 side (stage 2506 side). It is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball. In this embodiment, game balls are distributed to the warp outlet 2505 side with a high probability.

  The game balls distributed to the warp outlet 2505 side by the distribution member 2520 are supplied to the stage 2506. The game ball supplied to the stage 2506 rolls on the stage 2506 in the left-right direction, and then is released into the game area 1100. The game ball 1 can enjoy a movement different from the movement due to the obstacle nail, and the chance exit of the stage 2506 When the game ball is released into the game area 1100 from 2506d, the first start port 2201 of the start port unit 2200 can be won with a high probability.

  In addition, when the game ball that has been driven to the left route 1100L side does not enter the warp entrance 2503, the game ball enters the entrance 2507 and enters the game area 1100 from the discharge port 2508 below the sorting member 2520. Released. A game ball that is driven to the left route 1100L side of the game area 1100 and is discharged from the discharge port 2508 of the center accessory 2500 is guided to the center side in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 by the left shelf 2302 of the front side unit 2300. There is a possibility of winning a prize in the general winning opening 2301 of the front side unit 2300.

  On the other hand, when a game ball is driven to the right side in the front view, that is, the right route 1100R side from the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500, the right outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 and the inner periphery of the game area 1100 Through the narrow gap, enters the attacker passage 2509a opened in the vicinity of the blocking portion 1114 of the front component member 1110A, and is discharged directly above the gate portion 2585a of the second starting port unit 2580. That is, by making a right strike, the game ball can be passed through the gate portion 2585a with a very high probability.

  Although details will be described later, when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a and is detected by the gate sensor 2586, the normal lottery result is drawn and executed in a very short time. If the result is “ordinary hit”, the door member 2589 rotates to allow the game ball to be received into the second start port 2587b, and the game ball that has entered the gate portion 2585a is awarded to the second start port 2587b. be able to. When the normal lottery result is “normal lose”, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2585a flows down the front surface of the door member 2589 that closes the second start port 2587b, and the guidance member 2584 causes the first of the attacker unit 2100. It is discharged to the big prize opening 2102 side. Therefore, the game which aimed directly at the 2nd starting opening 2587b and the 1st big winning opening 2102 can be performed by right-handed.

  Furthermore, when a game ball is won at the first start port 2201 or the second start port 2587b, a special lottery result is drawn, and a special lottery result in which a special advantageous game state in which a player such as a big hit game is advantageous occurs. When the lottery is drawn, the first big prize opening 2102 and the second big prize opening 2509 arranged in the attacker passage 2509a can receive game balls in a predetermined pattern. When the first grand prize opening 2102 and the second big prize opening 2509 can be received, by making a right turn, the game balls are placed in the first grand prize opening 2102 and the second major prize opening 2509 with a very high probability. Can be awarded.

  As described above, in the game board 4 of the present embodiment, the right and left sides of the center accessory 2500 can be played with different impressions, and it is difficult to get bored by providing various games. Can do.

[2-1. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119. 118 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 119 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the rear.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is disposed at the upper right side of the out port 1151 at the substantially lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and is supported by the front surface of the game panel 1150, and substantially in the left-right direction in the game area 1100. A start port unit 2200 which is disposed directly above the out port 1151 in the center and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a front side which is disposed on the left side of the start port unit 2200 and extends in an arc shape along the inner periphery of the game area 1100. A unit 2300, a function display unit 1180 attached to the front center of the front side unit 2300 at a substantially center in the vertical direction, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 which is disposed at a substantially center of the game area 1100 and supported by the game panel 1150, It is equipped with.

  The attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 has a general winning port 2101 that can always accept game balls that have been driven into the game area 1100, and a first large as a variable winning port arranged below the general winning port 2101. And a winning opening 2102. As will be described in detail later, the first big prize opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 receives game balls according to a special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls to the first start port 2201 and the second start port 2587b. It becomes possible.

  The start port unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 includes a first start port 2201 that opens upward and can always receive a game ball, as will be described in detail later. The first start port 2201 is arranged at the approximate center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and immediately below the chance exit 2506d in the stage 2506 of the center accessory 2500, and the game ball released from the chance exit 2506d has a high probability. Can be accepted.

  Further, the front side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 includes three general winning ports 2301 that can always accept game balls, as will be described in detail later. The front side unit 2300 includes a left shelf 2302 that guides the game ball toward the center on the upper surface of the function display bonnet 2307 to which the function display unit 1180 is attached.

  The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000, which will be described in detail later, is attached to a large opening 1158 formed substantially at the center of the game panel 1150, and the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 disposed on the rear side. Etc. are formed in a frame shape having a window portion 2501 that can be viewed from the player side. The center accessory 2500 has a peripheral wall portion 2502 that prevents a game ball from entering the frame, a warp inlet 2503 that opens to a predetermined position on the left outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2502 when viewed from the front, and a warp inlet 2503. A warp passage 2504 through which the game balls circulated, a warp outlet 2505 through which the game balls circulated through the warp passage 2504 can be discharged, and after the game balls released from the warp outlet 2505 have been rolled in the left-right direction, A stage 2506 that discharges and returns to the warp inlet 2503, and a sorting member 2520 that distributes the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2503 to either the warp outlet 2505 side or the outlet 2508 side that discharges it into the game area 1100 Yes.

  The center accessory 2500 has an attacker passage 2509a that is open on the right outer peripheral surface when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall 2502 and through which a game ball can circulate, and a second big prize opening 2509 that is arranged in the attacker passage 2509a and serves as a variable prize opening. , A gate portion 2585a that is disposed immediately below the downstream end of the attacker passage 2509a and that can detect the passage of a game ball, and a second start port 2587b that is disposed directly below the gate portion 2585a and serves as a variable winning opening. The second starting port 2587b of the center accessory 2500 can accept a game ball according to a normal lottery result that is drawn when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a. Further, the second big prize opening 2509 of the center accessory 2500 can accept game balls according to a special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls to the first start port 2201 and the second start port 2587b. .

[2-2. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 132. 120 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 121 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the rear.

  The attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the front unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 formed on the right side of the lower side of the game panel 1150 in the horizontal direction, and then the game panel 1150. It is fixed to the front of the. The attacker unit 2100 includes a general winning port 2101 in which a game ball driven into the game area 1100 can be received, and a first big winning port 2102 disposed below the general winning port 2101. . The first big prize opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long plate-shaped opening / closing member 2104 described later.

  As shown in the figure, the general winning opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward with a width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball, and is in a state where the game ball can be received at all times. The first major winning opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 has a horizontally long rectangular shape that is 4 to 6 times as long as the diameter of the game ball in the front view and is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball in the vertical direction. The opened opening can be opened and closed by a plate-shaped opening / closing member 2104. In the first big prize opening 2102, the opening / closing member 2104 is rotatable about the lower side as a rotation axis. When the opening / closing member 2104 is in a substantially vertical state, the game ball cannot be received. The game ball can be received when it is in a horizontal state, which is a so-called variable prize opening.

  The attacker unit 2100 of this embodiment will be described in further detail. The attacker unit 2100 is attached to the upper part of the horizontally long plate-like base plate 2104a and the base plate 2104a through which the first big prize opening 2102 penetrates while contacting the front surface of the game panel 1150, and constitutes a general winning opening 2101. An attacker base 2104 having a box-shaped receiving portion 2104b protruding forward from the front and opened upward and rearward, and a flange portion 2104c capable of directing a game ball from the lower rear end lower portion of the receiving portion 2104b and guiding the game ball, A horizontally long plate-shaped opening / closing member 2104 capable of closing the first big prize opening 2102 opened in the base plate 2104a of the base 2104 is provided. The flange portion 2103c of the attacker base 2103 can deliver the game ball received in the general winning opening 2101 to a ball discharge unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 described later.

  The opening / closing member 2104 includes a shaft portion 2103a extending outward from the lower portions of the left and right ends, and a working pin 2103b extending rightward from a position obliquely below the shaft portion 2103a at the right end when viewed from the front. . The opening / closing member 2104 can open and close the first big prize opening 2102 by the shaft portion 2103a being rotatably supported by an upper case 2105 and a lower case 2106 described later.

  Further, the attacker unit 2100 includes a pair of upper bearing portions 2105a that can support the shaft portion 2104a of the opening / closing member 2104, a horizontally long box-shaped storage portion upper portion 2105b that corresponds to the first big prize opening 2102 and that is open at the front and lower sides. And an upper passage hole 2105c formed in the rear side of the upper portion 2105b of the attacker base 2103c and immediately below the flange portion 2103c and penetrating in the vertical direction through which a game ball can pass. An upper case 2105 attached to the rear side is provided.

  Further, the attacker unit 2100 is opposed to a pair of lower bearing portions 2106a that rotatably support the shaft portion 2104a of the opening / closing member 2104 in cooperation with the upper bearing portion 2105a of the upper case 2105 and the upper housing portion 2105b of the upper case 2105. A lower box-like storage portion 2106b whose front and upper sides are open, and a lower passage hole 2106c that passes through the upper passage 2105c of the upper case 2105 on the rear side of the lower storage portion 2106b and allows the game ball to pass vertically. And a through-hole 2106d that passes vertically through the bottom wall of the lower housing portion 2106b at a position on the left side in front of the through-hole 2106c and through which a game ball can pass, and is combined with the upper case 2105 from the lower side and an attacker. And a lower case 2106 attached to the rear side of the base plate 2104a in the base 2104. The lower case 2106 is inclined so that the bottom wall of the lower housing portion 2106b becomes lower toward the through hole 2106d.

  By combining the upper case 2105 and the lower case 2106 of the attacker unit 2100, the shaft portion 2104a of the opening / closing member 2104 can be rotatably supported by the bearing upper portion 2105a and the bearing lower portion 2106a. By turning, the first big prize opening 2102 can be opened and closed. The upper case 2105 and the lower case 2106 containment portion upper 2105b and the containment portion lower 2106b can form a space in which a game ball can be accommodated on the rear side of the first big prize opening 2102, and the accommodated game ball penetrates. It can be discharged downward through the hole 2106d. Note that the upper case 2105 and the lower case 2106 are formed of a light-transmitting material.

  Also, the attacker unit 2100 has a plunger 2107a that is sandwiched between the upper case 2105 and the lower case 2106 and can be moved back and forth in the left-right direction. A link member 2108 for rotating the member 2104. The first attacker solenoid 2107 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the upper passage hole 2105c and the lower passage hole 2106c so that the plunger 2107a advances and retreats from the right end.

  The link member 2108 is disposed in the vicinity of the distal end of the plunger 2107a in which the first attacker unit 2107 advances and retreats, and is pivotally supported by the upper case 2105 and the lower case 2106 so as to be rotatable with respect to the axial center extending in the front-rear direction. A shaft 2108a, an engaged portion 2108b that is disposed at a position deviated from the axis of the rotation shaft 2108a, rotates integrally with the rotation shaft 2108a, and engages the tip of the plunger 2107a, and an engaged portion 2108b And a pair of actuating pins 2108c which are disposed at a position deviated from the axis of the rotation shaft 2108a and are integrally rotated with the rotation shaft 2108a and spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The pair of operating pins 2108c of the link member 2108 extends forward, and the action pin 2104b of the opening / closing member 2104 is positioned between the pair of operating pins 2108c in a state where the attacker unit 2100 is assembled.

  Further, the attacker unit 2100 receives a game ball attached to the lower surface of the lower case 2106 and passes through the through hole 2106d, and then releases the passage member 2109 downward from the through hole 2106d and the upper case 2105. A spare sensor 2110 attached on the upper surface directly above the upper passage hole 2105c and capable of detecting a game ball, and a first count for detecting a game ball attached to the through hole 2106d of the lower case 2106 and received in the first big prize opening 2102 Sensor 2111.

  In the present embodiment, game balls are not supplied to the spare sensor 2110 of the attacker unit 2100.

  Furthermore, a transparent substrate cover 2112 attached to the rear surface of the base plate 2103a of the attacker base 2103 so as to straddle the rear side of the attacker unit 2100, the upper case 2105, and the lower case 2106, and attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 2112 A first grand prize opening decoration board 2113 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, a first attacker solenoid 2107 attached to the upper surface of the upper case 2105, a spare sensor 2110, a first count sensor 2111, and a panel relay board 3020. And an attacker unit relay terminal plate 2114 for relaying the connection. The first grand prize opening decoration board 2113 is connected to the lamp driving board 3021 of the back unit 3000.

  The attacker unit 2100 of this example is in a state where the plunger 2107a of the first attacker solenoid 2107 is extended in a normal state. In this state, the action pin 2104b of the opening / closing member 2104 is pushed downward by one operation pin 2108c of the link member 2108, and the plate-like opening / closing member 2104 is in an upright state so that the first big prize opening 2102 is opened. It is in a closed state.

  From this normal state, when the first attacker solenoid 2107 is energized by a big hit game or the like, the plunger 2107a moves to the left in the front view and becomes immersed. When the plunger 2107a moves to the left in the front view, the link member 2108 is engaged with the front end of the plunger 2107a so that the link member 2108 is centered on the axis of the rotation shaft 2108a. It will rotate in the direction of rotation. When the link member 2108 rotates in the clockwise direction, the pair of operating pins 2108c of the link member 2108 revolves in the ascending direction, and the action pins 2104b of the opening / closing member 2104 rise as the operating pins 2108c rise. It will rotate around the shaft 2104a in the direction. As a result, the opening / closing member 2104 rotates so that the upper side thereof moves forward about the shaft portion 2104a, and the game ball can be received in the first big prize opening 2102.

  Also, the attacker unit 2100 can light-decorate the first big prize opening 2102 together with the light-transmitting opening / closing member 2104 by causing the LED provided on the first big prize opening decoration board 2113 to emit light.

[2-3. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127. 124 is a perspective view of the front opening unit of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 125 is a perspective view of the front opening of the front unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the starter unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the starter unit as seen from the rear. As shown in the figure, the start port unit 2200 of this example is arranged right above the out port 1151 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100, and can receive a game ball that is always open upward. A mouth 2201 is provided.

  As shown in the figure, the starter unit 2200 of the present example includes a plate-like starter base 2202 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150, a front starter of the starter base 2202 and a bulge forward and a first start at the upper part. A start port bonnet 2203 in which the port 2201 is disposed, a translucent lens member 2204 attached to the rear side of the start port base 2202, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the lens member 2204. The first starter decorative board 2205, a cylindrical reflector 2206 disposed between the first starter decorative board 2205 and the starter bonnet 2203 and extending in the front-rear direction, and the rear side of the first starter decorative board 2205 And a substrate cover 2207 attached to the rear side of the lens member 2204.

  The start port base 2202 of the start port unit 2200 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface and a plated layer having a metallic luster. In addition, the start port base 2202 penetrates in the front-rear direction at a substantially central position and penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position outside the front view of the start port bonnet 2203 and the lens member 2204 faces. A plurality of openings 2202b.

  The start port bonnet 2203 of the start port unit 2200 is formed in a box shape with the rear side opened, and a predetermined decoration is applied to the front surface. Further, the start port bonnet 2203 is provided with a box-shaped receiving portion 2203a that forms a first start port 2201 and is opened upward and rearward. The start port bonnet 2203 is entirely formed of a material having translucency, and a plating layer having a metallic luster is formed on a portion of the front surface excluding the substantially center below the receiving portion 2203a. Yes.

  The lens member 2204 of the start port unit 2200 is formed with an upper end and a hook portion 2204a for guiding the game ball received in the first start port 2201 to the rear, and an insertion hole 2202a of the start port base 2202 below the hook portion 2204a. And an insertion hole 2204b that penetrates in the front-rear direction so that the reflector 2206 can pass therethrough, and a decorative portion 2204c that bulges forward and faces the player side from the opening 2202b of the start port base 2202. This lens member 2204 can guide the light from the LED provided near the outer periphery of the first starter decoration board 2205 to decorate the opening 2202b of the starter base 2202 and the side surface of the starter bonnet 2203.

  The reflector 2206 of the start port unit 2200 is made of a material having low translucency and is attached to the rear surface of the lens member 2204. The reflector 2206 can prevent light from the LED provided near the center of the first starter decoration board 2205 from leaking outside, and is provided near the outer periphery of the first starter decoration board 2205. The light from the LED can be prevented from leaking inward, and only the front center of the start port bonnet 2203 can be illuminated and decorated.

  When the game ball is received in the receiving portion 2203a of the starting port bonnet 2203 that forms the first starting port 2201, the starting port unit 2200 of the present embodiment moves the flange 2204a in the rear lens member 2204 from the starting port bonnet 2203. To the ball discharge unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 to be described later.

[2-4. Front side unit]
Next, the front side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130. FIG. 128A is a perspective view of the front side unit of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 128B is a perspective view of the front side unit of the front unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the front side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the front side unit as seen from the rear.

  The front side unit 2300 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 on the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1150 and on the lower side from the center in the up-down direction. It is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150 so as to be in contact with (the right side surface in front view of the inner rail 1112). The front side unit 2300 has an outer shape in a front view formed in an arc shape along the inner periphery of the game area 1100.

  The front side unit 2300 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving game balls at all times, and has three general winning holes 2301 arranged in an arc along the inner periphery of the gaming area 1100, and more front than the three general winning holes 2301. A left ledge 2302 on which a game ball tilted so that the right side is arranged to be lower on the left side and the upper side of the view can be rolled, and two general winning holes 2301 close to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 are arranged. A right shelf 2303 on which a game ball inclined so as to be lowered can roll.

  The front side unit 2300 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and is formed in a circular arc shape and has three general winning holes 2301. The front side base 2304 is disposed on the rear side of the front side base 2304. A front side decorative board 2305 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, a board cover 2306 that covers the rear side of the front side decorative board 2305 and is attached to the rear side of the front side base 2304, and a front side of the uppermost general winning opening 2301 And a shallow box-shaped function display bonnet 2307 attached to the front surface of the front side base 2304 on the left side and the upper side as viewed from above. In the front side unit 2300 of this embodiment, a function display board 1191 is attached to the rear side of the function display bonnet 2307.

  The front side base 2304 of the front side unit 2300 protrudes forward, and is arranged slightly below the vertical center and forms one general winning opening 2301. The lower side base 2304 is lower than the upper receiving portion 2304a. The lower receiving part 2304b which is arranged on the side and forms two general winning holes 2301, and the game balls received by the respective general winning holes 2301 are extended rearward from the rear sides of the upper receiving part 2304a and the lower receiving part 2304b. And a collar portion 2304c for guiding to the head. The upper receiving portion 2304a is formed so that one general winning opening 2301 opens upward. The lower receiving portion 2304c is formed so that the general winning opening 2301 on the side close to the upper receiving portion 2304a in the front view is opened obliquely to the upper left, and the general winning opening 2301 on the side farther from the upper receiving portion 2304a is It is formed to open to the right. In addition, the upper surface of the lower receiving portion 2304c is inclined so that the right side is lowered, and is a right shelf portion 2303 capable of guiding the game ball.

  The front side base 2304 includes a fan-shaped frame-shaped bonnet mounting portion 2304d for mounting the function display bonnet 2307 on the left side of the upper receiving portion 2304a when viewed from the front. The front side base 2304 is provided with a predetermined decoration having translucency on the front surface excluding the bonnet mounting portion 2304d.

  The function display bonnet 2307 of the front side unit 2300 is formed in a fan shape having a circular arc along the inner periphery of the game area 1100 in the front view, and the upper surface inclined so that the right side is lowered has a left shelf 2302 Has been. The function display bonnet 2307 includes a plurality of openings 2307a corresponding to the plurality of LEDs mounted on the function display board 1191 on the front surface. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display bonnet 2307 extends rearward so as to surround each opening 2307a, and light from the LED of the function display board 1191 corresponding to one opening 2307a is transmitted to the other. A reflector piece for preventing leakage to the opening 2307a is provided. In the present embodiment, a function display unit 1180 is configured by the function display substrate 1191 and the function display bonnet 2307.

  The front side unit 2300 of the present embodiment has a left side of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100, specifically, a game ball released from the discharge port 2508 and flowing down to the right by the left shelf 2302 and the right shelf 2303. It is possible to guide in the direction (the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100). In addition, the front side unit 2300 sends the game balls received in the three general winning holes 2301 of the front side unit 2300 to the rear side of the game panel 1150 by the respective flange portions 2304c, and the balls of the back unit 3000 described later. It can be delivered to the discharge unit 3400.

[2-5. Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 148. 131 is a front view of the center role of the front unit, FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the center role as seen from the front, and FIG. 133 is a perspective view of the center role as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the center member disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 135 is an exploded perspective view of the center member disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. FIG. 136 is a perspective view of the center member distribution member as seen from the front, and FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the center member as the distribution member from the rear. Further, FIG. 138 is a front sectional view showing the left route in the center object together with a part of the warp passage. FIG. 139 is a perspective view showing a lower warp passage member and a stage member in the center accessory. Further, FIG. 140 (a) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit of the center accessory as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the center actor second attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the center actor as the second attacker unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  FIG. 143 (a) is a perspective view of the second starting port unit of the center accessory as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the second starting port unit of the center accessory as viewed from the rear. FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory second starter unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory as the second starter unit as seen from the rear. FIG. Further, FIG. 146 (a) is a front sectional view showing a right route in the center accessory, and FIG. 146 (b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. FIG. 147 (a) is an enlarged front sectional view showing the main part of the right route when the second starting port of the center accessory is in the open state, and (b) is the second starting port in (a). It is side surface sectional drawing cut | disconnected by this site | part. Further, FIG. 148 is an enlarged front cross-sectional view showing the main part of the right route when the second big prize opening in the center role is open.

  The center accessory 2500 according to the present embodiment is inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 that penetrates the substantial center of the game panel 1150 from the front side, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150. The game area 1100 can be divided into upper and lower parts by attaching to the top. As shown in FIG. 110 and the like, the center accessory 2500 includes a window portion 2501 that is visible from the player side to the rear side, and the window portion 2501 is formed in a frame shape as a whole.

  The center accessory 2500 bulges forward from the game panel 1150 when attached to the game panel 1150 and prevents the game ball from entering the window 2501 and the front of the peripheral wall 2502. A warp inlet 2503 that is open to the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the view and through which a game ball can enter, a warp passage 2504 through which the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2503 can flow, and a game ball that has flowed through the warp passage 2504 can be discharged. Only the warp outlet 2505 opened in the inner peripheral surface 2502 (inside the window part 2501) and the game balls released from the warp outlet 2505 are supplied and arranged at the lower part in the window part 2501, and the supplied game balls are And a stage 2506 for refluxing and discharging into the game area 1100 after rolling.

  A stage 2506 of the center accessory 2500 includes a first stage 2506a in which a warp outlet 2505 is disposed at the left end in a front view and extends in a curved shape in the left-right direction so that a game ball can be discharged forward, and the front side of the first stage 2506a The second stage 2506b is arranged on the lower side and extends in a curved shape in the left-right direction so that the game ball can be released into the front game area 1100, and corresponds to the position directly above the first start port 2201 of the first stage 2506a. The chance entrance 2506c that allows the game ball to enter the opened position, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2506c are discharged into the game area 1100 and directly above the first start port 2201 on the front side and the lower side of the second stage 2506b. A chance exit 2506d opened at a corresponding position.

  The first stage 2506a and the second stage 2506b of the stage 2506 are curved so that the central side in the left-right direction is recessed, and each of them corresponds to the position directly above the first start port 2201, that is, the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1150. In this state, the substantially central position in the left-right direction is formed in a wave shape that is slightly higher than the left and right sides. Further, the lowest part of the first stage 2506a is formed to be outside in the left-right direction with respect to the lowest part of the second stage 2506b.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 139 and the like, the stage 2506 is arranged at a predetermined position of the first stage 2506a and the second stage 2506b, and a plurality of guide portions 2506e inclined so as to become lower toward the front, and the first stage 2506a. And a bank portion 2506f that is disposed at the front end excluding the portion where the guide portion 2506e is disposed in the second stage 2506b and protrudes upward. The guide portion 2506e of the stage 2506 is provided at a position corresponding to the lowest position of the first stage 2506a and the second stage 2506b and a position directly above the first start port 2201 in the second stage 2506b.

  In the center accessory 2500, the upper outer peripheral shape of the peripheral wall portion 2502 extends from the left side of the center in the left-right direction of the front view to the right side to the position corresponding to the stop portion 1114 of the front component member 1110A. It is formed in an arc shape along the inner periphery, and is formed in a shape that is inclined downward to the left after being depressed by a predetermined distance on the left side of the portion formed in the arc shape. . As a result, the game ball that is passed between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 of the front component member 1110A and is driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 passes through the left side of the window 2501 when viewed from the front by the peripheral wall 2502. 1100L and the right route 1100R passing through the right side of the window 2501 when viewed from the front are distributed.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the center accessory 2500 has a part of both left and right ends extending to the inner periphery of the game area 1100, near the inner periphery of the game area 1100 on the left side when viewed from the front of the warp inlet 2503 and on the downstream side. An entrance 2507 opened to the entrance, a game ball that has entered the entrance 2507 into the game area 1100, a release port 2508 opened to a position below a sorting member 2520, which will be described later, and the right side of the window 2501 in front view Then, the game ball is guided from the right end of the arc-shaped portion along the inner periphery of the game area 1100 in the upper part of the peripheral wall portion 2502 to the upstream side of the attacker unit 2100 and the second big prize opening 2509 (FIG. 146 etc. is inserted in the passage). And an attacker passage 2509a in which the reference is disposed. As a result, the game balls that have been thrown into the game area 1100 circulate in the center accessory 2500 regardless of whether the left route 1100L or the right route 1100R is circulated.

  As shown in FIG. 134 and FIG. 135, the center accessory 2500 is attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side and includes a part of the peripheral wall 2502 and forms a rear wall of the warp passage 2504. A center base 2510, a sorting member 2520 mounted in the warp passage 2504 on the front surface of the center base 2510, a left passage cover 2530 that covers the front side of the sorting member 2520 and forms the front wall of the warp passage 2504, and a sorting member A left-passage rear cover 2540 that is attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 and can guide the game ball at a position rearward of 2520, and a warp passage 2504 that is attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 downstream of the sorting member 2520. A lower warp passage member 2550 comprising a part and having a warp outlet 2505; And a stage member 2560 having a stage 2506 is mounted on the lower rear side of the Besu 2510.

  The center accessory 2500 is attached to the rear side of the right side of the center base 2510 when viewed from the front, and the second starter unit is arranged below the second attacker unit 2570 and attached to the lower end of the right side of the center base 2510. The mouth unit 2580, the right passage cover upper part 2600 which is attached to the front right side of the center base 2510 in front view and can cover a part of the second attacker unit 2570, and the center base base are arranged below the right passage cover upper part 2600. Right passage cover lower 2605 which is attached to the front surface of 2510 and can cover a part of each of the second attacker unit 2570 and the second start port unit 2580, and is attached to the rear side of the second attacker unit 2570 and emits light forward. Center right light emitting unit 2610 capable of irradiation, And a branch sensor 2620 attached from the rear side to 2510.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 is attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 on the upper side of the distributing member 2520 and extends in the front-rear direction, and extends to the outer periphery of the reflector 2630 and on the rear side of the center base 2510. A center left decorative board 2632 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, a center left board cover 2634 that covers the rear side of the center left decorative board 2632 and is attached to the rear side of the center base 2510, a center base 2510, and a reflector 2630 And a magnetic detection sensor 2636 capable of detecting magnetism. The center left decorative board 2632 and the center left board cover 2634 are formed with holes through which the rear ends of the reflectors 2630 can be inserted.

  The center accessory 2500 is attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the second attacker unit 2570 when viewed from the front, a center right light emitting decoration unit 2640 capable of light emitting decoration, a center right light emitting decoration unit 2640, and A transparent plate-shaped protective cover 2650 that is attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 and prevents the game ball from entering the rear side through the window 2501 and light toward the left side surface of the protective cover 2650 when viewed from the front. A protective cover left decorative board 2652 mounted with a plurality of possible LEDs and extending in a plate shape in the front and rear direction and the vertical direction, and a board cover that holds the rear end of the protective cover left decorative board 2652 and is attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 2654.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided with an on-center effect unit 2660 that is attached to the upper part of the frame on the front side of the center base 2510, is decorated with a logo in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and is movable according to the gaming state. .

  Next, each member constituting the center accessory 2500 will be described in detail. In the center base 2510 of the center accessory 2500, a peripheral wall portion 2502 that bulges forward from the game panel 1150 is disposed on substantially the entire periphery except for a portion to which the lower stage member 2560 is attached. Further, the center base 2510 is formed in a plate shape with the lower side to which the stage member 2560 is attached along the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a chance outlet 2506d is opened at a position corresponding to the position immediately above the first start port 2201. Yes.

  The center base 2510 of the present embodiment forms a rear wall of the warp passage 2504 from the warp inlet 2503 to the sorting member 2520 and extends in the vertical direction along the left end of the window 2501 when viewed from the front and is recessed backward. A recess 2510a, a plate-like left extension 2510b extending to the left from the left end of the passage recess 2510a, and formed on the lower side of the left extension 2510b and the passage recess 2510a are recessed horizontally and recessed backwards and inside The distribution space recess 2510c to which the distribution member 2520 is attached, the right opening 2510d that opens downward to the right end bottom when viewed from the front in the distribution space recess 2510c and through which a game ball can pass, and the distribution larger than the right opening 2510d The space recess 2510c includes a left opening 2510e that opens rearward at a left position from the center in the left-right direction.

  The center base 2510 includes a shelf 2510f that extends in a plate shape from the upper end of the left extension 2510b to the front and is inclined so that the left end is lowered, and is below the left end of the shelf 2510f and above the distribution space recess 2510c. A passage opening 2510g that penetrates the left extension portion 2510b in the front-rear direction at the position and allows a game ball to pass through, and a guide piece 2510h that extends forward from the lower end of the passage opening 2510g and slopes downward toward the rear, A passage hole 2510i that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position below the shelf 2510f in the left extension 2510b and through which the reflector 2630 can pass is provided.

  Further, the center base 2510 includes a plate-like passage wall 2510j that forms a part of the peripheral wall portion 2502 on the right side of the window portion 2501 as viewed from the front and forms an attacker passage 2509a through which a game ball can flow and extends forward. ing. As shown in detail in FIG. 146 and the like, the center base 2510 guides the game ball flowing down in the right direction when viewed from the front along the arcuate portion of the upper portion of the peripheral wall portion 2502, and is cranked by the passage wall 2510j. A branch entry passage 2510k formed, a branch sensor 2620 that is in communication with the lower end of the branch entry passage 2510k and that is provided immediately below the lower end of the branch entry passage 2510k and formed by a passage wall 2510j, and a branch space 2510l having a predetermined width. A communication passage 2510m, which is formed by a passage wall 2510j and extends in a substantially arc shape and communicates with the lower right corner of the space 2510l, communicates with the lower end of the communication passage 2510m, and the lower end communicates with the inside of the game area 1100. The second big prize opening 2509 is arranged and formed by the passage wall 2510j. And a second attacker space 2510n predetermined size.

  The center base 2510 communicates with the upper part of the second attacker space 2510n and passes through the left side of the second attacker space 2510n when viewed from the front, and the lower end communicates with the inside of the game area 1100 and a game ball formed by the passage wall 2510j circulates. A possible bypass passage 2510o and a guide portion 2510p that forms a part of the inner wall of the second attacker space 2510n and guides a game ball that circulates through the communication passage 2510m and is inclined downward toward the second big prize opening 2509 The right end in front view forms the upper end of the second grand prize opening 2509, the left end forms the inlet end of the bypass passage 2510o, and the right end side is inclined so that the right end is lowered, and the lower side of the inclined portion 2510q An insertion hole 2510r that penetrates in the front-rear direction and a part of the second attacker unit 2570 is inserted from the rear side. Eteiru. The guide portion 2510p of the center base 2510 is formed so that the extended line of the inclined surface passes through the second big prize winning opening 2509.

  Further, the center base 2510 is a plate-like upper extension that extends outward from the rear end of a portion recessed downward from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front in the upper part of the peripheral wall 2502 along the front of the game panel 1150. A center part in which a plurality of (in this example, three) projecting parts 2512 projecting forward from the projecting part 2511, the upper projecting part 2511, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface disposed on the rear side of the upper projecting part 2511 An upper left decorative substrate 2513 and a substrate cover 2514 that covers the rear side of the center upper decorative substrate 2513 and is attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 are provided.

  The distribution member 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is attached in the distribution space recess 2510c of the center base 2510, and the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2503 is placed on either the warp outlet 2505 side or the discharge outlet 2508 side. It is something to distribute. As shown in FIGS. 136 and 137, the distribution member 2520 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is lowered while extending in the left-right direction, and a rolling surface 2521 on which the game ball can roll, and a rolling surface 2521 A fan-shaped discharge part 2522 which is arranged at the lowest part of the fan and spreads in the left-right direction toward the rear and becomes lower, and a ridge part 2523 which is arranged on the rear side and the lower side of the discharge part 2522 and extends in the front-rear direction. A guide surface 2524 that can be extended obliquely downward from both the left and right sides of the ridge portion 2523 to guide the game ball, and a protrusion 2525 that protrudes upward from a portion excluding the discharge portion 2522 at the rear end of the rolling surface 2521 It is equipped with.

  The rolling surface 2521 extending in the left-right direction of the sorting member 2520 is formed so that the position on the right side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front is the lowest. Further, the rolling surface 2521 of the sorting member 2520 is formed such that the right side in the front view has a larger inclination angle from the horizontal than the left side with respect to the lowest part.

  The left passage cover 2530 of the center accessory 2500 is disposed on the front side of the passage recess 2510a of the center base 2510, forms an upper front side of the warp inlet 2503 and the warp passage 2504, and has a translucent upper warp passage cover 2531. A guide passage cover 2532 having a translucency that guides the entrance ball 2507 and the game ball that has entered the entrance port 2507 to the guide piece 2510h of the center base 2510, which is arranged to be separated from the warp passage cover 2531 to the left in front view. A transparent plate-like sorting space cover 2533 that is disposed below the guide passage cover 2532 and the upper warp passage cover 2531 and closes the front side of the sorting space recess 2510c of the center base 2510, and above the sorting space cover 2533 and Located between the upper warp passage cover 2531 and the guide passage cover 2532 And a center left decorative body 2534 having a light-transmitting property with bulging semispherical towards.

  The upper warp passage cover 2531 of the left passage cover 2530 is formed in a box shape whose upper side, lower side, and rear side are opened and extends in the vertical direction, and by cooperating with the passage concave portion 2510a of the center base 2510, The game balls that have entered the warp inlet 2503 can flow down in a zigzag shape in the front-rear direction. The guide passage cover 2532 is formed in a box shape with the upper side, the lower side, and the rear side opened and extended in the vertical direction, and the rear side is closed by the left extending portion 2510b of the center base 2510. A guide passage 2532a for guiding the game ball can be formed.

  The center left decorative body 2534 of the left passage cover 2530 has a transparent hemispherical front side formed as a smooth surface, and a rear side formed as a plurality of triangular surfaces having different sizes and shapes. . As a result, the thickness of the hemispherical portion becomes non-uniform, and a lens is formed for each triangular portion, and the transmitted light can be refracted. The center left decorative body 2534 has a relief-like decoration with metallic luster on the outer periphery of the hemispherical front surface. This center left decorative body 2534 is disposed in front of the passage hole 2510i of the center base 2510, and is movable to the back left of the back left effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 disposed on the rear side through the inside of the reflector 2630. Light emission decoration is possible by the light from the decoration body unit 3610.

  The left passage rear cover 2540 of the center accessory 2500 is formed in a box shape with the front side opened, and can cover the left opening 2510e and the rear side of the passage opening 2510g in the center base 2510. The left passage cover 2540 is guided by the guide piece 2510h of the center base 2510 so that the game ball guided to the rear side of the center base 2510 through the passage port 2510g is a left opening portion diagonally lower right when viewed from the front. A guide wall 2541 that guides to the height of a substantially lower side of 2510e, and a discharge slope 2542 that guides the game ball guided by the guide wall 2541 forward and gently slopes.

  The discharge slope 2542 of the left passage rear cover 2540 extends from the rear side to the lower side of the left opening 2510e in the center base 2510, and the game ball guided to the discharge slope 2542 by the guide wall 2541 is inclined to the discharge slope 2542. Then, it rolls forward and is discharged from the discharge port 2508 into the game area 1100 through the left opening 2510e.

  The lower warp passage member 2550 of the center accessory 2500 is formed in a rectangular tube shape having translucency and extending in the vertical direction. As shown in FIG. 139, an opening 2551 through which a game ball can pass is formed in the upper portion. While being formed, a warp outlet 2505 is opened in the lower part of the right side surface when viewed from the front. The opening 2551 of the lower warp passage member 2550 coincides with the right opening 2510d of the center base 2510 in the assembled state, and a game ball passing through the right opening 2510d can flow through the lower warp passage member 2550.

  The stage member 2560 of the center accessory 2500 includes a transparent stage main body 2561 having a first stage 2506a and a second stage 2506b, a transparent stage back cover 2562 covering the rear side and the lower side of the stage main body 2561, and a stage back A stage decoration board 2563 is provided between the cover 2562 and the stage main body 2561, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

  The stage body 2561 of the stage member 2560 includes a rear wall portion 2561a that extends upward in a plate shape from the rear end excluding the chance entrance 2506c in the first stage 2506a. The game ball supplied to the stage 2506 by the rear wall portion 2561a of the stage main body 2561 can be prevented from dropping out to the rear side of the stage 2506. Although the detailed illustration of the stage main body 2561 is omitted, a cross section is provided on the back side of the first stage 2506a, the second stage 2506b, and the part extending in the vertical direction between the first stage 2506a and the second stage 2506b. A plurality of lens portions 2561b that are semicircular and extend in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction are provided. These lens portions 2561b can make it difficult to visually recognize the lower side of the stage 2506, and the entire stage 2506 can be decorated with light emitted from the LED of the stage decoration substrate 2563.

  The stage back cover 2562 of the stage member 2560 includes a chance passage 2562a that connects the chance inlet 2506c and the chance outlet 2506d, and a return portion 2562b that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rear wall portion 2561a of the stage main body 2561. Yes. Further, the stage decoration substrate 2563 of the stage member 2560 is disposed on the rear side of the stage 2506 and below the first stage 2506a, although detailed illustration is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 140 to 142, the second attacker unit 2570 of the center accessory 2500 extends in the front-rear direction to a unit base 2571 attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 and a predetermined position at the lower front of the unit base 2571. A second opening / closing member 2572 rotatably supported around the axis, a transparent front cover 2573 disposed on the front side of the unit base 2571 and disposed on the front side of the second opening / closing member 2572, and a unit base 2571. A second attacker solenoid 2574 having a plunger 2574a disposed on the rear side and capable of moving forward and backward, and attached to the tip of the plunger 2574a of the second attacker solenoid 2574 and transmitting the advance and retreat of the plunger 2574a to rotate the second opening / closing member 2572 A link member 2575

  The second attacker unit 2570 accommodates and supports the second attacker solenoid 2574 from the rear side and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2571, and the front surface of the second attacker solenoid 2574 attached to the front side of the solenoid base 2576. A solenoid cover 2577 that covers the unit base, a second count sensor 2578 that is attached to the unit base 2571 from the rear side and that can detect a game ball received in the second big prize opening 2509, and a unit base that is detected by the second count sensor 2578 And a passage cover 2579 attached to the rear side of the unit base 2571 for guiding the game ball guided to the rear side of the 2571 downward.

  The unit base 2571 of the second attacker unit 2570 has a crescent shape with the lower end widened in a front view, and is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side open. The unit base 2571 protrudes slightly forward from the lower front surface and has a plate-like insertion surface 2571a whose outer shape corresponds to the insertion hole 2510r of the center base 2510, and penetrates in the front-rear direction substantially at the center of the insertion surface 2571a. A shaft hole 2571b that rotatably supports the member 2572, an opening 2571c that penetrates in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the shaft hole 2571b and into which an action pin 2572c of the second opening / closing member 2572 described later is inserted, and a shaft hole 2571b Of the left side when viewed from the front in a rectangular shape penetrating in the front-rear direction and passing through the opening 2571d through which the game ball received by the second big prize opening 2509 can pass and the outer periphery excluding the upper side of the passage opening 2571d. The receiving portion 2571e and the guide portion that extends from the left and right upper ends of the receiving portion 2571e to the left and right outwards and is inclined so as to become lower toward the inside of the receiving portion 2571e. 571f, a sensor holding portion 2571g that is formed on the left and right side surfaces facing the receiving portion 2571e below the guide portion 2571f and holds the second count sensor 2578, and extends upward from the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2571e as it goes rearward. And a triangular guide piece 2571h inclined so as to be lowered.

  The unit base 2571 is formed on a lower right protrusion 2571i that protrudes forward from the lower right position in front of the shaft hole 2571b, a lower right protrusion 2571i, and a guide part 2571f on the right in front view. A pair of stopper portions 2571j for restricting the rotation range of 2572, and plate-like ribs 2571k extending from the lower end of the lower right protruding portion 2571i to the substantially center and the lower end of the right side surface of the receiving portion 2571e, respectively. . The front ends of the lower right protruding portion 2571i, the stopper portion 2571j, and the rib 2571k protrude forward to the same position as the front end of the receiving portion 2571e. A front cover 2573 is attached so as to cover the front side of the receiving portion 2571e, the guiding portion 2571f, the lower right protruding portion 2571i, and the rib 2571k.

  Further, the unit base 2571 is provided with a ball passage 2571l that extends rearward from the rear surface and guides the game ball opened rearward and passing through the passage opening 2571d in the right direction when viewed from the front. A passage cover 2579 is attached to the rear end of the ball passage 2571 l so that an opening through which a game ball can pass is formed at the right end of the rear end in front view.

  When the second attacker unit 2570 is attached to the center base 2510, the insertion surface 2571a of the unit base 2571 protrudes forward so that the front surface thereof substantially coincides with the rear surface of the second attacker space 2510n. In addition, the right end of the guide portion 2571f on the right side when viewed from the front in the unit base 2571 forms the lower end of the second big prize opening 2509. Further, stopper portions 2571j formed on the right guiding portion 2571f and the lower right protruding portion 2571i are arranged so as to face each other along an arc centering on the axis of the shaft hole 2571b. It is spaced apart at an angle of about 90 degrees around the axis of 2571b. When the stopper piece 2572c of the second opening / closing member 2572 is in contact with the pair of stopper portions 2571j, the rotation range of the second opening / closing member 2572 can be restricted, and the second opening / closing member 2572 can be set to the open position and the closed position. Can be positioned.

  The second opening / closing member 2572 of the second attacker unit 2570 has a droplet-like blade portion 2572a that opens and closes the second big prize opening 2509, and extends backward from the base end of the blade portion 2572a into the shaft hole 2571b of the unit base 2571. The shaft portion 2572b to be inserted and supported, the working pin 2572c extending from the rear side of the blade portion 2572a at the eccentric position of the shaft portion 2572b, and the tip of the blade portion 2572a from the base of the blade portion 2572a are the shaft. And a stopper piece 2572d extending to the opposite side across the portion 2572b.

  The second opening / closing member 2572 rotates from the front side of the unit base 2571 by inserting the shaft portion 2572b into the shaft hole 2572b of the unit base 2571 so that the action pin 2572c penetrates the opening portion 2571c of the unit base 2571. The stopper piece 2572d is positioned between the pair of stopper portions 2571j in the unit base 2571, and the stopper piece 2572d that rotates together with the blade portion 2572a abuts against the stopper portion 2571j. Can be rotated only within.

  The second opening / closing member 2572 is slidably inserted into the slit 2575c of the link member 2575 at the rear end of the action pin 2572c. Accordingly, when the link member 2572 is moved back and forth in the left-right direction by the plunger 2574a of the second attacker solenoid 2574, the rear end of the action pin 2572c slides in the vertical direction in the slit 2575c of the link member 2575, and the second opening / closing member 2572 It rotates around the shaft portion 2572b.

  The second opening / closing member 2572 is positioned between the pair of stopper portions 2571j in the unit base 2571 in a state where the stopper piece 2572d is assembled, and the blade portion 2572a rises substantially vertically so that the second big prize opening 2509 is formed. When in the closed state, the stopper piece 2572d comes into contact with the stopper portion 2571j of the lower right protruding portion 2571i, and the tip of the blade portion 2572a moves to the right in the front view to open the second big prize opening 2509. The rotation range of the second opening / closing member 2572 is restricted by the 2572d coming into contact with the lower stopper portion 2571j of the right guide portion 2571f.

  The second attacker solenoid 2574 of the second attacker unit 2570 is disposed so that the plunger 2574a extends in the right direction when viewed from the front. Further, the link member 2575 of the second attacker unit 2570 has a plunger attachment portion 2575a attached to the tip of the plunger 2574a in the second attacker solenoid 2574, and a plate shape extending rightward in a front view from the front end of the plunger attachment portion 2575a. The extending piece 2575b and the slit 2575c which penetrates the extending piece 2575b in the front-back direction and extends in the up-down direction and into which the action pin 2572c of the second opening / closing member 2572 is slidably inserted are provided.

  The solenoid base 2576 of the second attacker unit 2570 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, accommodates the second attacker solenoid 2574, and can slide the link member 2575 in the left-right direction in cooperation with the solenoid cover 2577. Hold on.

  The second attacker unit 2570 of the present embodiment is attached to the center base 2510, so that a second big prize opening 2509 is formed by the inclined portion 2510q of the center base 2510 and the guide portion 2571f of the unit base 2571. The game ball received in the second big prize opening 2509 is guided into the receiving portion 2571e by the guiding portion 2571f of the unit base 2571, detected by the second count sensor 2578, and then guided backward by the guiding piece 2571h. . The game ball guided rearward by the guide piece 2571h enters the rear ball passage 2571l through the passage opening 2571d of the unit base 2571, and is discharged rearward from the right end in front view of the ball passage 2571l.

  Further, in the normal state, the second attacker unit 2570 is in a state in which the plunger 2574a of the second attacker solenoid 2574 is advanced to the right side as viewed from the front by the biasing force of a spring (not shown). The blade part 2572a of the second opening / closing member 2572 is in a state of rising substantially vertically through the. As a result, the second big prize opening 2509 is closed by the second opening / closing member 2572. On the other hand, when the second attacker solenoid 2574 is energized by a big hit game or the like, the plunger 2574a is retracted into the second attacker solenoid 2574, and the second opening / closing member 2572 is rotated in the clockwise direction through the link member 2575. To do. As a result, the second big prize opening 2509 is opened.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 to 145, the second starter unit 2580 of the center accessory 2500 is attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 below the second attacker unit 2570 and penetrates in the front-rear direction substantially in the center in the left-right direction. A unit base plate 2581 having an opening 2581a extending in the vertical direction, an inverted triangular lower right front cover 2582 attached to the left front surface from the approximate center of the unit base plate 2581, and a lower right front cover 2582 A normal symbol display board 1191a which is arranged on the rear side and mounted with a normal symbol display 1189 made of LEDs on the front surface, and a board which holds the normal symbol display board 1191a from the rear side and is attached to the rear side of the lower right front cover 2582 The opening 2 on the front surface of the unit base plate 2581 on the left side of the holder 2583 and the lower right front cover 2582 when viewed from the front. 81a and a guide member 2584 attached to the bottom of.

  Further, the second start port unit 2580 is attached to the rear side of the unit base plate 2581, and protrudes forward through the opening 2581a of the unit base plate 2581, and has a gate portion 2585a and a barrier portion 2585b that are arranged vertically. 2585, a gate sensor 2586 that is attached to the gate portion 2585a of the gate member 2585 and detects the passing of the game ball, and a game ball that is attached to the rear side of the gate member 2585 and guided backward through the gate portion 2582a. A guide passage 2587a that guides to the second passage, a second start port 2587b that opens below the guide passage 2587a, and a discharge passage 2587c through which game balls that pass through the second start port 2587b circulate. A box-shaped passage member 2587 is attached to the right end of the passage member 2587 when viewed from the front and is connected to the gate. And a plate-shaped channel lid 2588 attached to the rear side of the member 2585.

  Further, the second start port unit 2580 is attached to the rear side of the guide passage 2587a in the passage member 2587, and a door member 2589 that is rotatably supported by the passage member 2587 and the passage lid 2588 and opens and closes the second start port 2587b. A start port solenoid 2590 having a plunger 2590a that can be advanced and retracted in the vertical direction, a first link member 2591 that moves in the vertical direction as the plunger 2590a of the start port solenoid 2590 advances and retreats, and a vertical direction of the first link member 2591 A second link member 2592 that transmits the movement of the door member 2589 and rotates the door member 2589, and a second ball that is supported on the rear side of the second start port 2587b of the passage member 2587 and that passes through the second start port 2587b. The second link member 2592 is attached to the right side of the front view of the start port sensor 2593 and the passage lid 2588. And a link cover 2594 which covers.

  Further, the second start port unit 2580 is disposed behind the passage member 2587 and the passage cover 2588 and has a second start port decoration board 2595 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a rear side of the second start port decoration board 2595. A first substrate cover 2596 that covers the side and is attached to the rear side of the unit base plate 2581; and an inverted L-shaped front lower right decorative substrate 2597 that is disposed on the rear side of the unit base plate 2581 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon. And a reflector 2598 disposed between the lower right decorative board 2597 and the unit base plate 2581, and a second board cover 2599 that covers the rear side of the lower right decorative board 2597 and is attached to the rear side of the unit base board 2581. And.

  The unit base plate 2581 of the second starting port unit 2580 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the lower right front cover 2582 on the right side of the opening 2581a in front view. A mouth 2581b is provided. Further, the unit base plate 2581 is decorated on the front surface on the left side of the front view from the portion where the lower right front cover 2582 is attached.

  The lower right front cover 2582 of the second starter unit 2580 corresponds to the inclined surface 2582a that forms the bottom of the second attacker space 2510n on the upper surface and is inclined so that the left side in the front view is lowered, and the gate portion 2585a of the gate member 2585. A display hole 2582b penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position where the normal symbol display 1189a of the normal symbol display board 1191a faces forward, and a through-hole 2582c extending in an arc shape along the right side in front view and penetrating in the front-rear direction. And a plate-shaped partitioning piece 2582d that partitions the inside of the through-hole 2582c into a plurality of parts in the vertical direction.

  The guiding member 2584 of the second starting port unit 2580 is formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front, and can guide the game ball that has not been received by the second starting port 2587b to the left when viewed from the front.

  The gate member 2585 of the second start-up unit 2580 is disposed below the gate portion 2585a and a gate portion 2585a that passes through the opening portion 2581a of the unit base plate 2581 and protrudes forward to receive a game ball and guide it backward. A barrier portion 2585b that penetrates the opening portion 2581a and projects forward in a frame shape, a through-hole 2585c that extends from the lower end of the gate portion 2585a to the lower side of the barrier portion 2585b and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the left and right sides of the through-hole 2585c A holding member 2585 d that extends rearward from both sides and holds the passage member 2587 and the passage lid 2588 is provided. Further, the gate member 2585 includes a sensor holding portion 2585e that holds the gate sensor 2586 from the rear side above the gate portion 2585a. The gate member 2585 is formed of a transparent material, and the inside of the gate portion 2585a and the second start port 2587b can be visually recognized from the player side.

  The passage member 2587 of the second starter unit 2580 includes a guide passage 2587a that guides the game ball guided backward by the gate portion 2585a of the gate member 2585 and bulges backward in an arc shape, and a lower part of the guide passage 2587a. A second starting port 2587b that is open in the front-rear direction on the side and through which the game ball can pass, a discharge passage 2587c that guides the game ball that has passed through the second starting port 2587b to the rear and then discharges it downward; A sensor holding unit 2587d for holding a second start port sensor 2593 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the start port 2587b and a solenoid holding unit 2587e for holding a start port solenoid 2590 are provided. The passage member 2587 can hold the start port solenoid 2590 by the solenoid holding portion 2587e so that the plunger 2590a advances and retreats downward from the lower surface.

  The passage lid 2588 of the second starter unit 2580 has a first opening 2588a and a first opening 2588a through which the extending portion 2591b of the first link member 2591 and the rear end of the second link member 2592 are inserted in the left-right direction. And a second opening 2588b through which the extended piece 2589b of the door member 2589 is inserted.

  The door member 2589 of the second start port unit 2580 includes a door portion 2589a that can close the second start port 2587b from the front side, an extended piece 2589b that extends rearward from the lower end of the door portion 2589a and the right end in front view, and And a transmission pin 2589c protruding rightward from the rear end of the output piece 2589b. The door member 2589 is supported so that the left and right sides of the lower end of the door portion 2589a can turn about the axis extending in the left-right direction by the passage member 2587 and the passage lid 2588 at a position below the front end of the second start port 2587a. . Further, the extended piece 2589 b of the door member 2589 extends through the second opening 2588 b of the passage lid 2588, and the rear end extends to the right side of the passage lid 2588 when viewed from the front. Further, the transmission pin 2589c is slidably inserted into the transmission slit 2592d of the second link member 2592.

  The first link member 2591 of the second start port unit 2580 includes a plunger mounting portion 2591a to which the tip of the plunger 2590a of the start port solenoid 2590 is attached and supported so as to be movable in the vertical direction by the passage lid 2588, and the plunger mounting portion 2591a. An extension portion 2591b extending downward from the right end in front view and a link pin 2591c protruding rightward in front view from the lower end of the extension portion 2591b are provided. The lower end of the extending portion 2591 b of the first link member 2591 extends through the first opening 2588 a of the passage lid 2588 to the right side of the passage lid 2588 when viewed from the front. The link pin 2591c is slidably inserted into the link slit 2592c of the second link member 2592.

  The second link member 2592 of the second starter unit 2580 has a main body 2592a extending in the front-rear direction in a strip shape and a rear side of the extending portion 2591b of the first link member 2591 formed at the rear end of the main body 2592a. A shaft portion 2592b that is pivotally supported by a passage member 2587 and a passage lid 2588 in the left-right direction at a position, and is formed at a position near the front end from the shaft portion 2592b and penetrates the main body 2592a and A long slit extending in the longitudinal direction and a link slit 2592c into which the link pin 2591c of the first link member 2591 is slidably inserted. A transmission slit 25 in which the transmission pin 2589c of the door member 2589 is slidably inserted in an elongated hole shape. Is provided with a 2d, a.

  The front lower right decorative board 2597 of the second start port unit 2580 is arranged such that a plurality of LEDs are positioned at a position corresponding to the through hole 2581b of the unit base plate 2581 and a position above the upper end of the unit base plate 2581. It is formed in an inverted L shape. Thereby, the inside of the through-hole 2582c of the lower right front cover 2582 and the upper side of the inclined surface 2582a can be decorated with light emission.

  In the normal state, the second starter unit 2580 of the present embodiment is such that the plunger 2590a of the starter solenoid 2590 protrudes downward, and the door portion 2589a of the door member 2589 rises substantially vertically. The second starting port 2587b is closed by the member 2589 (see FIG. 146). In a normal state, a game ball that has entered the gate portion 2585a of the gate member 2585 from above is detected by the gate sensor 2586 and then sent from the gate portion 2585a to the guide passage 2587a of the rear passage member 2587. By the guide passage 2587a, it is sent to the lower barrier portion 2585b of the front gate portion 2585a. Then, it passes through the frame of the barrier portion 2585b and passes through the front side of the second start port 2587b closed by the door member 2589, is sent to the guide member 2584, and is guided to the left in the front view by the guide member 2584 to be played. Released into 1100.

  When the start port solenoid 2590 is energized from the normal state, the second start port unit 2580 rises so that the plunger 2590a is immersed in the start port solenoid 2590, and the first link member 2591 also rises together with the plunger 2590a. When the first link member 2591 is raised, the link pin 2591c of the first link member 2591 slides in the link slit 2592c of the second link member 2592, and at the same time, the second link member 2592 is moved via the link slit 2592c. It rotates in the direction in which the tip rises around the shaft portion 2592b at the rear end. When the distal end of the second link member 2592 is rotated in the upward direction, the transmission pin 2589c of the door member 2589 slides in the transmission slit 2592d at the distal end of the second link member 2592, and at the same time, the transmission pin 2589c rises. The door member 2589 rotates. As a result, the upper end of the door portion 2589a of the door member 2589 rotates in the direction of moving forward, and the second start port 2587b closed by the door portion 2589a is opened, and the second start port 2587a. Can be received (see FIG. 147).

  The right passage cover upper 2600 of the center accessory 2500 is a transparent plate, and the front is decorated. This upper right passage cover 2600 closes the front surface of the attacker passage 2509a above the second attacker space 2510n and the front surface of the bypass passage 2510o. Further, the lower right passage cover 2605 of the center accessory 2500 has a transparent plate shape and is decorated on the front surface. The lower right passage cover 2605 closes the front surface of the second attacker space 2510n of the attacker passage 2509a and covers the front surface of the lower right front cover 2582 in the second start port unit 2580.

  The center right light emitting unit 2610 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged on the rear side of the second attacker unit 2570 at a position corresponding to the rear of the upper right passage cover 2600 and has a front upper right decorative board 2611 mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. The front right middle decorative board 2612, which is arranged along the lower end of the second attacker unit 2570 on the rear side of the second attacker unit 2570 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon, and the rear side of the front right upper decorative board 2611 are covered. Upper right board cover 2613, right middle board cover 2614 attached to the lower rear side of upper right board cover 2613 and covering the rear side of front right middle decorative board 2612, and front relay board 2615 arranged on the rear side of upper right board cover 2613 And a board cover 2616 that covers the rear side of the front relay board 2615 and is attached to the rear side of the upper right board cover 2613. Eteiru.

  The center right light emitting decoration unit 2640 of the center accessory 2500 has a center right decorative body 2641 that is three-dimensionally imitating a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and has a translucent center right decorative body 2641. The center right decorative board 2642, which is arranged on the side and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face, is arranged on the rear side of the center right decorative board 2642, and supports the center right decorative body 2641 from the rear side, and on the rear side of the center base 2510. A board cover 2643 to be attached, a protective cover right decorative board 2644 mounted on the rear side of the board cover 2643 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the right side of the protective cover 2650 when viewed from the front, and the protective cover right A substrate support member 2645 that supports the decorative substrate 2644 and is attached to the rear side of the substrate cover 2643. That.

  The center effect unit 2660 of the center accessory 2500 includes a center upper drive unit 2670 attached to the center base 2510, and a center upper movable decorative body unit 2690 which is disposed on the front side of the center upper drive unit 2670 and is moved up and down by the center upper drive unit 2670. And an upper center decorative body 2700 attached to the front surface of the upper center drive unit 2670 on the upper side of the upper center movable decorative body unit 2690.

  Although a detailed illustration is omitted, the center upper drive unit 2670 of the center upper effect unit 2660 is attached to the front side of the center base 2510, extends in the left-right direction, and has a shallow box-shaped unit base 2671 that is open to the front. A front drive motor 2672 attached to the rear side of the base 2671 and having a rotary shaft extending forward through the unit base 2671, a drive gear fixed to the rotary shaft of the front drive motor 2672, and the drive gear meshing And a driven gear having a detection piece that is rotatably supported by the unit base and extends backward in the form of a plate, and meshed with the driven gear and rotatably supported by the unit base, and at a position eccentric from the center of rotation. And a working gear having a working pin protruding forward.

  The upper center drive unit 2670 is supported by a unit base so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction by being disposed at a position separated from the working slit, and the unit base. The first shaft portion, the first collar portion extending long from the first shaft portion to a position farther from the action slit, the first transmission formed along the line passing through the rotation center formed at the tip of the first collar portion The slit and the first shaft portion are formed on the opposite side to the direction in which the first collar portion extends, and are arranged in an arc shape along the circumference of a shorter radius than the first shaft portion to the working slit. A first link member having one gear portion, a second gear portion meshing with the first gear portion of the first link member and arranged in an arc along the circumference of the same radius as the first gear portion, The unit base is located at the center of the two gears. A second shaft portion that is rotatably supported, a second collar portion that extends from the second shaft portion in the opposite direction to the second gear portion to the same length as the first collar portion of the first link member, and And a second link member having a second transmission slit formed along the line passing through the center of rotation. The first link member and the second link member are arranged in the left-right direction, and the first and second flange portions extend outward in the left-right direction with respect to the first shaft portion and the second shaft portion. ing.

  Further, the center upper drive unit 2670 is attached to the front side of the unit base 2671 and covers a front side of the drive gear, driven gear, working gear, first link member, and second link member, and unit cover and unit base. The upper and lower ends of the unit base 2671 are supported at positions near the left and right ends of the unit base 2671 by the 2671, and the motor base is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2671 and the front drive motor 2672 is attached to the rear surface. And an elevating position detection sensor for detecting the elevating position of the movable movable body 2690 on the center by detecting a detection piece of the driven gear attached to the unit base 2671, and an upper decorative body between the unit base 2671 and the unit cover. Before being placed at a position corresponding to 2700 A plurality of LED is a center on the decorative body decoration board mounted on. The unit cover is provided with notches that extend downward in the vertical direction and open at positions closer to the center side from the lifting shafts at the left and right ends.

  Further, although the detailed illustration is omitted, the center movable decorative unit 2690 of the center directing unit 2660 is formed with a logo decorative body 2691 having a predetermined logo formed in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and having translucency. A transparent unit disposed behind the logo decorative body 2691 and having translucency; a movable on-center decorative body disposed on the rear side of the transparent unit and mounted with a plurality of LEDs; and movable on the center A back cover that covers the rear side of the decorative body decorative board and is attached to the rear side of the logo decorative body 2691; a first transmission slit and a second transmission slit of the first link member in the center upper drive unit 2670 that protrude rearward from the rear side of the back cover; A pair of transmission pins that are slidably inserted into the second transmission slit of the link member, and the back cover at a position on the outer side in the left-right direction with respect to the pair of transmission pins. And a pair of lift slider that is vertically movable supported by the lift shaft through the cutout portion of the unit cover in the center on the drive unit 2670 respectively attached to the side.

  The transmission unit of the center movable decorative body unit 2690 includes a front diffusion sheet disposed on the rear side of the logo decorative body 2691 and having translucency, and a frame shape that is disposed on the rear side of the diffusion sheet and follows the logo characters. Corresponding to the formed front reflector, a colored color filter having an opening corresponding to the logo character disposed behind the front reflector and having translucency, and corresponding to the logo character disposed behind the color filter And a rear reflector formed on the rear side of the rear diffusion sheet and formed in a shape along the logo characters.

  The center movable ornament body unit 2690 can be slid (lifted) in the vertical direction by the lift slider being supported by the lift shaft of the center drive unit 2670.

  Furthermore, the center upper decorative body 2700 of the center upper effect unit 2660 includes a container-shaped decorative body main body with a predetermined decoration on the front surface and an open rear side, and a center upper decorative body decoration disposed on the rear side of the decorative body main body. A diffusing member for diffusing light from the substrate, a frame-like reflector disposed on the rear side of the diffusing member, and a translucent decorative member attached to the front side of the decorative body main body are provided.

  In the center effect unit 2660 of the present embodiment, when the front drive motor 2672 is rotationally driven, the action gear rotates via the drive gear and the driven gear, and the action pin of the action gear revolves at a predetermined radius. Then, when the action pin revolves, the action pin slides in the action slit of the first link member, and the first link member rotates in a predetermined direction around the first shaft portion with the sliding. . By rotating the first link member, the second link member is engaged with the first link member around the second shaft portion by the second gear of the second link member meshed with the first gear portion of the first link member. Will rotate in the opposite direction. Accordingly, the tips of the first and second collar members of the first link member and the second link member rotate in the vertical direction while maintaining the same height, and the first and second collar members The transmission pin of the center movable decorative body 2690 slides in the first transmission slit and the second transmission slit provided at the tip of the second collar portion, and at the same time, the center movable decorative body moves in the vertical direction. At this time, since the pair of lift sliders of the center movable ornament 2690 is slidably supported by the lift shaft of the center drive unit, the center movable ornament can be smoothly raised and lowered.

  Next, the flow of game balls in the center accessory 2500 will be described. First, on the left side of the window 2501 in the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. 138, when the game ball flowing down to the left route 1100L enters the warp inlet 2503 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall 2502, The warp passage 2504 formed by the center base 2510 and the left passage cover 2530 circulates. More specifically, a game ball that is driven into the game area 1100 and enters the warp inlet 2503 is first zigzag in the front-rear direction by the passage recess 2510a of the center base 2510 and the upper warp passage cover 2531 of the left passage cover 2530. It is guided downward while rolling. The game ball guided by the zigzag can be visually recognized from the player side through the upper warp passage cover 2531. Further, by guiding the game ball in a zigzag manner, it is possible to suppress an increase in the flow speed of the game ball.

  The game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2503 and is guided by the passage recess 2510a and the upper warp passage cover 2531 is supplied to the right end of the rolling surface 2521 in the sorting member 2520 disposed in the sorting space recess 2510c. . Then, the game ball supplied to the left end of the rolling surface 2521 of the sorting member 2520 rolls to the left in the front view along the inclination of the rolling surface 2521, and passes through the lowest discharge portion 2522. Then, it rolls to the left of the discharge part 2522. As shown in the drawing, the left side of the discharge surface 2521 on the rolling surface 2521 is inclined so that the left end side becomes higher, so that the game ball climbs the slope, the rolling speed is attenuated, and the speed becomes zero. Then, rolling starts in the right direction according to the inclination of the rolling surface 2521.

  The rolling surface 2521 has an inclination angle on the right side that is larger than that on the left side relative to the discharge portion 2522, so that it is difficult for a game ball that rolls from the left side to the right direction to climb the right slope and Therefore, it is discharged to the left guide surface 2524 on the left side of the ridge 2523 with high probability, and is distributed to the left side (warp outlet 2505 side) when viewed from the front by the ridge 2523. The game balls distributed and guided to the left guide surface 2524 with respect to the ridge portion 2523 enter the opening 2551 of the lower warp passage member 2550 through the right opening portion 2510d of the center base 2510, and the lower warp passage member. 2550 is supplied from the warp outlet 2505 to the stage 2506 (first stage 2506a).

  In this stage 2506, since the warp outlet 2505 is arranged at the left end of the first stage 2506a when viewed from the front, the game ball supplied from the warp outlet 2505 to the left end of the first stage 2506a moves the first stage 2506a rightward. The first stage 2506a rolls in the left-right direction while rolling is started and the momentum of the game ball is rolling. Then, the game ball rolling on the first stage 2506a is discharged forward from the guide portion 2506e and supplied to the second stage 2506b on the front side and the lower side of the first stage 2506a. Even in the second stage 2506b, the second stage 2506b rolls in the left-right direction while the game ball has a rolling momentum, and is released from the guide portion 2506e into the front game area 1100.

  By the way, a chance entrance 2506c is opened substantially at the center of the first stage 2506a, and when a game ball rolling on the first stage 2506a enters the chance entrance 2506c, a chance exit below the second stage 2506b. It is discharged from 2506d into the gaming area 1100. As shown in FIG. 110 and the like, the chance exit 2506d is located immediately above the first start opening 2201, and the game ball released from the chance exit 2506d is accepted into the first start opening 2201 with a high probability.

  On the other hand, when the game balls released backward from the discharge portion 2522 of the sorting member 2520 are distributed to the left side of the ridge portion 2523 when viewed from the front, the game ball is guided by the left guide surface 2524 of the ridge portion 2523 and left cover A 2540 discharge slope 2542 is supplied. Then, the game ball supplied to the discharge slope 2542 rolls forward along the inclination, and is discharged into the game area 1100 from the discharge port 2508 at the lower end of the left extension 2510b through the left opening 2510e of the center base 2510. The Therefore, when the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2503 is distributed to the left side, that is, the discharge port 2508 side by the ridge portion 2523 of the distribution member 2520, it is returned to the game area 1100 without being supplied to the stage 2506 and left route 1100L. Will flow down again.

  A game ball that has flowed down from the upper part of the game area 1100 to the left route 1100L and did not enter the warp inlet 2503 opened in the peripheral wall 2502 of the center accessory 2500 is formed on the lower left side of the warp inlet 2503. By the shelf portion 2510f of the center base 2510 thus made, it is guided leftward in a front view, and enters an entrance 2507 opened near the inner periphery of the game area 1100. Then, the game ball that has entered the entrance 2507 is guided onto the guide piece 2510 h that forms a part of the upper portion of the distribution space recess 2510 c of the center base 2510 by the guide passage 2532 a of the guide passage cover 2532. The game ball that has entered the entrance 2507 and is guided by the guide passage 2532a can be viewed from the player side through the guide passage cover 2532.

  The guide passage 2532a and the guide piece 2510h are located immediately above the left end of the sorting member 2520 near the front surface of the rolling surface 2521, and the game ball that has entered the entrance 2507 to the player is as if it has been sorted. An illusion can be made to guide the member 2520. The game ball guided to the guide piece 2510h through the guide passage 2532a is guided rearward by the guide piece 2510h, and passes through the passage opening 2510g of the center base 2510 to the left passage rear cover 2540 on the rear side of the center base 2510. Be guided. Then, the game ball guided to the left passage rear cover 2540 is guided to the discharge slope 2542 disposed below the sorting member 2520 by the guide wall 2541 on the rear side of the sorting member 2520 and then released. It rolls forward by the slope 2542, passes through the left opening 2510 e of the center base 2510, and is discharged into the game area 1100 from the discharge port 2508 at the lower end of the left extension 2510 b.

  Accordingly, a game ball that has flowed down the left route 1100L in the game area 1100 and has not entered the warp entrance 2503 enters the entrance 2507, passes through the guide passage 2532a, etc., and the left route in the game area 1100 from the discharge port 2508. It is discharged again to 1100L.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the window 2501 in the center accessory 2500 as viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. 146 and the like, the game ball that has flowed down to the right route 1100R side from the peripheral wall 2502 of the center accessory 2500 in the attacker passage 2509a 2510 enters the branch passage 2510k and is sent to the branch space 2510l. In this branch space 25101, a branch sensor 2620 is disposed immediately below the downstream end of the branch passage 2510k, and is detected by the branch sensor 2620 with high probability. Note that the branch sensor 2620 is in a non-detection state in a normal gaming state (a state where the branch sensor is not valid).

  The game balls sent to the branch passage 2510k of the center base 2510 are sent from the lower right corner of the branch passage 2510k to the second attacker space 2510n through the communication passage 2510m. At the entrance of the second attacker space 2510n, a guiding portion 2510p is formed so as to be lowered toward the second grand prize opening 2509, and the game ball is directed toward the second big prize opening 2509 by this guiding portion 2510p. Flow down. In the normal state, the second big prize opening 2509 is closed by the second opening / closing member 2572 of the second attacker unit 2570, and the game ball guided by the guiding portion 2510 p is secondly opened by the second opening / closing member 2572. The acceptance to the big prize opening 2509 is blocked, and the left side of the second opening / closing member 2572 in the second attacker space 2510n flows downward.

  At this time, in the second opening / closing member 2572, the stopper piece 2572d is in contact with the stopper portion 2571j provided on the left side of the lower right protruding portion 2571i of the unit base 2571, and rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. Is in a state of being blocked. Accordingly, a force to rotate the second opening / closing member 2572 in the counterclockwise direction by the game ball from the guiding portion 2510p abutting on the right side of the blade portion 2572a of the second opening / closing member 2572 is applied. However, the second member 2572 does not rotate in the counterclockwise direction.

  A game ball that has flowed down the second attacker space 2510n without being accepted into the second grand prize opening 2509 has an inclined surface 2582a of the lower right front cover 2582 of the second starter unit 2580 forming the bottom of the second attacker space 2510n. It rolls to the left in the front view, and is emitted downward from the left end of the inclined surface 2582a to the outside of the second attacker space 2510n.

  The gate portion 2585a of the gate member 2585 is arranged immediately below the left end of the inclined surface 2582a in the second starter opening unit 2580, and the game ball released downward from the second attacker space 2510n of the attacker passage 2509a is The gate portion 2585a is passed with a high probability. Note that the game ball that could not pass through the gate portion 2585a will flow downward through either the left or right side of the gate portion 2585a. The game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2585a of the gate member 2585 is detected by the gate sensor 2586 and guided backward, and the lower frame of the gate portion 2585a is guided by the guide passage 2587a of the passage member 2587 disposed on the rear side. Is guided into the wall-like barrier portion 2585b and flows down the front surface of the second start port 2587b.

  In the present embodiment, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2586, the normal lottery result is drawn, and the door member 2589 that closes the second start port 2587b according to the lottery normal lottery result is provided. Open and close. Specifically, in a normal state, the plunger 2590a of the start port solenoid 2590 of the second start port unit 2580 is moved downward by its own weight, and the first link member 2591 and the second link member 2592 are moved downward by the plunger 2590a. The door portion 2589a of the door member 2589 is in a state of rising substantially vertically to close the second start port 2587b. That is, in the normal state, the second start port 2587b is closed by the door member 2589, and the game ball cannot be received.

  When the normal lottery result drawn based on the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2586 is “losing”, the start port solenoid 2590 is not energized and the plunger 2590a remains lowered. Therefore, when the result of the normal lottery is “losing”, as shown in FIG. 146, the door member 2589 closes the second starting port 2587b and flows down from the barrier portion 2585b through the gate portion 2585a. Passes through the front side of the door portion 2589a of the door member 2589 without being received by the second starting port 2587a, flows down on the guide member 2584, and is discharged leftward by the guide member 2584 in the front view.

  On the other hand, when the normal lottery result lottered based on the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2586 is “winning”, the start port solenoid 2590 is energized and the plunger 2590a is raised, and the first link member 2591 and the second link The door portion 2589a of the door member 2589 rotates in the direction in which the tip moves forward via the member 2592, and the second start port 2587b is opened (see FIG. 147). In this state, the game ball that has flowed down from the barrier portion 2585b through the gate portion 2585a is brought into contact with the back side of the door member 2589 that has been rotated forward, and is guided to the second starting port 2587b side. Will be accepted. Then, the game ball received in the second start port 2587b is detected by the second start port sensor 2593 and then discharged downward through the discharge passage 2587c.

  In the present embodiment, when the passing of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2586, the normal lottery result is immediately drawn. Since the second starting port 2587b is energized and can be received, a game ball having been selected by winning is received at the second starting port 2587b with a very high probability.

  Further, in the second attacker unit 2570 in the present embodiment, the second attacker solenoid 2574 is energized in accordance with a special lottery result that is drawn by receiving a game ball in the first start port 2201 or the second start port 2587b. Then, the plunger 2574a is retracted into the second attacker solenoid 2574, and the second opening / closing member 2572 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front via the link member 2575 (see FIG. 148). In this state, the tip of the blade portion 2572a of the second opening / closing member 2572 is separated from the upper end of the second big prize opening 2509 in the right direction when viewed from the front, and is positioned on the right side of the left end of the guide portion 2510p of the center base 2510. The game ball can be received in the second grand prize opening 2509. Further, in this state, the second opening / closing member 2572 is in a state in which the stopper piece 2572d is in contact with the stopper portion 2571j provided in the guide portion 2571f of the unit base 2571 and the rotation in the clockwise direction in front view is restricted. It has become.

  Then, the game ball guided by the guide portion 2510p of the center base 2510 passes through the second big prize opening 2509, is guided to the guide portion 2571f of the unit base 2571, is detected by the second count sensor 2578, and then received. The downstream end of the spherical passage 2571l on the rear side of the unit base 2571 is discharged rearward from the portion 2571e through the passage port 2571d. At this time, the game ball guided from the guide portion 2510p of the center base 2510 contacts the shaft portion 2752b of the blade portion 2572a of the second opening / closing member 2572, so that the game ball contacts the tip of the blade portion 2572a. As compared with the second opening / closing member 2572, the moment shock applied to the second opening / closing member 2572 is reduced, and the second opening / closing member 2572 can be hardly damaged.

  In the second attacker unit 2570, the lower end side of the second opening / closing member 2572 is supported so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the lower end of the second big prize opening 2509. When the member 2572 is rotated to the open position, as shown in FIG. 148, the tip (upper end) side of the second opening / closing member 2572 is rotated in a direction approaching the guide portion 2510p. Accordingly, since the second opening / closing member 2572 is bridged between the guide portion 2510p and the second grand prize opening 2509, the game ball guided by the guide portion 2510p is moved from the guide portion 2510p to the second position. The second opening / closing member 2572 rolls to be received into the second big prize opening 2509, and the impact on the second opening / closing member 2572 due to the flow of the game ball can be reduced, and the second opening / closing member 2572 is damaged. Can be difficult.

  When the second opening / closing member 2572 of the second attacker unit 2570 rotates from the open position to the closed position, the flow path of the game ball in which the tip (upper end) of the second opening / closing member 2572 is guided by the guiding portion 2510p. Therefore, the game ball guided from the guiding portion 2510p at this timing can be prevented from being received in the second big prize opening 2509. Therefore, in the case of a big hit game or the like, it is possible to prevent a predetermined number or more of game balls from being received into the second big prize opening 2509, and to reduce the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. it can.

  In the second attacker unit 2570 of this embodiment, when the second opening / closing member 2572 is in the open position, the game ball passes between the tip of the second opening / closing member 2572 and the passage wall 2510j below the guide portion 2510p. Possible gaps are formed. Therefore, when a game ball is released from the inclined portion 2510q side to the second opening / closing member 2572 when the second opening / closing member 2572 is in the open position, the game ball passes between the second opening / closing member 2572 and the passage wall 2510j. There is.

[2-6. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 152. FIG. 149 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 150 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the back. In addition, FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective view in which the back unit is disassembled for each main component and viewed from the front, and FIG. 152 is an exploded perspective view in which the back unit is disassembled for each of the main components and viewed from the rear. is there.

  The back unit 3000 according to this embodiment is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150, the front side is opened, and the back wall 3010a is formed with an opening 3010b through which the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 faces and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A box 3010 is provided. The back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 has a box shape with the front side opened and a substantially rectangular opening 3010b that penetrates the rear wall 3010a in the front-rear direction, and extends outward from the outer periphery of the front end and is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 1150. And a flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c. An opening 3010 b of the back box 3010 is formed smaller than the front view outline of the main liquid crystal display device 1900.

  Although detailed description is omitted, the back box 3010 is appropriately provided with mounting holes, mounting bosses, and the like for mounting each rendering unit 3100, 3200, 3300, 3500, 3600, 3700, 3800, a board, a cover, and the like. Is formed.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a panel relay board 3020 mounted on the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010b and on the right side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010. A lamp driving board 3021 attached to the rear side below the opening 3010b and a left side position from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a lamp driving board cover 3022 attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 covering the rear side of the lamp driving board 3021 A motor drive board 3023 attached to the rear right side of the opening 3010b on the rear face of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010a, a motor drive board cover 3024 covering the rear side of the motor drive board 3023 and attached to the rear face of the back box 3010; Rear wall 3 of back box 3010 above motor drive board 3023 And Table lamp relay board 3025 attached to the rear surface of 10a, and a table lamp relay board cover 3026 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 covers the rear side of the table lamp relay board 3025.

  Further, the back unit 3000 has a back rear effect unit relay board 3027 attached to the upper side of the opening 3010b on the front surface of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010, and on the right side of the front side of the opening 3010b on the front surface of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010. And a back and rear movable decorative unit relay board 3028 to be attached.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is attached along the inner periphery of the opening 3010b on the front surface of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010, and a pair of decorative frames 3040 with decoration on the front surface, and the back wall 3010a of the back box 3010 A locking mechanism 3050 is provided on the rear surface, which is attached to the left side of the opening 3010b when viewed from the front, and detachably supports the main liquid crystal display device 1900.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back lower middle production unit 3100 which is disposed at the center in the left-right direction below the opening 3010c in the back box 3010 and is attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010. The back lower left effect unit 3200 and the back lower right effect unit 3300, which are arranged on the left and right sides of the 3100 and are respectively attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010, and the front of the back lower left effect unit 3200 and the back lower right effect unit 3300 A ball discharge unit 3400 attached to the rear box 3010, a back and rear direction unit 3500 disposed on the left and right sides of the opening 3010c in the back box 3010 and respectively attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3010a, and on the left and right sides of the opening 3010c in the back box 3010 The rear left direction uni are arranged on the front side of the rear rear direction unit 3500, respectively. And DOO 3600 and back right direction unit 3700, and a back on direction unit 3800 disposed on the front side of the upper in and back after direction unit 3500 of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010.

  The back-under-stage production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 has a sub display unit 3110 provided with a sub liquid crystal display device 3111, a lift unit 3130 that moves up and down together with the sub display unit 3110, and the lift unit 3130 and the sub display unit 3110 in a gaming state. A back-under middle drive unit 3150 that moves up and down accordingly is provided.

  The back lower left effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is arranged on the left side of the front view of the back lower left movable decorative body 3210 imitating a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the back lower left movable inner decorative body 3210. The back lower left movable decorative body 3220 imitating a character different from the back lower left inner movable decorative body 3210, and the back lower left inner movable decorative body 3210 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3220, respectively, according to the game state. And a lower back left drive unit 3250 that moves up and down independently.

  The back lower right effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the back lower right inner movable decorative body 3310 imitating a different character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the lower back right inner movable decorative body 3310. The back lower right outer movable decorative body 3320 imitating a character different from the back lower right inner movable decorative body 3310, and the back lower right inner movable decorative body 3310 and the rear lower right outer movable decorative body 3320 according to the game state, respectively. And a lower back right drive unit 3350 that moves up and down independently.

  The ball discharge unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is received in the general winning port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, the first starting port 2201 of the starting port unit 2200, and the general winning port 2301 of the front side unit 2300, and the rear side of the game panel 1150. The ball discharge passage member 3410 that guides and discharges the game ball guided to the bottom, the general winning port sensor 3421 that detects the gaming ball received in the general winning ports 2101 and 3011, and the first start port 2201 A first start port sensor 3422 for detecting the game ball and a magnetic detection sensor 3423 capable of detecting magnetism in the vicinity of the first start port 2201.

  The back rear production unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 imitates a predetermined item in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and extends in the left-right direction over the substantially entire width of the opening 3010b of the back box 3010. A back rear left drive unit 3530 that supports the left end of the back movable ornament 3510 in a front view so as to be vertically movable and is attached to the left side of the opening 3010b in the front surface of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010. And a rear rear right / left drive unit 3560 that supports the right end of the decorative body 3510 in a vertically movable manner and is attached to the right side of the opening 3010b in the front surface of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010.

  The back left effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 includes a back left movable decoration body unit 3610 having a plurality of decorations imitating flowers on the front surface, and a back left movable decoration body 3610 in front view according to the gaming state. And a back left drive unit 3650 that rotates to the center side of the opening 3010b of 3010.

  The back right production unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 includes a back right movable decorative body unit 3710 having a plurality of decorations imitating flowers on the front surface, and a back right movable decorative body 3710 according to a game state. The rear right drive unit 3750 that rotates to the center side of the opening 3010b of 3010, and the rear side of the game panel 1150 that is attached to the front side of the rear right drive unit 3750 and is received by the second big prize opening 2509 and the second start opening 2587b. And a ball discharge member 3790 for guiding the game ball guided to the bottom and discharging it.

  The back effect unit 3800 of the back unit 3000 includes a back movable ornament body unit 3810 in which a plurality of decorations imitating flowers on the front and a relief imitating a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 are formed. And a backside drive unit 3850 that rotates the backside movable decorative body unit 3810 toward the center of the opening 3010b of the front view back box 3010 according to the gaming state.

[2-7. Main liquid crystal display]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this embodiment will be described. The main liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 114, FIG. 115, and the like, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixed piece 1902 that protrudes outward from the left and right sides, and is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 via the fixed piece 1902. be able to.

  Specifically, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted from the rear side into a recess formed on the rear side of the rear wall 3010a in the back box 3010, and has two fixings protruding from the right side in front view. After the piece 1902 is inserted into the liquid crystal fixing part (not shown) of the back box 3010, the fixing piece 1902 protruding from the left piece in front view is fixed by the lock mechanism 3050 supported on the rear surface of the back box 3010. Can be attached to the back box 3010.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 115 and the like, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 containing a peripheral control unit 4140, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 153), and the like on the rear side, and a peripheral control board box. And a volume 1912 extending rearward from the lower part of 1910. By rotating the volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, the volume output from each speaker 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3, and the like can be adjusted.

[3. Various substrates]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls game operations (game progress) and a payout control board 4110 that controls payout of game balls and the like. The peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a main liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 for controlling the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 153, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a which is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100h to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing information stored in a RAM 4100e built in the main control MPU 4100a are provided. In addition to the built-in ROM 4100d and RAM 4100e, the main control MPU 4100a incorporates a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes a first start port sensor 3422 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2201, and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2587b. 2593, and a detection signal from a general winning port sensor 3421 that detects a game ball received in the general winning ports 2101 and 2301 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, a gate sensor 2586, and a general winning port, respectively. Detection signals from the sensor 3421, the first count sensor 2111, the second count sensor 2578, and the magnetic detection sensor 3423 are input via the panel relay board 3020 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b. It has come to be.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g. A drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2107 and the second attacker solenoid 2574, and the first special symbol display is performed via the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3020, the function display board 1191, and the normal symbol display board 1191a. 1185, second special symbol display 1186, first special symbol storage display 1184, second special symbol storage display 1187, normal symbol display 1189, normal symbol storage display 1188, game status display 1183, round display A drive signal is output to the device 1190.

  In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3422, the second start port sensor 2593, the gate sensor 2586, the branch sensor 2620, the first count sensor 2111, and the second count sensor 2578 are non-contact type electromagnetic. In contrast to the type proximity switch, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general prize opening sensor 3421. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2201 and the second start port 2587b and frequently pass through the gate portion 2585a and the branch sensor 2620, so the first start port sensor 3422, the second start port Detection of game balls by the sensor 2593 and the gate sensor 2586 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first start port sensor 3422, the second start port sensor 2593, the branch sensor 2620, and the gate sensor 2586. In addition, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big prize opening 2102 and the second big prize opening 2509 are opened, and game balls frequently enter, so the first count sensor 2111 and the second The detection of the game ball by the count sensor 2578 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are also used for the first count sensor 2111 and the second count sensor 2578. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3421 does not occur frequently in the general winning openings 2101 and 2301 where game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter lifespan than the proximity switch is used for the general prize opening sensor 3421.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown)). The main control MPU 4100a, which will be described in detail later, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from a power supply board 851 as described in detail later. The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. It is described.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU 4100a can store various types of information in the RAM 4100e during the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 4100e when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851 and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning voltage when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, the power failure notice signal is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 153, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of game balls and the like performs a discharge control by a payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls relating to payout, a launch solenoid 654, and a ball feed by a ball feed solenoid 585. A launch control unit 4120 that performs control, an error LED display 4130 that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error cancel switch 860a for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank 720 , A tank rail 731, and a ball removal switch 860 b for discharging the game balls in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[3-2A. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 153, a payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU 4111a, a payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, an external WDT 4111c (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally, and a prize A payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU 4111a incorporates functions and the like to prevent fraud.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from 4100 being input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, or the ball break switch 750 Detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input via the prize ball relay board 754.

  A ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first sent via the sensor board 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay board 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first supplied as a payout control input circuit. 4111e and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of the stored game balls is first sent to the handle device relay board 192 and the main side relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880 and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4111b and the prize ball relay board 754, and indicates the state of the pachinko machine 1 as an error LED indicator. A signal for display on 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, and a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is output via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The number of game balls actually paid out is transmitted to the main control board 4100 in a serial manner, or the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is notified that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it indicates that it is “connection abnormality” (specifically, with the main control board 4100). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and when the number “2” is displayed, (Specifically, on the basis of the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotating body 748 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740. When When the number “3” is displayed (specifically, it is a “counting switch error”) (specifically, the game ball is meshed with the vicinity of its entrance and the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to rotate). Based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751, a notification is made that the counting sensor 751 is malfunctioning. When the number “5” is displayed, a “retry error” (specifically, a payout) That the number of operation retries has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, it indicates that the operation is “full” (specifically, from the full-tank detection sensor 550). Based on the detection signal, it notifies the fact that the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it indicates that “CR is not connected” (payout) control That the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the plate 4110 to the CR unit), and when the number “9” is displayed, it is “in stock” (specifically, still That the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first sent via the frequency display board 365, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in a serial manner, and this signal is the payout control I / O port. 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining number indicator 365c. 874, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency indicator 365c.

[3-2B. Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 153, the launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the clock signal, and this A firing solenoid driving circuit 4120d that outputs a driving signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the firing reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid driving circuit 4120e that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. . Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b, the firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 gaming balls are launched toward the gaming area 1100 per minute and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

  A touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not a palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, and a firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal is first input to the launch control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880, and then input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit 4120a and is input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 in accordance with the rotational position of the front of the rotational handle body 506 is the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal. The signal is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d through the plate 880.

  This firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d emits a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength that matches the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle based on a signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512. When the reference pulse is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e generates a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input. When the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 by the output and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current is obtained. Is stopped, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 4110 even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 4110 when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 153, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a main liquid crystal display device 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3111.

[3-3A. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 153, a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs presentation control on the peripheral control board 4010 performs a peripheral sound control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. A sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each peripheral board of the game board 4 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted to the lamp driving board 3021 from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board, or the gaming board Motor mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board for the game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in 4 To transmit to the drive board 3023 or to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 Door-side drive composed of door-side drive data and door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 The light emission data is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame base board 194 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882, or the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display. In addition to transmitting control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the device 3111 from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, a control signal for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d ( Sound command) to the sound source IC 4140c.

  Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting the original positions of the various effect units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the motor drive board 3023 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Has been. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided in the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are door frame base substrates. 194, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on the operation signal. doing.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided in the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various performances flow from the speaker 821, and provided to the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speakers 130, 222, 262, and the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and projecting rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

  In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the peripheral control unit 4140 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). In combination with WDT, it is diagnosed whether its own system is running away.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body driving command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp driving board 3021 and the motor driving board 3023 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The lamp driving board 3021 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 is provided with a lighting signal or a flashing signal on the door frame 5 through the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command. The game board 4 is provided with a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received game board side lighting / flashing command, which is output to the LEDs of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc. Or output to the LED of each decorated board.

  The motor drive board 3023 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 sends a drive signal to the door frame 5 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 based on the received movable body drive command. 414, each drive motor provided in the game board 4, etc., or a solenoid.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the press operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 and the back box. It is input via a lamp drive board 3021 or a motor drive board 3023 attached to the rear surface of 3010.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the lamp drive board 3021, the motor drive board 3023 and the like attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the peripheral side relay terminal board. From the side speaker 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 via the 882, or from the speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 via the lamp driving board 3021 and the motor driving board 3023 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Then, control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various performances flow. In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the gaming window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 are provided. By sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal added with a lower speaker 391, which will be described later, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) to the low-frequency speaker 821. In addition, it is possible to present a sound effect (sound production) with a sense of reality more than before.

[3-4. LCD controller]
Next, as shown in FIG. 153, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 on the peripheral control board 4010 includes a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b that stores various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of video display processor) 4150c that controls the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, and the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display. A character ROM 4150d for storing various data on the screen displayed on the device 3111 and a character RAM 4150e to which various data stored in the character ROM 4150d are transferred and copied are provided.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to control the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like. Drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 is performed. If the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an execution signal (to be described later) from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b includes schedule data corresponding to control data (display commands) from the peripheral control board 4010, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111. A plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constituted by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e. This non-resident area transfer data prescribes the order in which various data are transferred from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance for the screen data drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 according to the progress of the schedule data. Has been.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then the screen data following the top screen data. Extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the head screen data, and outputs it to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and displays it on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111. Drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111. Further, when the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs a running signal indicating that fact to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer system”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 is held in a line buffer, and drawing for one line held in this line buffer is performed. In this method, data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111.

  The character ROM 4150d stores a very large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device. This will affect the speed at which 3111 is drawn. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, “sprite” will be described. “Sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111. For example, when various persons are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Accordingly, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set in a vertical relationship (hereinafter referred to as “sprite superposition sequence”) when the sprites are arranged on the screen or when the sprites are overlapped with each other. 3111 is drawn.

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of 6 characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 are crossed with the main scan for setting the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front. It is driven by sub-scanning in which main scanning is repeatedly performed in such a direction. When the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 receive drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 are scanned from the front of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111. As seen from the left to the right, each pixel is output to one line of pixels. When the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 shift to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, the next line Based on the drawing data of the minute, the main scanning is sequentially outputted from the left to the right as viewed from the front of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 to the pixels for one line.

[4. Game contents]
In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is moved to the game panel 1150 when the player rotates the handle device 500 arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5. The game area 1100 is placed in front of the game area 1100, and a game with a game ball is started. A game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the game area 1100 flows down in the game area 1100 on the left or right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the strength of the game. It should be noted that the game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle device 500, and the game ball can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Further, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1150 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls flow down. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  When the game ball that has been thrown into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view of the center wall 2500 from the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2502, that is, the left route 1100L side, It passes between the plurality of protrusions 2512 and flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2503 that opens to the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500, the rolling member 2520 provided in the warp passage 2504 rolls. A discharge portion 2522 that is supplied to the moving surface 2521 and is disposed at the approximate center of the rolling surface 2521 is discharged to the ridge portion 2523 and returned to the warp outlet 2505 side that is supplied to the stage 2506 or into the game area 1100. It is distributed to any of the outlets 2508 side. In this embodiment, game balls are distributed to the warp outlet 2505 side with a high probability.

  The game balls distributed to the warp outlet 2505 side by the distribution member 2520 are supplied from the warp outlet 2505 to the stage 2506. In this stage 2506, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2505 to the left end of the first stage 2506a in the stage 2506 and discharged forward from the position of the guide portion 2506e that is lowest after rolling the first stage 2506a in the left-right direction. Then, the game ball released forward from the first stage 2506a is supplied to the second stage 2506b arranged on the front side and the lower side of the first stage 2506a, and most after rolling the second stage 2506b in the left-right direction. From the lowered part, the discharge is released back into the game area 1100 above the first start port 2201 in the start port unit 2200.

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2506 enters the chance entrance 2506c opened to the center rear side in the left-right direction of the first stage 2506a, the game ball 1506d opens directly above the first start port 2201 and enters the game area 1100. Released and received with high probability into the first start port 2201. When a game ball is received by the first start port 2201 and detected by the first start port sensor 3422, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls is temporarily set to the count value of the prize ball number counter. Remembered. When a predetermined payout condition is satisfied (for example, when a big hit is achieved), the main control board 4100 sends the payout control board 4110 to the payout control board 4110 so that the number of prize balls stored in the count value of the prize ball number counter is paid out. A predetermined payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110, and the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 is controlled in accordance with the payout command to pay out the game ball to the upper plate 301.

  Note that when the game ball released from the stage 2506 into the game area 1100 flows down to the left side of the first start port 2201 without winning the first start port 2201, the front side unit 2300 disposed downstream is used. There is a possibility of winning in the general winning opening 2301, and when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 2301 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3421, the main control board 4100 will pay out the payout control board 4110 based on the detection signal. The payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 in accordance with the payout command to send a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls to the upper plate 301. To pay.

  Further, when the game ball released from the stage 2506 into the game area 1100 does not win the first start port 2201 and flows down to the right side of the first start port 2201, it is very rare that the general winning port of the attacker unit 2100 is reached. 2101 may be won. Further, when the first big prize opening 2102 is in an open state due to a big hit game or the like, it is possible to win the first big prize opening 2102 with a high probability.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2503, it is guided leftward by the shelf 2510f of the center base 2510 and enters the entrance 2507 that opens to the left end. Then, it is discharged from the discharge port 2508 below the sorting member 2520 into the game area 1100. Then, the game balls released into the game area 1100 from the discharge port 2508 are drawn to the center side of the game area 1100 below the center accessory 2500 by the left shelf 2302 of the front side unit 2300, and the center accessory 2500 There is a possibility of winning a prize in the general winning opening 2301 of the front side unit 2300 arranged below the front side. Note that the game ball released from the discharge port 2508 may win the first start port 2201, although the probability is lower than the game ball released from the stage 2506 to the game area 1100.

  On the other hand, when a game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 enters the right route 1100R on the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory It passes through a narrow gap between the right outer periphery of 2500 and the inner periphery of the game area 1100, and enters an attacker passage 2509a that opens near the stop portion 1114 of the front component member 1110A on the inner periphery of the game area 1100.

  The game ball that has entered the attacker path 2509a passes through the branch path 2510k, the branch space 25101, the communication path 2510m, and the second attacker space 2510n, and then the gate portion of the second starter unit 2580 from the downstream end of the second attacker space 2510n. Released directly above 2585a. Note that a game ball that has entered the attacker passage 2509a by making a right strike wins the second big prize opening 2509 with a very high probability when the second big prize opening 2509 is open due to a big hit game or the like.

  The game ball released directly above the gate portion 2585a enters the gate portion 2585a with a very high probability, and after being detected by the gate sensor 2586, passes through the front side of the second big prize opening 2587b and enters the game area 1100. Released.

  At this time, when a game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2586, the main control board 4100 generates a normal random number as a normal lottery result based on the detection signal. Based on this normal random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is displayed in a variable manner (for example, the normal symbol display 1189 composed of two red and green LEDs alternately emits light) for a predetermined time ( For example, a normal symbol based on a normal random number (normal lottery result) extracted after the elapse of 0.1 second to 1 second) is stopped (one of the two LEDs on the normal symbol display 1189 emits light). Is done. In the present embodiment, the same variable display is also performed on the normal symbol display board 1191a provided in the second start port unit 2580. The normal symbol variation display is performed based on a normal symbol variation pattern selected from a predetermined normal symbol variation pattern selection table.

  Specifically, if the selected random number is a “normal hit” random number, the normal symbol indicating the winning is stopped and displayed (the normal symbol display 1189 emits green light), and the selected normal random number is a “normal lose” random number. In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol suggesting a loss (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits red light). When the normal symbol indicating “normal hit” is stopped and displayed, the door member 2589 that closes the second start port 2587b rotates in the opening direction for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds). Then, the game ball can be won to the second start port 2587b.

  In the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is extremely short compared to the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, the door member 2589 is moved to the start-port solenoid 2590 at the timing of whether or not the game ball that has passed the gate portion 2585a and has drawn “normal hit” reaches the front side of the door member 2589 that closes the second start-port 2587b. , And can be received into the second starting port 2587b. If “normal hit” is selected, the second starting port 2587b is received with a very high probability.

  Then, when a game ball is received through the gate portion 2585a and a “normal hit” lottery is received into the second start port 2587b, the second start port sensor 2593 detects the ball and based on the detection signal of the second start port sensor 2593. A predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls is temporarily stored in the count value of the award ball number counter, similarly to the case where the first start port sensor 3422 detects the game ball. Then, when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied (for example, when a big win is reached), the main control board 4100 sends the payout control board 4110 to the payout control board 4110 so that the number of prize balls stored in the count value of the prize ball number counter is paid out. A predetermined payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110, and the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 is controlled in accordance with the payout command to pay out the game ball to the upper plate 301.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a game ball performs a driving operation (so-called right-handed) passing through the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game passes through the gate portion 2585a with a very high probability, and also passes through the gate portion 2585a. If the ball is drawn “normal hit”, it will be accepted to the second starting port 2587b with a very high probability, so even a beginner or a player unfamiliar with the game can easily enter the second starting port 2587b and enjoy the player. You can do it.

  Incidentally, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the player hits the right hand, the game ball can be easily won at the second start port 2587b. When the amount of game balls to be paid out increases, the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed increases, and there is a risk of hesitation in installing the pachinko machine 1. However, in this pachinko machine 1, since the number of game balls to be paid out by winning a game ball to the second starting port 2587b is one, the game is performed by lottery of a special lottery result by winning to the second starting port 2587b. It is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side while enhancing the interest of the player, and to install the pachinko machine 1 without any problem.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the normal symbol display 1189 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2586, the normal symbol of the fluctuation is stopped and generated / extracted first. Until the result of the normal random number is confirmed, the normal random number (including the normal symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2586 is temporarily stored, and the display is suspended and stored. The number of ordinary random numbers (also called the number of reservations) is displayed on the ordinary symbol storage display 1188. The normal symbol memory display 1188 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of memories can be suggested by the number of LEDs to be lit. In this example, up to four can be stored and displayed. Note that when the number of memories exceeds four, the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2126 is discarded.

  On the other hand, when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a and “ordinary lose” is drawn, the door member 2589 that closes the second start port 2587b maintains the state where the second start port 2587b is closed. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2585a flows down the front surface of the door member 2589 that closes the second start port 2587b, and the game is in the upper right of the first big winning port 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 by the guide member 2584. Released into region 1100. Note that the game ball released from the guide member 2584 into the game area 1100 wins the first big prize opening 2102 with a high probability when the first big prize opening 2102 is in an open state due to a big hit game or the like. Therefore, in the case of a big hit game or the like in which the first grand prize opening 2102 or the second big prize opening 2509 can be received, the game ball can be easily moved to the right by making a right turn so that the game ball flows down the right route 1100R. The first grand prize opening 2102 and the second big prize opening 2509 can be awarded.

  By the way, in the main control board 4100 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a game ball wins the first start port 2201 and the second start port 2587b and is detected by the first start port sensor 3422 and the second start port sensor 2593. Then, the first start port 2201 generates and extracts a predetermined first special random number, and the second start port 2587b generates and extracts a predetermined second special random number. Then, based on the extracted special random number, the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1185 or second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 is started, and then the special symbol is displayed. The special symbol corresponding to the random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result.

  When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol indicator 1186 in a manner suggesting “big hit”, the opening / closing member 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 or the second attacker unit 2570 A special advantageous gaming state (for example, a big hit game) in which the two opening / closing members 2572 are opened / closed in a predetermined pattern is generated, and a game ball is awarded to the first big winning opening 2102 or the second big winning opening 2509 during that time. , You can get more game balls. When one game ball wins the first grand prize opening 2102 or the second big prize opening 2509, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740.

  In the first start port 2201 and the second start port 2587b as well, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display are displayed in the same manner as the normal symbol variation display due to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2585a. In 1186, when the special symbol is variably displayed, or when the special symbol such as the big hit game as the special advantageous gaming state cannot be variably displayed, the game ball is awarded to the starting port 2201 or the second starting port 2587b and the first game ball is won. When detected by the start port sensor 3422 or the second start port sensor 2593, the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3422 or the second start port sensor 2593 is used until the special symbol change display is possible. The first special random number and the second special random number extracted are temporarily stored and the display is suspended, and the number of the stored special random numbers is changed to the first special symbol. Show in 憶 display 1184 and the second special symbol memory indicator 1187.

  The first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory indicator 1187 are each composed of two LEDs, so that the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four each can be stored and displayed. If the number of memories exceeds 4, the extracted special random number is discarded. In addition, when both the first special random number and the second special random number are stored (held), the second special random number is executed (digested) with priority over the first special random number. . That is, the lottery result hold related to the second start port 2587b is executed (digested) with priority over the lottery result hold related to the first start port 2201.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, the first special random number extracted based on the detection by the first start port sensor 3422 or the second start port sensor 2593 and the special random number of the second special random number are used as predetermined random numbers. By comparing with a determination table (also referred to as a big hit determination table), it is determined whether the special random number is “lost” or “big hit”. Further, in the main control board 4100, the first design random number extracted based on the detection of the first start port sensor 3422 and the second start port sensor 2593 and the second design random number are used as predetermined random numbers. By comparing with a determination table (also referred to as a symbol determination table), it is determined whether “big hit” is “4R big hit”, “12R big hit”, or “16R big hit”. In addition, the symbol determination table also determines “short hit per probability change”, “per hit per probability change”, “short hit per hour”, “short hit per probability change”, and the like.

  When the extracted first special random number or second special random number is “big hit”, the main control board 4100 opens the opening / closing member 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 and the second opening / closing member 2572 of the second attacker unit 2570. After a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have been awarded to the first grand prize opening 2102 or the second major prize opening 2509 When satisfied, the opening / closing pattern that closes the opening / closing member 2104 and the second opening / closing member 2572 (a single opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated by repeating 4 rounds for “4R big hit”, 12 rounds for “12R big hit”, and 16 rounds for “16R big hit”. Note that for the “big hit” after the end of the predetermined number of rounds, the big hit determination table may be replaced with a big hit determination table or the like at a high probability in accordance with the extracted symbol random number.

  By the way, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs main control when the extracted first special random number and second special random number are “special jackpots” (a jackpot that triggers the execution of a fate selection chance effect or a fate branch effect). In the board 4100, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol indicator 1186 of the function display unit 1180 in a manner suggesting “specific big hit”, the game from the branch sensor 2620 In a special advantageous gaming state in which a ball detection signal can be received (branch sensor enabled state), and the opening / closing member 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 or the second opening / closing member 2572 of the second attacker unit 2570 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. Suspend occurrence. When the right-handed game ball is detected by passing through the branch sensor 2620 in the branch space 25101 in the attacker passage 2509a, a special advantageous game in which the opening / closing member 2104 and the second opening / closing member 2572 are opened / closed in a predetermined pattern. A state is generated, and a “special jackpot” game of the number of rounds based on the first special random number or the second special random number is played.

  In the “special big hit”, the variation time of the special symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is set longer than the variation time of the special symbol on the function display unit 1180. That is, with respect to the special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the first start port 2201 and the second start port 2587b, the special lottery result is displayed as the first special symbol display 1185 of the function display unit 1180 or the second The time displayed by the effect image by the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is set longer than the time displayed by the special symbol display 1186. Thereby, even when the effect image (for example, reach effect image) is displayed by the main liquid crystal display device 1900, the opening / closing member 2104 and the second opening / closing member 2572 are opened / closed in a predetermined pattern by the detection signal of the game ball from the branch sensor 2620. A special advantageous gaming state can be generated.

  The main liquid crystal display device after the special symbol indicating “special big hit” is stopped and displayed by the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186, that is, at the start of receiving the detection signal from the branch sensor 2620. It is desirable to display an image that prompts the player to perform a driving operation (right-handed) aiming at the branch sensor 2620 in 1900, thereby causing the branch sensor 2620 to detect the game ball and to make a special for “specific big hit”. An advantageous gaming state can be generated. At this time, although the main liquid crystal display device 1900 does not suggest "big hit" ("specific big hit"), the opening / closing member 2104 and the second opening / closing member 2572 are opened and closed, and the first big winning opening 2102 and the second Since it is possible to win a prize at the 2nd prize opening 2509, a game ball hit with the branch sensor 2620 can enter the 1st big prize opening 2102 and the 2nd big prize opening 2509 and surprise the player. , Can entertain the player.

  In addition, the game balls that have been thrown into the game area 1100 are any of the general winning ports 2101, 2301, the first starting port 2201, the second starting port 2587b, the first major winning port 2102, and the second major winning port 2509. If the game is not won, the game area 1100 is provided at the lower center in the left-right direction and discharged from the out port 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, the game that is won regardless of whether the game ball wins any of the general winning ports 2101, 3011, the first starting port 2201, the second starting port 2587b, the first major winning port 2102, and the second major winning port 2509. The ball is discharged to the lower rear side of the game board 4 without being returned into the game area 1100.

  Note that the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 153). The variation display of symbols on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on a command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control unit 4140. As a result, the change display of the symbols on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like that the player particularly pays attention to is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 or the like, so that the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 or For one command, a plurality of symbol variation patterns can be prepared in advance to increase the symbol variation patterns in the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. Also, the “big hit game effect image” displayed during the “hit” game is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like, and various patterns of effect images are prepared in advance. Thereby, the display pattern of the effect image displayed without increasing the calculation processing load on the main control board 4100 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that makes the player more entertaining and less likely to get bored can be obtained. It has become.

  In addition to controlling the effect image, the peripheral control unit 4140 appropriately drives the drive motor, the drive solenoid, the decorative board, and the like provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 based on the command related to the lottery result. Thus, a movable effect and a light emitting effect can be performed, and the player can be entertained by the movable effect and the light emitting effect.

[5. Characteristic action and effect of the 2nd Grand Prize]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the second big prize opening 2509 arranged in the attacker passage 2509a in the center accessory 2500, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given. Therefore, the game ball is received by the second opening / closing member 2572 to the second big prize opening 2509 in accordance with the game state changed by the game ball being shot into the game area 1100 (for example, big hit game). When the open state is possible, the player attempts to accept the game ball into the second grand prize opening 2509 and performs a driving operation (right-handed in this embodiment) such that the game ball enters the attacker passage 2509a. As a result, it is possible to entertain the player in the game ball driving operation. When the game ball that has been struck enters the attacker passage 2509a and is guided by the guide portion 2510p, the guide portion 2510p guides the game ball toward the second big prize opening 2509, so that the game ball is extremely high. The game can be accepted into the second grand prize opening 2509 with a probability, and the player can be entertained by giving a privilege such as paying out the game ball by receiving the game ball. Therefore, the game ball can be easily received into the variable second prize opening 2509 that is opened and closed by the second opening / closing member 2572, and it is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

  Further, when the second big prize opening 2509 in the attacker flow path 2509a is in the open state, the game ball can be accepted into the second big prize opening 2509 with a very high probability by simply entering the attacker passage 2509a. Even inexperienced players such as beginners can easily accept the game ball in the second grand prize opening 2509, and it is possible to reduce the difficulty of driving the game ball and to enjoy the game. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since no obstacle nail is arranged on the attacker passage 2509a provided with the second big prize opening 2509 opened and closed by the second opening / closing member 2572, the flow (route) of the game ball in the attacker passage 2509a is stabilized. Thus, the game ball that has entered the attacker passage 2509a can reliably reach the guide portion 2510p, and the guide portion 2510p guides the game ball toward the second big prize opening 2509 to open the second big prize. It can be received in the mouth 2509.

  In addition, the game balls that have entered the attacker passage 2509a and have not been received in the second grand prize opening 2509 are discharged again from the attacker passage 2509a into the game area 1100, so that the released downstream in the game area 1000 is released. The gate portion 2586a, the second starting port 2587b, the general winning port 2101, the first grand winning port 2102 and the like provided on the side may be received, and the game ball was not received into the second large winning port 2509 Even if disappointed, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the reception of the game ball to the second start port 2587b on the downstream side released from the attacker passage 2509a, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game. can do.

  Since the game ball is guided toward the second big prize opening 2509 by the guidance part 2510p of the center base 2510, when the second big prize opening 2509 is in the open state, the game ball guided from the guidance part 2510p is the first It becomes difficult to contact the second opening / closing member 2572, and it is possible to reduce the damage to the second opening / closing member 2572 due to the impact of the game ball coming into contact. It is possible to prevent frustration and lowering interest. Therefore, in the case of a big hit game in which the second big prize opening 2509 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, more game balls are hit with aiming at the second big prize opening 2509, and thus more games than usual. Although the ball comes into contact with the second opening / closing member 2572, as described above, the game portion is hardly brought into contact with the second opening / closing member 2572 in the open position by the guide portion 2510p, so that many game balls are driven. However, the second opening / closing member 2572 can be made difficult to break, and the game can be continued and enjoyed by preventing the game from being interrupted by the breakage of the second opening / closing member 2572.

  Furthermore, since the guide portion 2510p of the center base 2510 is inclined so that the extension line passes through the second big prize opening 2509 opened to the right in the front view, the game ball is directed to the guide portion 2510p with respect to the player. When guided, it can be recognized at a glance that it will be accepted into the second grand prize opening 2509. When the second big prize opening 2509 is in an open state, a game ball is accepted into the second major prize opening 2509. It can be recognized that the pachinko machine 1 is easy. Therefore, when the second grand prize winning opening 2509 is in the open state, a driving operation aiming at the attacker channel 2509a (right Striking) can be actively performed, and it is possible to entertain the game ball driving operation and to prevent the interest from deteriorating. In addition, as described above, it is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that the game ball is surely accepted into the second big prize opening 2509 when the game ball is guided to the guide portion 2510p. Can increase the expectation of the game on the pachinko machine 1, and can make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

  In addition, since the guiding portion 2510p is inclined so that the extension line passes through the second big prize opening 2509 opened to the right in the front view, the game ball guided by the guiding portion 2510p is moved to the second open state. It is possible to directly accept the second big prize opening 2509 without making contact with the opening / closing member 2572, and it is possible to reduce the contact of the game ball with the opened second opening / closing member 2572 as much as possible. It is possible to prevent the second opening / closing member 2572 from being damaged by fatigue. On the other hand, when the second big prize opening 2509 is in the closed state, the second opening / closing member 2572 is in a state of rising substantially vertically, so that the game ball guided by the guide portion 2510p is in relation to the second opening / closing member 2572. Since the contact is made from the lateral direction and the impact acting on the second opening / closing member 2572 is smaller than the case of contacting from the upper direction, the accumulation of fatigue is reduced and the second opening / closing member 2572 is prevented from being damaged. can do. From these facts, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the damage of the second opening / closing member 2572 by preventing the second opening / closing member 2572 from being damaged. It is possible to avoid memorizing and lowering the interest, and to continue to enjoy the game.

  Further, the second opening / closing member 2572 for opening and closing the second big prize opening 2509 is rotated around the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the second opening / closing member 2572 is opened when the second big prize opening 2509 is opened and closed. The outer shape of the second opening / closing member 2572 that can be seen from the player side does not change regardless of whether the second opening / closing member 2572 is moved to the open position or the closed position. This makes it easier to understand and makes it easier for the player to notice the opening and closing of the second grand prize opening 2509, and avoids the player from feeling lost and unaware of the opening and closing of the second big prize opening 2509. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating, and to promptly perform a game ball driving operation aiming at the second grand prize opening 2509 with respect to the second big prize opening 2509 which has been opened, Entertaining players Interest Te can be suppressed.

  Further, since the lower end side of the second opening / closing member 2572 is rotatably supported around the axis extending in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the lower end of the second big prize opening 2509, the second opening / closing member 2572 is turned to the open position. When it is moved, the tip (upper end) side of the second opening / closing member 2572 is likely to rotate in a direction approaching the guiding portion 2510p. Accordingly, since the second opening / closing member 2572 is bridged between the guide portion 2510p and the second grand prize opening 2509, the game ball guided by the guide portion 2510p is moved from the guide portion 2510p to the second position. The second opening / closing member 2572 rolls to be received into the second big prize opening 2509, and when the game ball is delivered from the guide portion 2510p to the second opening / closing member 2572, the game ball flows down to the second opening / closing member 2572. The acting impact can be reduced, and the second opening / closing member 2572 can be made difficult to break. In addition, when the second opening / closing member 2572 rotates from the open position to the closed position, the guide portion so that the tip (upper end) of the second opening / closing member 2572 blocks the flow path of the game ball guided by the guide portion 2510p. Since it rotates in the direction away from 2510p, it is possible to prevent the game ball guided from the guiding portion 2510p from being accepted into the second big prize opening 2509 at this timing. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a predetermined number or more of game balls from being received into the second grand prize opening 2509 and to reduce the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Further, since the game ball is guided by the guide portion 2510p so as to flow down toward the lower end of the second grand prize port 2509, when the second big prize port 2509 is in the open state, the game ball is reliably received from the guide portion 2510p. Can be received in the second big prize opening 2509 and the contact of the game ball with the opened second opening / closing member 2572 can be reduced as much as possible, and the second opening / closing member 2572 is damaged due to fatigue. Can be prevented. On the other hand, when the second big prize opening 2509 is in the closed state, the game ball guided from the guide portion 2510p comes into contact with the vicinity of the lower end of the second opening / closing member 2572 that is rotatably supported. The lower end side of the opening / closing member 2572 is in a state excellent in impact resistance due to the contact of the game ball, and the second opening / closing member 2572 can be made difficult to break. Therefore, by preventing the second opening / closing member 2572 from being damaged, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the damage of the second opening / closing member 2572, so that the player feels frustrated by the interruption of the game. Can be avoided, and the game can be continuously enjoyed.

  In addition, all the game balls circulating in the attacker passage 2509a are guided to the second big prize opening 2509 by the guide portion 2510p, and the game is performed when the second big prize opening 2509 is in the open state by the second opening / closing member 2572. When the balls enter the attacker passage 2509a, all the game balls are guided toward the second big prize opening 2509 by the guiding portion 2510p, so that more game balls are accepted into the second big prize opening 2509. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating. In addition, when the second grand prize opening 2509 is in an open state, the game ball can be received into the second big prize opening 2509 simply by entering the attacker ball 2509a, so that the game ball aimed at the attacker path 2509a can be received. It is possible to concentrate on the driving operation of the game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest for the game due to difficulty in getting bored.

  In addition, a game ball that has been strongly struck more than a predetermined amount enters the game area 1100 into the attacker path 2509a, and the game ball can easily enter the attack path 2509a by a simple driving operation (right stroke). Therefore, when the second big prize opening 2509 in the attacker passage 2509a is open according to the game state, even a player who is unfamiliar to a beginner or the like can easily enter the game ball into the attacker passage 2509a, A game ball can be received with high probability into the variable second big prize opening 2509 that is opened and closed by the second opening / closing member 2572, and it is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a receiving port to which a privilege is given, directly above the first starting port 2201 in which a special advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage by receiving a game ball may occur. A stage 2506 is disposed upstream of the player 2, and when a game ball is released from the stage 2506, the player can recognize that the first start port 2201 is received with a high probability, and the stage 2506 is provided. A warp inlet 2503 into which a game ball can enter is opened on the outer periphery of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, and when a game ball is inserted into the warp inlet 2503, the player is informed that the game ball is supplied to the stage 2506. The warp entrance 2503 is provided to the player so that the game ball can be supplied to the stage 2506. Can be made to the implantation operation of the game balls Tsu, you are possible to entertain the hammering operation of the game ball to the player. Then, when the game ball that has been struck into the game area 1100 enters the warp inlet 2503, it flows to the sorting member 2520 in the warp passage 2504 and is supplied to the stage 2506 by the sorting member 2520, Or, since it is distributed to any of the discharge port 2508 side returned to the game area 1100, just because the game ball has entered the warp inlet 2503, the game ball is not necessarily supplied to the stage 2506, so It can be attracted to the sorting member 2520 in the warp passage 2504 where the player's interest can be visually recognized, and the movement of the game ball supplied to the stage 2506 can be enjoyed to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating. Can do.

  In addition, the game balls that have entered from the warp inlet 2503 by the sorting member 2520 in the warp passage 2504 are distributed to either the warp outlet 2505 side that supplies the stage 2506 or the discharge port 2508 side that returns to the game area 1100. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel excited whether or not the game ball is distributed to the warp outlet 2505 side (stage 2506 side) by the distribution member 2520, and the player moves the game ball. It is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the game balls distributed to the warp outlet 2505 side by the distribution member 2520 are supplied from the warp outlet 2505 to the stage 2506, they roll on the stage 2506 as in the conventional pachinko machine having the stage 2506. In addition to being able to entertain the movement of the game ball, the player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the game ball is released from a portion that is received with high probability into the first start port 2201 in the stage 2506, The distribution member 2520 and the stage 2506 make it possible to entertain the player twice, and it is possible to entertain games that are not available in conventional pachinko machines.

  In addition, when a game ball released from the stage 2506 is received in the first start port 2201, a special ball selection result may be generated by paying out the game ball and generating a special advantageous game state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel good and to throw a game ball into the game area 1100, and to make the player entertained and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, the game ball supplied to the sorting member 2520 in the warp passage 2504 rolls back and forth in the left-right direction by the rolling surface 2521 that extends in the left-right direction and is curved so that both ends are elevated, and then from the discharge unit 2522. Since it is released and distributed to either the warp outlet 2505 side or the outlet 2508 side by the ridge 2523, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball that reciprocates in the left-right direction, Since it can be confused whether the game ball is reciprocated in the left-right direction, the game ball can be distributed to the warp outlet 2505 side or the discharge port 2508 side. Can increase the expectation of the distribution to the warp outlet 2505 side (stage 2506 side) and suppress the interest from deteriorating. .

  In addition, since the game ball that has entered from the warp inlet 2503 is supplied to one end in the left-right direction of the rolling surface 2521 of the sorting member 2520, the game ball reliably rolls back and forth in the left-right direction on the rolling surface 2521. It is possible to make the player enjoy the movement of the game ball and to prevent the interest from deteriorating. In addition, since the game ball reciprocally rolls in the left-right direction on the rolling surface 2521 of the sorting member 2520, it is possible to lengthen the time from when the game ball is supplied to the sorting member 2520 until it is sorted. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize how the game balls are distributed, to make the game balls move in the warp passage 2504, and to make it easier to see where the game balls are distributed. The player can be thrilled and excited, and the player's expectation can be increased and the interest can be prevented from decreasing.

  Further, in the sorting member 2520, since the probability that the game ball released from the discharge portion 2522 of the rolling surface 2521 is distributed to the warp outlet 2505 side by the ridge portion 2523 is increased, the game that has entered the warp inlet 2503 is increased. It is possible to reduce the number of times the player is discouraged because the balls are distributed to the release port 2508 and returned to the game area 1100, and the player's interest can be suppressed from being lowered. At the same time, since the game balls are sometimes distributed to the discharge port 2508 side, it is possible to increase the throbbing feeling with respect to the distribution of the game balls by the distribution member 2520, and to prevent the player from becoming tired and deteriorating the interest. Can do.

  In addition, when a game ball that has been hit to aim at the warp entrance 2503 passes between the warp entrance 2503 and the inner periphery of the game area 1100 without entering the warp entrance 2503, the game ball is guided by the shelf 2510f of the center accessory 2500. Then, the player enters the entrance 2507 and is guided from the entrance 2507 to the upper side on the right end side of the rolling surface 2521 of the sorting member 2520 through the guide passage 2532a, so that the game ball is distributed to the player. It can be thought that there is a possibility of being supplied to the member 2520 (rolling surface 2521) and distributed to the stage 2506 side. Therefore, even if the player is disappointed that the game ball that has been struck does not enter the warp entrance 2503, the player can feel relieved by entering the entrance 2507 on the downstream side. It is possible to prevent the interest of the music from deteriorating.

[6. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described. FIG. 154 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (a), the main control board 4100 according to the present embodiment first stores various registers and RAMs as processing in step S1 on the condition that the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated. Initialize the stored data. The RAM clear switch 4100c is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 3 is opened. Further, the RAM clear switch 4100c outputs a clear signal to the main control board 4100 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed since the power is turned on. When it is determined that there is, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize various registers and data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process for storing information (for example, various flags) indicating the progress of the game in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is executed. If the RAM clear switch 4100c is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Then, a restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, as a process in step S2, a random number that is a number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped, and the special symbols. In a variable random number display executed in the main liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the variable random number display used for the lottery process for a predetermined time (variable time) required for the variable display control of Reach (Left decorative design and right decorative design are stopped and displayed in the same design, middle decorative design is not displayed yet, and left, middle and right decorative designs are all synchronized to change to the same design. Reach random number used for lottery processing to determine whether or not to display, symbol used for lottery processing to determine the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number There is provided a random number counter for holding random numbers such as numbers (first symbol random numbers, second symbol random numbers), random numbers (normal random numbers) used for lottery processing for winning when the door member 2589 is operated, etc. Yes.

  In this example, a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first starting port 2201 is started and won, the second starting port 2587b is started and won. Even in this case, the reach random number is acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number. The reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number may correspond to the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is different from the first reach determination table. You may make it vary the execution ratio of reach production by providing the 2nd reach determination table in which a determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. Note that after the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms, for example.

  FIG. 154 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register saving process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the processing in step S12, the gate sensor 2586, the first start port sensor 3422, the second start port sensor 2593, the first count sensor 2111, the second count sensor 2578, the general winning port sensor 3421, and the like. Detection signals from various switches are input. Next, as a process in step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above-mentioned random numbers, the random number counter is updated in such a manner that the random numbers (special random numbers, normal random numbers) related to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbols and the normal symbols are updated. Counter operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes, as the process of step S14, a special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable symbol variable display is stopped. Execute. This special symbol process will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, first flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a). The corresponding processing is selectively executed based on the two special symbol process flags).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process related to a win for the operation of the door member 2589 as the process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process, basically, the corresponding processing is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. In addition, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is arranged so that the drive frequency of the door member 2589 is higher during a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state (excluding a part of the 4R big hit gaming state). A lottery process is executed (so-called short-time state). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased only within a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot gaming state (excluding a part of the 4R jackpot gaming state), and the variable symbol display control is performed. The time required is shortened, and when the normal symbol lottery result is a win, the opening time of the door member 2589 is extended to realize such a short time state.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 then performs the special symbol process as step S16. Then, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in the predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like is performed.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 outputs information such as hit information (16R big hit, 12R big hit, 4R big hit) supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as the process of step S18 next. Process.

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 responds to these signals when the detection signals of the first count sensor 2111, the second count sensor 2578, etc. are in the ON state as the processing of step S19. A payout control command is output to the payout control board 4110 so that the winning ball is paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU 4111a mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744 so as to pay out a prize ball to the player. On the other hand, when the detection signals of the first start port sensor 3422 and the second start port sensor 2593 are turned on, the award balls corresponding to the signals are temporarily stored in the count value of the award ball number counter. When a payout condition is satisfied (for example, when a big hit is achieved), a payout control command is output to the payout control board 4110 so that the number of prize balls stored in the count value of the prize ball number counter is paid out. In other words, even if the detection signals of the first start port sensor 3422 and the second start port sensor 2593 are turned on, a prize ball is not paid out to the player immediately, and a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. Until then, the prize ball will not be paid out.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the number of start memories as a process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that operates constantly is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is finished when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). It becomes.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process by a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 155, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first uses the first start port sensor 3422. On condition that the detection signal is in the on state (the ball enters the first start port 2201) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and is obtained from the RAM number. A first start port passing process such as storing in one special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S32). Further, on condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2593 is in an ON state (the ball enters the second start port 2587b) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second start port passage process is performed such as obtaining from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a branch sensor valid flag indicating that the branch sensor is being controlled is set (step S35). If the branch sensor valid flag is set, the branch sensor valid state is branched. A branch sensor passage process (step S40) for monitoring whether or not a game ball passes through the sensor 2620 is executed.

  On the other hand, if the branch sensor valid flag is not set, a big hit in-progress flag indicating that the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state, or payout appearance (the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter is given to the player) It is determined whether or not any of the payout appearance executing flag indicating that the payout notice is being executed is set (step S36), and the big hit execution flag or the payout appearance execution flag is set. If either of these is set, after executing the jackpot control process (step S41) for controlling the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that the jackpot running flag is set, at the end of the jackpot gaming state, Instructs the payout of the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter (sets the payout execution flag) and sets the payout appearance executing flag. Demonstration execution flag executes the payout effect execution processing for monitoring whether or not during the execution of the payout effect based on the fact that has been set (step S42).

  In the jackpot control process (step S41), the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is “4R normal jackpot A (unspecified 1)”. , When it becomes a mode that suggests “4R latent hit big hit (specific 1)” and “4R positive hit big hit (specific 3)”, the first big prize opening 2102 is set according to the 4R big hit game state that is open for a long time. When the control is set to the open state and “4R sudden hit big hit A (specific 2)” is suggested, the second big prize opening 2509 is controlled to be open according to the 4R big hit game state that is open for a short time. , "4R normal big hit B (non-specific 2)", "4R normal big hit C (non-specific 3)", "4R normal big hit D (non-specific 4)" According to 4R jackpot gaming status When the mouth 2102 is controlled to be in an open state and “12R probable big hit A (specific 4)” and “12R probable big hit B (special 5)” are suggested, it corresponds to the 12R big hit gaming state that is open for a long time. When the second grand prize winning opening 2509 is controlled to be in an open state and “16R probability variation big hit (specific 7)” is suggested, the second big prize winning is selected according to the 16R big hit gaming state that is open for a long time. A process for controlling the mouth 2509 to the open state is executed.

  In the jackpot control process (step S41), after the opening control of the first big prize opening 2102 or the second big prize opening 2509 is performed, each set process of the high probability flag, the hourly flag, and the hourly number counter is executed. . The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state, and a big hit (specific 1 4R latent probability big hit) which is controlled to a high probability state (high probability short-time state, high probability non-short-time state) after the big hit gaming state ends. , Specific 2 4R sudden change big hit A, specific 3 4R positive change big hit, specific 4 12R positive change big hit A, specific 5 12R positive change big hit B, specific 6 4R sudden change big hit B, specific 7 16R positive change big hit) It is set when the big hit game state is terminated, and is reset by a first special symbol stop process shown in FIG.

  In addition, the time-short flag is a flag indicating that the time-short state, and is a big hit (non-time-short state (low-probability non-time-short state) which is controlled to a time-short state (high probability time-short state, low probability time-short state) after the big hit gaming state. This is set when the big hit gaming state based on the non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A and the big hit excluding the specific 1 4R latent big hit) during the control of the high probability non-time-short state) is ended. When the hour / short flag is the next big hit or when the counter value of the hour / short number of times flag becomes “0”, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. Reset by processing.

  The short-time counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of times that the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is displayed as the number of times the short-time state continues. The short-time state (high probability) Of the big hits controlled in the short-time state and low-probability short-time state), the big hits (non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A and specific 1 in the control of the short-time state) are set as a predetermined number of times of the short-time state (number of short-time states) When the big hit gaming state based on 4R latent big hit, non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4R normal big hit D) is ended at that time The number of times is set, and the time-count counter is counted down every time the special symbol variation display is executed until the counter value becomes “0”, but the counter value is “0”. When it is the next big hit before becomes the (return the counter value to "0") which is reset by the second special symbol stop processing without first special symbol stop processing or illustrated shown in FIG. 165 which will be described later.

  If neither the big hit execution flag nor the payout appearance execution flag is set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is On condition that it is “0” (step S37), the first special symbol process including the lottery processing relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), and the second special symbol is processed. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the reserved storage area is not “0” (step S37), the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is displayed. A second special symbol process including the lottery process is executed (step S39). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S32).

  If it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first start port sensor 3422 is in the on state and a game ball has entered the first start port 2201, then as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first obtains the counter value by the first special reservation number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S41. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned number of reserved special symbols is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S41, if it is determined that the number of the first special symbol hold is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol on hold. The processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S42, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing in step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S44, the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reserved number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 4100a is used as the processing in step S44. To store.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S41 that the number of the first special symbol hold is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S42 to S44, the first special symbol variation display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S34).

  If it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2593 is in an ON state and a game ball has entered the second start port 2587b, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S51. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum value “4”.

  In the process of step S51, if it is determined that the second special symbol hold count is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol on hold. The processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S52, the second special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing in step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as the processing of step S54, the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reserved number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 4100a is used as the processing in step S54. To store.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S51 that the second special symbol hold count is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S52 to S54, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for the determination. Since only the table is different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed in accordance with the first special symbol process flag.

1. A first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is read, and a lottery process for a display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol is performed based on the read first special random number. Symbol normal processing (step S80)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which the determination process of the first special symbol variation control stop mode is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop )
3. The lottery regarding the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process in which processing is performed (step S82)
4). First special symbol variation process that waits until the first special symbol variation display on the first special symbol indicator 1185 is stopped (step S83).
5. The first special symbol indicator 1185 displays the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 154).

  FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 159, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S101. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol that is in the hold state, then in step S102, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. The random number stored in the first storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first design random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol being read is read from the RAM. . Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is stored in each storage area. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4 and stores the random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  And after that, as a process of step S105, based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol, a big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the big win is performed. Thereafter, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S81) (step S106), the processing is terminated.

  FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S105).

  If the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability short time state, high probability non-short time state) (step S111), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a high probability state shown in FIG. 161 (A). A jackpot determination table is selected (step S112). If the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), a jackpot determination table at a low probability shown in FIG. 161 (A) is selected (step S113) and selected. The big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S114).

  The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 161 (A) is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and when the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-short time state) and short time state (low probability short time state)). And a jackpot determination table for a high probability used when the gaming state is a high probability (a high probability non-short-time state, a high-probability short-time state). Then, in the jackpot determination table at the low probability, it is coincident with the jackpot determination value indicating that the three types of first special random numbers have won the jackpot, and the 1168 types of first special random numbers are determined to be out of place. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the values. Note that, in the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, the low probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is compared with the first special random number. In the same way as the jackpot determination table at the low probability referred to in order to match the jackpot determination value indicating that the three types of second special random numbers are won, the 1168 types of second special random numbers are out of the above. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the loss determination value indicating that the

  Further, in the jackpot determination table at the high probability, 24 types of first special random numbers including the first special random number identical to the first special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the low probability coincide with the jackpot determination value, The first special random numbers are associated with each other so that 1147 types of first special random numbers coincide with the loss judgment value. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability short-time state, high probability non-short time state), the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit is won is a low probability (normal state (low probability non-short time state) ) And time-short state (low probability time-short state)). In the second special symbol process performed in step S39 of the special symbol process, the high probability jackpot determination table referred to compare with the second special random number is compared with the first special random number. Therefore, 24 kinds of second special random numbers including the second special random numbers that are the same as the second special random numbers set in the low probability jackpot determination table are given to the jackpot as in the case of the high probability jackpot determination table referred to The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that it has been won and to match the loss determination values indicating that the 1147 types of second special random numbers are out of place.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process and determines that it is a jackpot (step S115). ), The big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won by the big win is set and the process is terminated (step S116), and the first special read out in step S102 of the selected big hit determination table and the first special symbol normal process As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that they are out of place, the reach determination table shown in FIG. 161 (B) is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S117).

  The reach determination table shown in FIG. 161 (B) is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a. And a non-time / reach reach determination table used when the game state is non-time / short-time (high probability non-time / short state, low probability non-time / short state). In the reach determination table at the time reduction, the reach random numbers are not matched with the reach determination values indicating that all 239 types of reach random numbers are reached, and are not matched with the reach determination values indicating not reach. Each is associated. In this way, when it is determined that the time is out of reach, it is not determined that the reach is out, so that the reach flag described later is not set and the reach effect is not executed. For this reason, when a reach is formed in a short time and a reach effect is executed, it can be recognized that it will be a big hit at that time, and the reach effect can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

  Further, in the reach determination table for non-time reduction, the reach is matched with the reach determination value indicating that the 12 types of reach random numbers are reached, and the reach determination value indicating that the 227 types of reach random numbers are not reached. Each random number is associated. As described above, the reach determination value indicating the reach is provided in the non-time reduction, unlike the time reduction. For this reason, even if a reach is formed in a non-short time and a reach effect is executed, it is not possible to recognize whether or not it is a big hit until all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S117) and determines that the reach is shifted (step S118), the change A reach flag indicating that becomes reach is set, and the process ends (step S119).

  FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 162, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S121).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU 4100a compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 161 (C). (Step S122) The type of jackpot is determined, and the mode at the time of variable control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (Step S123). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, the first special symbol is determined to be the off symbol as a mode when the first special symbol is stopped (step S124).

  As shown in FIG. 161 (C), the symbol determination table includes each determination result (non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4R normal big hit D, specific 1 4R latent big hit A, specific 2 4R sudden big hit A, specific 3 4R positive big hit, specific 4 12R positive big hit A, specific 5 12R positive big hit B, specific 6 4R big hit Symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) are stored in association with jackpot B and specific 7 16R probability variation jackpot. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the first symbol random number is set different from the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the second symbol random number. ing.

In particular,
1. Closed after opening the first grand prize opening 2102 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 2111 detects that nine game balls have won the first big prize opening 2102 By repeating the opening / closing pattern 4 times (4 rounds), the game is controlled to a 4R big hit game state in which a game ball can enter the first grand prize opening 2102 (easy), and a non-short state (low probability non-short state, high probability) If it is controlled in the non-time-short state), it will control to the low-probability non-time-short state after the end of the 4R big hit gaming state, while it will be controlled to the time-short state (high-probability time-short state, low-probability time-short state) After the 4R jackpot gaming state ends, control is made to a low probability short-time state until the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is displayed 30 times (low when the special symbol variation display exceeds 30 times) Non-probability It has been made to transition control) in state, a non-specific 1 as the execution timing of the fate selection chance effect 4R normal big hit A
2. Closed after opening the first grand prize opening 2102 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 2111 detects that nine game balls have won the first big prize opening 2102 By repeating the opening / closing pattern 4 times (4 rounds), the game is controlled to a 4R big hit game state in which a game ball can enter the first grand prize opening 2102 (easy), and a non-short state (low probability non-short state, high probability) If it is controlled in the non-time-short state), it will control to the high-probability non-time-short state after the end of the 4R big hit gaming state, while it will be controlled to the time-short state (high-probability time-short state, low-probability time-short state) After the 4R jackpot gaming state ends, control is performed in a high-probability short-time state until the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is displayed 30 times (high when the special symbol variation display exceeds 30 times) Non-probability Been made to transition control) in state, particular 1 to be execution timing fate selection chance effect 4R latent 確大 per 3. By opening and closing the second big prize opening 2509 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then closing it four times, the second big prize opening 2509 is controlled to a 4R big hit gaming state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second big prize opening 2509. 3. After the end of the 4R jackpot gaming state, control is made to a high-probability time-short state until it becomes a big hit again, and it is a specific 2R sudden hit big hit that triggers the execution of a fate selection chance effect. Closed after opening the first grand prize opening 2102 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 2111 detects that nine game balls have won the first big prize opening 2102 By repeating the opening / closing pattern four times (four rounds), control is made to a 4R big hit gaming state in which a game ball can enter the first big winning opening 2102 (easy), and after the 4R big hit gaming state ends, the big hit is again made 4. Specific 3R probability variation big hit that controls to high probability short-time state up to 5. After the second grand prize opening 2509 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the second count sensor 2578 detects that nine game balls have won the second big prize opening 2509. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 12 times (12 rounds), the game is controlled to a 12R big hit game state in which a game ball can enter the second big prize opening 2509 (easy), and after the 12R big hit game state is finished, the big hit is made again. 4R 12V probability variation big hit A that controls to high probability short-time state up to
6). After the second grand prize opening 2509 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the second count sensor 2578 detects that nine game balls have won the second big prize opening 2509. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 12 times (12 rounds), the game is controlled to a 12R big hit game state in which a game ball can enter the second big prize opening 2509 (easy), and after the 12R big hit game state is finished, the big hit is made again. Up to a high probability short-time state, and a specific 5 12R probability variation big hit B that triggers the execution of a fate selection chance effect.
7). By opening and closing the first big prize opening 2102 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then closing it four times, the game is controlled to a 4R big hit gaming state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first big prize opening 2102. , After the end of the 4R jackpot gaming state, control is performed in a low-probability short-time state until the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is displayed ten times (the special symbol variation display exceeds 10 times). Non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B that sometimes triggers execution of a fate-branch effect.
8). By opening and closing the first big prize opening 2102 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then closing it four times, the game is controlled to a 4R big hit gaming state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first big prize opening 2102. , After the end of the 4R jackpot gaming state, control is performed in a low-probability short-time state until the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is displayed 20 times (the special symbol variation display exceeds 20 times). Non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C that sometimes triggers the execution of the fate branch effect.
9. By opening and closing the first big prize opening 2102 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then closing it four times, the game is controlled to a 4R big hit gaming state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first big prize opening 2102. , After the end of the 4R jackpot gaming state, control is performed in a low probability short time state until the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is displayed 30 times (the special symbol variation display exceeds 30 times) Non-specific 4 4R normal jackpot D that triggers the execution of the fate branch effect.
10. By opening and closing the second big prize opening 2509 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then closing it four times, the second big prize opening 2509 is controlled to a 4R big hit gaming state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second big prize opening 2509. In this case, after the end of the 4R jackpot gaming state, control is made to a high-probability time-short state until a big hit is again made.
11. After the second grand prize opening 2509 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the second count sensor 2578 detects that nine game balls have won the second big prize opening 2509. The opening / closing pattern is repeated 16 times (16 rounds) to control the 16R big hit gaming state in which the game ball can enter the second big prize opening 2509 (easy), and after the 16R big hit gaming state ends, the big hit is made again. It is controlled to a high probability short-time state, and it is determined as any one of 11 types of big hits of 16R probability variation big hits of specific 7 that will be the trigger of the fate branch effect.

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. The symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol is set so that the judgment value distribution is different from that of the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, and the determination ratio of each jackpot is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161 (C), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, the non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, the specific 1 4R latent big hit, the specific 2 4R sudden big hit The decision value distribution is set only for A, specific 3 4R probability variation big hit, specific 4 12R probability variation big hit A, and specific 5 12R probability variation big hit B, while the symbol determination corresponding to the second special symbol is determined. In the table, judgment values are only for non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4R normal big hit D, specific 6 4R sudden hit big hit B, specific 7 16R right big hit big Is set.

  In this example, the opening time of the first big prize opening 2102 per round in the big hit gaming state with the non-specific 1, specific 1, 3 and non-specific 2-4 (the opening / closing member 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is The opening control time is different. Specifically, in the case of non-specific 1 and specific 1 and 3, the opening time of the first big prize opening 2102 per round is controlled to be opened for a long time of 28.5 seconds. In the case of non-specific 2 to 4, the opening time of the first big prize opening 2102 per round is controlled to be a short time opening that is 0.5 seconds that is extremely shorter than the long time opening. . Thus, when it becomes non-specific 2-4, since the opening time of the said 1st big prize opening 2102 per round is too short, opening control of the opening / closing member 2104 of the said attacker unit 2100 was recognized. Even so, it is difficult to win a game ball in the first big prize opening 2102. In other words, during the control of the big hit gaming state that is open for a short time using the first big prize opening 2102, there is almost no gaming ball winning in the first big prize opening 2102, and the first big prize opening 2102 is. Unlike during the control of a big hit game state that is opened for a long time using, a large number of game balls cannot be expected.

  Similarly to the above, in this example, in the specific 2, 6 and specific 4, 5, 7, the opening time of the second big winning opening 2509 per round in the big hit gaming state (the second attacker unit 2570 The time for controlling the opening of the second opening / closing member 2572) is varied. Specifically, when it becomes specified 4, 5, and 7, the opening time of the second big prize opening 2509 per round is controlled to open for a long time of 28.5 seconds, whereas specified In the case of 2,6, the opening time of the second big prize opening 2509 per round is controlled to be a short time opening that is 0.5 seconds, which is extremely shorter than the long time opening. In this way, when it becomes specified 2 or 6, since the opening time of the second big prize opening 2509 per round is too short, the opening control of the second opening / closing member 2572 of the second attacker unit 2570 is performed. Even if it is recognized, it is difficult to win a game ball in the second big prize opening 2509. In other words, during the control of the big hit gaming state that is opened for a short time using the second big prize opening 2509, the game balls rarely win the second big prize opening 2509, and the second big prize opening 2509. Unlike during the control of a big hit game state that is opened for a long time using, a large number of game balls cannot be expected.

  Although details will be described later, in the non-time-short state (low-probability non-time-short state, high-probability non-time-short state), even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301, the door member 2589 is not driven. For this reason, in the non-time-short state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2587b does not occur, and the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2201 only occurs by hitting the left, and the second special Except when there is a holding ball of the symbol, only the first special symbol variable display on the first special symbol display 1185 is executed, and the big hit (non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, specific 1 4R latent probability hits, specific 2 4R sudden hits hit A, specified 3 4R predictive change hits, specified 4 12R predictive change hits A, specified 5 12R predictive change hits B) occur. On the other hand, in the short-time state (high-probability short-time state, low-probability short-time state), the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301, so that the door member 2589 is driven. Therefore, in the short-time state, as long as the player strikes to the right, only the winning of the game ball to the second start opening 2587b occurs, and in the second special symbol display 1186, unless there is a holding ball of the first special symbol. Only the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and the big hits related to the second special symbol (non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4R normal big hit D, specific 6 4R sudden hit big hit B, specific 7 16R chance big hit).

  In addition, the jackpot related to the first special symbol can be controlled to the 4R jackpot gaming state or the 12R jackpot gaming state as the jackpot gaming state that is opened for a long time, whereas the jackpot related to the second special symbol is a long time. The ratio determined to be a big hit (specific 7R 16-variable big hit) that can be controlled to the 16R big hit gaming state as the open big hit gaming state and further controlled to the 16R big hit gaming state that is open for a long time related to the second special symbol. Since it is set to 75%, a game based on winning a game ball to the second start port 2587b is executed by hitting the right side. In a short time state, a game to the first start port 2201 is made by hitting the left side. It is possible to acquire a large amount of prize balls as compared to a non-time-saving state in which a game based on winning a ball is executed.

  Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A is determined, the 4R normal big hit A symbol is determined as the big hit symbol, and when the specific 1R 4R latent big hit is determined, the 4R latent big hit symbol is determined as the big hit symbol. If it is determined to be a big hit symbol, if it is determined to be a specific 2R 4R accuracy big hit A, it will be decided to be a 4R accuracy big hit A symbol as a big hit symbol, and if it is determined to be a specific 3R 4R positive variation big hit symbol, it will be a 4R positive variation big hit symbol as a big hit symbol When the 4R 12R probability variation big hit A is decided, the 12R probability variation big hit A symbol is decided as the big hit symbol, and when the 12R certain variation big hit B is decided the specific 5R, the 12R probability variation big hit B symbol is decided. To decide. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when the non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B is determined, the 4R normal big hit B symbol is determined as the big hit symbol, and the non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C is determined. In this case, the 4R normal big hit C symbol is determined as the big hit symbol, and the 4R normal big hit D symbol is selected as the non-specific 4R normal big hit D. If it is determined, the 4R sudden hit big hit B symbol is determined as the big hit symbol, and if it is determined as the specific 7 16R big hit bonus symbol, it is decided as the big hit symbol as the 16R positive big hit symbol.

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as the process of step S125, these lottery results (indicating either the type of jackpot, the reach out of the reach, or the off (the stop symbol form of the first special symbol) The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that it may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S126, this process is terminated. The peripheral control MPU 4140a starts the left / middle / right decorative symbol variation display based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command, and stops and displays the left ornament symbol → right ornament symbol → middle ornament symbol order. In this way, the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether the decoration symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 has a variation stop mode (stop symbol) from the received determination result notification command from the jackpot related to the first special symbol. When the non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A is specified, the 4R normal big hit A symbol (the combination of the same symbols excluding “3” and “7” among the symbols “1” to “9”) is determined. When a specific 1R 4R latent hit is specified, it is determined to be a 4R latent hit per symbol (common with the 4R normal big hit A symbol). The left and right decorative symbols are determined to be the same symbols except “3” and “7” among the symbols “1” to “9”, and the middle decorative symbol is determined to be different from the left and right decorative symbols). Specific 5 12R probability variation big hit B When specified, the 12R probability variation big hit B symbol (common with the 4R normal big hit A symbol) is determined, and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of reach production), the determined stop symbol is Display control is performed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. As described above, when the symbol “fate-branching symbol” as the middle ornament symbol after the formation of the reach symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is suspended, it is a big hit from the ornament symbol symbol. However, it is not possible to determine any one of the non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, the specific 1 4R latent likelihood big hit, the specific 2 4R sudden hit big hit A, and the specific 5 12R probability big hit B. In addition, when the 4R sudden hit big hit A of 2 is specified, the left / right / right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as symbols that are two or more different symbols, so it is possible to determine whether or not it is a big hit. It becomes difficult.

  In this example, non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, specific 1 4R latent big hit, specific 2 4R sudden big hit A, specific 5 out of big hits related to the first special symbol from the received determination result notification command. When the 12R probability variation big hit B is specified, the fate selection chance effect is produced as an effect using the branch sensor 2620 that allows the game ball to pass within the game area 1100 after the fluctuating stop of the left and right decorative symbols with the same symbol. Is supposed to run. In this fate selection chance effect, if a game ball passes through the branch sensor 2620 and is detected by making a so-called right strike, a non-specific 1R 4R normal big hit A or a specific 1R 4R based on the determination result notification command An effect result is derived that suggests whether it is a potential big hit, a specified 2 4R sudden hit big hit A, or a specified 5 12R odd big hit B.

  Specifically, as an effect result of the fate selection chance effect, the non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A or the specific 1 4R latent big hit is identified from the big hits related to the first special symbol from the received determination result notification command. In this case, the result is determined to indicate a non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A or a specific 1 4R latent big hit A. If a specific 2 4R sudden big hit A is specified, a specific 2 4R sudden big hit A is suggested. If the specified 5R 12R probability variation jackpot B is specified, the performance result suggesting the specified 512R probability variation jackpot B is determined. As described above, when an effect result indicating a non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A or a specific 1 4R latent big hit is derived as an effect result of a fate selection chance effect, a non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A or a specific 1 It is not possible to determine which of the 4R latent hit big hits, and it can be determined that the 4R big hit gaming state that is opened for a long time using the first big winning opening 2102 is controlled. After completion, it cannot be determined whether to control to a low probability non-time-short state or to control to a high probability non-time-short state. Then, after the 4R jackpot gaming state is finished, since it enters a probability variation latent mode in which it is difficult to determine whether or not it is in a high probability non-time-short state, it is determined whether or not it is controlled to a high probability non-time-short state. I can't.

  On the other hand, when an effect result that suggests a specific 2R 4R hit big hit A is derived as the play result of the fate selection chance effect, the game is controlled to a 4R jackpot gaming state that is opened for a short time using the second big prize opening 2509, It can be determined that the high probability time-short state is controlled after the end of the 4R big hit gaming state. Further, when an effect result indicating the 5R 12R probability variation jackpot B is derived as the effect result of the fate selection chance effect, control is made to the 12R jackpot gaming state that is opened for a long time using the second big prize opening 2509, It can be determined that the high probability time-short state is controlled after the end of the 12R big hit gaming state. Then, after the 4R jackpot gaming state or 12R jackpot gaming state ends, it enters into the probability changing middle mode in which it can be determined that it is a high probability short-time state (probability changing state), and it is clearly controlled that it is controlled to the high probability short-time state. Can be determined.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a specific 3 out of the jackpots related to the first special symbol from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped. When 4R probability variation big hit is specified, it is determined as 4R probability variation big hit symbol (combination of "3" among symbols "1" to "9"), and when 12R specific variation big hit A of 4 is specified, 12R probability variation is determined. The big hit A symbol (the combination of “7” among the symbols “1” to “9”) is determined, and the determined stop when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the reach production) The display is controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. As described above, when the combination of the same decorative symbols as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 stops variably, it is either the specified 3 4R probability variation big hit or the specific 4 12R probability variation big hit. A high probability short-time state after the end of the long-open 4R big hit gaming state using the first big winning opening 2102 or the long-open 12R big hit gaming state using the second big winning opening 2509 Can be determined. Then, after the 4R jackpot gaming state or 12R jackpot gaming state ends, it enters into the probability changing middle mode in which it can be determined that it is a high probability short-time state (probability changing state), and it is clearly controlled that it is controlled to the high probability short-time state. Can be determined.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the decoration symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 as a stop mode (stop symbol) from the received determination result notification command to the non-specific 2 When 4R normal big hit B is specified, the 4R normal big hit B symbol (the left and right decorative symbols are the same symbols (reach symbols) among the symbols “1” to “9”), and the middle decorative symbol is “fate branch symbol” ”Is a combination of decorative symbols and symbols.” The symbol drawn as “fate-branching symbol” is determined to be a symbol that can appear as a medium ornament symbol only after the reach symbol is formed) When non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C is specified, 4R normal big hit C symbol (common with 4R normal big hit B symbol) is determined, and when non-specific 4 4R normal big hit D is specified 4R normal big If the specified 6R 4R rush big hit B is specified, the 4R rush big hit B symbol (common with the 4R normal big hit B symbol) is determined and specified 7 When the 16R probability variable big hit is specified, it is determined as the 16R probability variable big hit symbol (common with the 4R normal big hit B symbol), and is determined when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the reach production). The stop symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. As described above, when the symbol “fate-branching symbol” as the middle ornament symbol after the formation of the reach symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is suspended, it is a big hit from the ornament symbol symbol. However, non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4R normal big hit D, specific 6 4R sudden hit big hit B, specific 7 16R right big hit hit Either cannot be determined.

  In this example, the big hits (non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4R normal big hit D, specific When the 6R 4R sudden hit big hit B and the specific 716R big odd hit are specified, after the left and right decorative symbols (reach symbols) are stopped and displayed based on the variation pattern command, the specific reach effect (fate branch effect is displayed) (Reach production that triggers the execution). Then, at the elapse of the variation time specified from the variation pattern command (at the end of the reach production), after the symbol depicted as “fate branch symbol” as the medium decoration symbol is suspended, A fate branch effect is executed as an effect using the branch sensor 2620 through which a game ball can pass. In this fate-branch effect, if a game ball passes through the branch sensor 2620 and is detected by making a so-called right-hand hit, whether or not it is a specific 7R probability variation big hit based on the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command. The production results that suggest this are derived. As described above, when the effect result of the fate branch effect is derived, it is determined from the effect result whether or not it is a specific 7R probability variation big hit, and a 16R big hit game that is opened for a long time using the second big prize opening 2509 is determined. It is possible to determine whether or not to control to a high probability time-short state after the 16R big hit gaming state ends.

  Specifically, as a result of the fate-branch effect, if a specific 7 16R probable big hit is specified from the received judgment result notification command in relation to the second special symbol, a specific 7 16R probable big hit is suggested. If the non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, the non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, the non-specific 4 4R normal big hit D, and the specific 6 4R sudden hit big B are determined The production result suggests a big hit other than the 16R probability variation big hit. Thus, when an effect result that suggests a specific 7R probability variation jackpot of 7 is derived as an effect result of the fate branch effect, control is made to a 16R jackpot gaming state that is opened for a long time using the second big prize opening 2509, It can be determined that the high probability time-short state is controlled after the end of the 16R jackpot gaming state. Then, after the end of the 16R big hit gaming state, it is possible to clearly enter that the high probability short-time state (probability variation state) is entered and the probability change middle mode in which the high probability time-short state is controlled is controlled. .

  On the other hand, when an effect result that suggests a big hit other than a specific 7R probability variable big hit is derived as an effect result of a fate branch effect, a non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, a non-specific 3R 4R normal big hit C, a non-specific 4 It is not possible to determine whether the 4R normal big hit D or the specific 6R sudden hit big hit B is, and it is determined to control to the 4R big hit gaming state that is opened for a short time using the first big winning opening 2102. Although it is possible to control to the low probability short time state or the high probability short time state after the end of the 4R big hit gaming state, it is impossible to determine how long the short time state continues. In addition, after the 4R big hit game state is finished, it enters the short time medium mode in which it can be determined that the state is a short time state, and the change display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 10 times. In addition, the effect of whether or not the time reduction mode is continued is executed. That is, in the case of non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, when the special symbol variation display is executed 10 times, an effect result that does not continue the time reduction mode is derived, and the low probability time reduction state is terminated to reduce the low Transition control to the probabilistic non-short-time state In addition, in the case of non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, the effect result that continues the time reduction mode is derived when the special symbol variation display is executed 10 times, but the time reduction is obtained when it is executed 20 times. An effect result that does not continue the medium mode is derived, and the low-probability short-time state is terminated and the transition control to the low-probability non-short-time state is performed. In addition, in the case of non-specific 4 4R normal big hit D, the effect result to continue the mode is displayed when the special symbol variation display is executed 10 times or 20 times, but it is executed 30 times. Sometimes, an effect result that does not continue the time reduction mode is derived, the low probability time reduction state is terminated, and the transition control to the low probability non-time reduction state is performed. In addition, when it is a specific 6R sudden hit big hit B, when the special symbol variation display is executed 10 times or 20 times, and the effect result of continuing the hourly / shortest mode is derived and executed 30 times In addition, since the effect result that shifts from the short-to-medium mode to the probability-changing mode is derived, it can be clearly determined that the high-probability short-time state is controlled.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the variation of the decoration symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900, when the reach error is specified from the received determination result notification command, the error is accompanied by reach. If the design is determined to be a combination of decorative designs that are not the same (but the left and right decorative designs are the same), and a detachment is specified, it is a detachable design (a combination of decorative designs that is not the same. When the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900.

  FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 163, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the big hit flag. If so (step S141), the type of jackpot determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state are selected (step S141). If the reach flag is set (step S143), a reach variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the current gaming state is selected (step S144), and both the big hit flag and the reach flag are selected. If it is not set, that is, it will be a normal off-line (a non-reach effect is not executed) To selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S145).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S146), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 4010 is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is started (step S147). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets the variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S149). As a result, presentation control is performed in the first special symbol display 1185, the main liquid crystal display device 1900, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 for the variation time thus determined.

  A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random numbers, second special random numbers) and design random numbers (first design random numbers, second design random numbers). The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Each variable random number is stored in association with each other. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a selects the selected variation pattern table from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables corresponding to the determination result based on the special random number and the design random number and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. And the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is obtained from this table, thereby determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Further, the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set so as to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number. . For example, the super reach effect of the reach effect is higher in the big hit expectation level than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation level for the big hit game state is increased.

  When the first special symbol variation display control is started, the first special symbol process flag is set so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) as the process of step S149. At the time of updating, this process is terminated.

  In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, the special symbol random time (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is associated with the special symbol random time information set to about 1 second when the time is short. When the time is short, the variation pattern of the special symbol is set such that the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol). In other words, the variation pattern at the time of loss selected at the time reduction is compared with the variation pattern at the time of non-time reduction so that the time required for the variation display control of the special symbol is extremely short. Symbol variation time information is set.

  FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 164, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S171. As the process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is set. If it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 165, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S181. As a process of the above, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol indicator 1185 and the first special symbol display on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 are performed. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the decorative symbol display result corresponding to the symbol stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 4010 (step S182).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the time-shortage counter is set to “0” while the time-shortage flag is set and the time-short state continuation count is set. (Step S183). If the counter value is not “0”, the time counter is counted down (step S184), and then it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short counter is “0” (step S185). . As a result, if the counter value is “0”, the time reduction flag is reset (step S186). If it is determined in the process of step S183 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is “0”, or if it is determined in the process of step S185 that the time reduction counter is not “0”. At that time, the process proceeds to step S187.

  When the big hit flag is set (step S187), among the big hits related to the first special symbol, the big hit (non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, specific 1 It is determined whether or not the 4R latent probability hit of No. 2, the 4R sudden probability hit of No. 2 and the 12R probability variable hit of No. 5 (step S188). And if it is not a big hit that triggers the execution of the fate selection chance effect (if it is a specific 3 4R probability variable big hit or a specific 4 12R probability variable big hit A), a big hit start command is set to indicate that the big hit gaming state is started. (Step S189), a standby time (a period during which a display to start the jackpot gaming state is displayed) until the jackpot gaming state is started (a jackpot round start command is set) is set in the interval timer (step S190). Next, when the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, when the time reduction flag is set, the time reduction flag is reset, and the counter value of the time reduction counter If the value is not “0”, the counter value is reset (returned to “0”), and then a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S191), and the first special symbol is set. When the process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S192), this process is terminated. If it is determined in step 187 that the big hit flag has not been set, the process proceeds to step S192.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S188, if it is determined that a big hit that triggers the execution of the fate selection chance effect, if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and the time reduction flag Is set, the time reduction flag is reset. If the counter value of the time reduction counter is not "0", the counter value is reset (returned to "0"), and then the branch sensor 2620 A branch sensor valid flag indicating that the branch sensor valid state for validating the detection of the game ball is set (step S193), and the process proceeds to step S192. As described above, when it is determined that the big hit is the execution opportunity of the fate selection chance effect, the branch sensor effective flag is set, and it is determined that the branch sensor effective flag is set in step S35 of the special symbol process. Thus, the branch sensor passage process (step S40) is executed.

  In step S188 of the first special symbol stop process, among the big hits related to the first special symbol, the big hits (non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, specific 1 4R latent probabilities that trigger the execution of the fate selection chance effect) It is determined whether or not the big hit, the specified 2 4R sudden hit big hit A, the specified 5 12R positive change big hit B), but in the second special symbol stop process (not shown), the fate of the big hits related to the second special symbol Big hits (non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4R normal big hit D, specific 6 4R sudden big hit B, specific 7 16R right big hit that triggers the execution of branch effects ) Or not. And when it is judged that the big hit that will be the execution opportunity of the fate branch production, the branch sensor valid flag is set and the special symbol process processing In step S35, it is determined that the branch sensor valid flag is set, and the branch sensor passage process (step S40) is executed.

  The big hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010, and the type of big hit (4R normal big hit A, 4R normal big hit B, 4R normal big hit C, 4R normal big hit D, 4R latent big hit per 4R Big hit A, 4R probability variation big hit, 12R probability variation big hit A, 12R probability variation big hit B, 4R sudden accuracy big hit B, 16R probability variation big hit). In step S189, a big hit start command corresponding to the type of big hit (4R normal big hit A start command, 4R normal big hit B start command, 4R normal big hit C start command, 4R normal big hit D start command, 4R latent big hit start command, 4R A sudden start big hit A start command, a 4R positive change big hit start command, a 12R positive change big hit A start command, a 12R positive change big hit B start command, a 4R sudden change big hit B start command, a 16R positive change big hit start command) are set. As a result, an effect corresponding to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1900, the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, the lamp / LED and the speakers 130, 222, 262, and the like.

  In step S190, the waiting time until the big hit gaming state is started is set in the interval timer. When the waiting time set in the interval timer has elapsed, a big hit control process (not shown) (step S41) is performed. The first big prize opening 2102 or the second big prize opening 2509 is controlled to be opened according to the type of jackpot, and the type of jackpot and the current round number are transmitted as commands to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. The corresponding jackpot round start command is set. Further, a predetermined time (for example, 28.5 seconds for a long-time opening, 0.5 seconds for a short-time opening) has elapsed since the first big winning opening 2102 or the second big winning opening 2509 is opened. Or when 9 game balls are won in the first big prize opening 2102 or the second big prize opening 2509 in the opened state, in the big hit control process (step S41) (not shown) The winning opening 2102 or the second big winning opening 2509 is controlled to be closed, and a jackpot round end command corresponding to the type of jackpot and the current number of rounds is set as a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. Unless the number of rounds is finished, the waiting time until the next round is started is set again in the interval timer. As a result, the main liquid crystal display device 1900, the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, the lamp / LED and the speakers 130, 222, 262 or the like.

  FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the above-described payout appearance execution processing (step S194).

  If it is determined in the process of step S210 that the payout appearance executing flag is not set, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs the process of step S211 as shown in FIG. First, it is determined whether or not the big hit gaming state has ended. Specifically, in the jackpot control process (step S41), the jackpot gaming state is executed when triggered by either the jackpot related to the first special symbol or the jackpot related to the second special symbol, It is determined whether or not.

  Next, if it is determined in step S211 that it is the end of the big hit gaming state, a payout execution flag is set and a payout appearance executing flag is set in step S212. Is started (step S213), and the effect time of paying out appearance is set in the effect timer (step S213). As described above, when it is determined that the big hit gaming state is ended, it is determined that a payout execution flag is set in step S212, and a payout execution flag is set in step S307 of a prize ball process described later. Thus, in step S308 of the award ball process, the award ball corresponding to the award ball number counter is paid out to the player. In addition, when it is determined that the big hit gaming state is ended, the player is notified that the winning ball corresponding to the winning ball number counter is paid out to the player following the effect corresponding to the big hit gaming state. While paying out is being executed, the paying appearance executing flag is set in step S212, and the effect time of paying out is set in the effect timer in step S214, so that in step S210 and step S36 of the special symbol process. It is determined that the payout appearance running flag is set, and the payout appearance is executed until the effect timer becomes “0” in step S215 to be described later. If it is determined in the processing of step 211 that it is not the end of the big hit gaming state, the big hit gaming state is being executed, and it is not the timing at which the winning ball according to the winning ball counter is paid out to the player. Therefore, the process is terminated at that time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S210 that the payout appearance executing flag is set, it is determined in step S215 whether or not the effect timer is “0”. If this effect timer is “0”, it is determined that it is time to end the execution of paying out, and this processing is ended when the payout appearance executing flag is reset as the processing of step S216. If it is determined in step S215 that the effect timer is not “0”, the process ends at that time.

  FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the prize ball processing (step S19).

  Now, in the process of step S301, the detection signal of one of the first start port sensor 3422 and the second start port sensor 2593 is in an ON state, and the first start port 2201 and the second start port 2587b If it is determined that any of the game balls has won, as shown in FIG. 180, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs the first start port sensor 3422, A prize ball corresponding to the detection signal of the second start port sensor 2593 is added to the count value of the prize ball number counter. Specifically, when the detection signal of the first start port sensor 3422 is turned on, “3” is added to the count value of the prize ball counter, and the detection signal of the second start port sensor 2593 is turned on. Then, “1” is added to the count value of the prize ball number counter. In other words, even if a game ball wins one of the first start port 2201 and the second start port 2587b, it is simply added to the count value of the award ball number counter, and the winning ball is not immediately paid out. ing. Note that none of the detection signals of the first start port sensor 3422 and the second start port sensor 2593 are in the ON state in the process of step S301, and the first start port 2201 and the second start port 2587b If it is determined that no game ball has been won, the process proceeds to step S303 at that time.

  Next, in step S303, the main control MPU 4110a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the detection signal of the general winning opening sensor 3421 is on, that is, whether the game ball has won the general winning opening 2301 or not. Judge whether or not. If it is determined that the detection signal of the general winning opening sensor 3421 is in the ON state, a payout control command is sent to the payout control board 4110 so that a prize ball corresponding to the detection signal is paid out to the player. Output (step S304). As a result, the payout control MPU 4111a mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744 so as to pay out a prize ball to the player. Specifically, when the detection signal of the general winning opening sensor 3421 is turned on, ten game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301. If it is determined in the process of step S303 that the detection signal of the general winning opening sensor 3421 is not in an on state and a game ball has not been won in the general winning opening 2301, the process proceeds to step S305. Move on to processing.

  Next, in step S305, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether the detection signal of either the first count sensor 2111 or the second count sensor 2578 is on, that is, It is determined whether or not a game ball has won any one of the first big prize opening 2102 and the second big prize winning opening 2509. When it is determined that one of the detection signals of the first count sensor 2111 and the second count sensor 2578 is in an on state, a prize ball corresponding to the detection signals is paid out to the player. The payout control command is output to the payout control board 4110 (step S306). As a result, the payout control MPU 4111a mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744 so as to pay out a prize ball to the player. Specifically, when one of the detection signals of the first count sensor 2111 and the second count sensor 2578 is turned on, 15 game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301. It should be noted that in the processing of step S303, none of the detection signals of the first count sensor 2111 and the second count sensor 2578 is in the on state, and either the first big prize opening 2102 or the second big prize opening 2509 is detected. If it is determined that no game ball has been won, the process proceeds to step S307 at that time.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not a payout execution flag is set as the process of step S307. When it is determined that the payout execution flag is set, it is determined that the big hit gaming state is executed in response to the big win, so that a winning ball corresponding to the winning ball number counter is played. The payout control command is output to the payout control board 4110 so as to be paid out to the payer (step S308). When the payout execution flag is reset (step S309), this process is terminated. As a result, the payout control MPU 4111a mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744 so as to pay out a prize ball to the player. If it is determined in the process of step S307 that the payout execution flag is not set, it is determined that it is not the timing after execution of the big hit gaming state, and the process is terminated at that time.

  FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the branch sensor passage process (step S40).

  If it is determined in the process of step S201 that the detection signal from the branch sensor 2620 is on and it is determined that a game ball has passed to the branch sensor 2620, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot gaming state is started, and starts the jackpot gaming state (sets the jackpot round start command) as a process of step S202. A standby time (a period during which display indicating that the big hit gaming state is started) is set in the interval timer (step S203). Then, after resetting the branch sensor valid flag, when the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S204), this processing is ended. As described above, when it is determined that the game ball has passed to the branch sensor 2620, the big hit execution flag is set, and the big hit execution flag is set in step S37 of the special symbol process. A big hit control process (step S41) is executed.

  In this example, of the big hits related to the first special symbol, the big hits (non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, specific 1 4R latent big hit, specific 2 4R sudden big hit A which are the triggers for the execution of the fate selection chance effect. In the case where it is determined that 12R probability variation big hit B) of specific 5, even after the stop symbol of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol indicator 1185, the game ball passes through the branch sensor 2620. Until, the big hit execution flag is not set, and the big hit control process (step S41) is not executed. Similarly, among the big hits related to the second special symbol, the big hits (non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4R normal big hit D which are triggers for execution of the fate branch effect) If it is determined that the specific 6R sudden hit big hit B and the specific 7 16R positive big hit), even after the stop symbol of the second special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol indicator 1186 The big hit execution flag is not set until the game ball passes through the sensor 2620, and the big hit control process (step S41) is not executed.

  FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol process (step S15).

  If it is determined in step S801 that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2586 is on and it is determined that a game ball has passed to the gate portion 2585a, as shown in FIG. In step S802, the main control MPU 4100a of the control board 4100 first executes a gate section passing process such as acquiring a normal random number of normal symbols from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. To do.

  Next, in the normal symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Normal symbol normal processing in which a normal random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is read out, and a lottery process is performed for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped based on the read normal random number (step S803).
2. Normal symbol variation time determination processing (step S804) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189 based on the ordinary symbol random number.
3. Normal symbol variation process that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 is stopped (step S805).
4). The normal symbol variation display so that the normal symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the normal symbol variation control stop mode is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 1189. Normal symbol stop processing to stop the game (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is a mode that suggests “per-common”, the door member 2589 rotates to accept the game ball to the second start port 2587b. Ordinary electric accessory opening process for executing a process to control the process (step S807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 154).

  FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate section passage processing (step S802).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2586 is on and there is a game ball passing through the gate portion 2585a, as shown in FIG. In step S811, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first obtains the counter value by the above-mentioned normal hold number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of ordinary symbols held is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S811, when it is determined that the number of normal symbols held is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed to newly put the normal symbol variable display control on hold. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S812, the normal holding number counter is incremented (added by 1). In step S813, the normal random number and the normal variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, in step S814, each random number obtained in this way is stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal reserved number counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a.

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S811 that the number of normal symbols held is the maximum value, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly held. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S812 to S814, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process (step S803).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 169, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs the process of step S821. It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is then processed as step S822. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the symbol display mode (for example, ordinary random numbers, ordinary variable random numbers) is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and the normal symbol variation display stored in each storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is stopped. The random number (ordinary random number, ordinary variable random number) related to the display mode is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted in accordance with the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2585a are sequentially from the first (first) area. Remember. When random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate unit 2585a, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. Thereby, the order in which the suspension of the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable symbol control can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the first occurrence). .

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the current game state is a short time state (low probability short time state, high probability short time state) (step S826). ) Is selected (step S826), and if the current gaming state is a non-time-short state (low probability non-time-short state, high probability non-time-short state) (step S825), a non-time-short normal figure determination table (not shown) ) Is selected (step S827), and the selected normal symbol determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal process (step S828).

  In addition, the normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a and is used when the gaming state is short time (low probability short time state and high probability short time state). And a non-time-saving usual time per-judgment determination table that is used when the gaming state is non-time-saving (low-probability non-time-short state, high-probability non-time-short state). Then, in the hourly common figure judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all the 251 kinds of ordinary random numbers coincide with the common figure judgment value indicating that the common figure is won. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that they do not coincide with the usual deviation judgment value indicating that they are off. As described above, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a in the time saving mode, the winning ball is always selected per the usual figure, and the door member 2589 is rotated to move the game ball to the second starting port 2587b. The acceptance is controlled to be possible.

  In addition, in the non-time-saving common figure determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random numbers, all the 251 types of ordinary random numbers may coincide with the common figure determination values indicating that each common figure is won. The normal random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the misplacement determination value indicating the misplacement. As described above, in the non-time saving state, even if a game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a, the door member 2589 is rotated and the second start port 2587b is rotated. It is not possible to control the acceptance of game balls.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected universal symbol determination table with the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal process, and determines that the normal symbol is per unit (step S829). ) After setting the flag for the normal symbol indicating that the variation is won for the normal symbol (step S830), the normal symbol per symbol as the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (the normal symbol is stopped) The symbol is determined (step S831). On the other hand, if the result of comparison between the selected regular symbol determination table and the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing is that it is determined to be out of place, the variation of the normal symbol A non-standard symbol as a mode at the time of control stop (ordinary symbol stop symbol) is determined (step S832). After that, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S804) (step S833), this process is terminated.

  In this example, in the control in the short time state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 251/251, the lottery result of the normal symbol is always a win, and the time required for the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is extremely reduced. It is shortened to a short predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). When the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win, the second starting port 2587b is controlled with an opening / closing pattern that is opened and closed for an extremely long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds). . In other words, during the time-short state control, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol is successful is extremely high, the time required for the variable symbol variable display control is constant and short, and the open state of the second start port 21 This makes it much easier to win a game ball to the second start port 2587b due to a long time, and it is more efficient to aim the second start port 2587b than the first start port 2201. You can win a prize. In the non-time-short state control, it is assumed that the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0/251, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is not always hit, and the second start port 2587b is aimed. In addition, a game ball cannot be awarded to the second starting port 2587b.

  As described above, during control in the non-time-short state, even if the second start port 2587b is aimed, the second start port 2587b cannot win a game ball. In order for the game ball to win, the game ball must be fired (so-called “left-handed”) aiming at the left side of the center bonus 2500. Further, in the game area 1100 on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1200 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball hits the obstacle nails. By touching, various movements are given to the game ball and flow down. For this reason, even if a game ball is shot on the left side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first starting port 2201, it does not necessarily win the first starting port 2201, but wins the first starting port 2201. The game balls that did not exist are discharged to the outside through an out port 1151 provided at the lower center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction.

  On the other hand, during the time-short state control, a game ball can be won more efficiently by aiming at the second start port 2587b than at the first start port 2201. In order to win, the game ball must be launched (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at the right side of the center bonus 2500. Further, due to the structure of the game board 4, when the second starting port 2587b is opened, if a game ball is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 with the aim of the second starting port 2587b, it passes through the gate portion 2585a. The game ball thus won is awarded to the second starting port 2587b with a very high probability. For this reason, during the control in the short-time state, the game ball driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is hardly wasted (discharged to the outside from the out port 1151), and the control in the non-short-time state is being performed. Compared with the first starting port 2201 in the above, the game ball wins the second starting port 2587b extremely efficiently.

  In addition, during the time-short state control, in addition to the structure of the game board 4, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol wins when passing through the gate portion 2585 a is very high, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed. The time required for the control is constant and short, the open time of the second start port 2587b is long, etc., so that a game ball is likely to win the second start port 2587b, and further, the game is played to the second start port 2587b. When the ball is won, the time required for the display control of the special symbol is about 1 second, which is extremely shorter than the range of 10 to 120 seconds during the non-time-short state control. It is possible to digest the symbol variation display control (the suspension of the special symbol variation display control). That is, when the time-short state is controlled after the big hit gaming state, the game ball is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 with the aim of the second start port 2587b, so that the big hit is made again in a short time. It is possible to expect a large number of game balls to be acquired by controlling to the big hit game state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out by winning a game ball to the second start port 2587b is one, so that the game balls to the second start port 2587b are Even if winnings occur frequently, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side while enhancing the interest of the player.

[7. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 170, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S501). In the initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 ms elapses. While the flag T is set, a 16 ms progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process of controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1900, the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board 4100. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapse flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 171 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes of step S601 to step S606. In the command analysis process in step S601, the command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first fluctuation pattern setting process, the process corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second fluctuation pattern setting process)). Fluctuation pattern command sent by being set, sent by being set in the start port passing process (steps S45 and S47 in the first start port passing process, steps S55 and S57 in the second start port passing process) Control processing related to the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 is executed based on reception of the hold number designation command and the random number designation command.

  In the sound control process in step S603, control processes related to the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like are executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to lamps / LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process in step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving substrate 3013 is executed. In the random number update process in step S606, a process of updating random numbers (for example, pre-read random numbers) used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S601-step S606 in a 16ms regular process is complete | finished within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is immediately executed from the beginning when the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady process (command of step S601). Do not execute (from analysis process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop process in the sub-main process and the 16 ms steady process.

[8. Fate branch production using special gate part]
In the present embodiment, the big hits (non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, non-specific 4) related to the second special symbol triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2587b When a 4R normal big hit D, a specific 6 4R sudden hit big hit B, and a specific 7 16R big odd hit) are achieved, the fate branching as an effect using the branch sensor 2620 capable of passing the game ball in the game area 1100 Production is to be executed. In this fate-branching effect, when a game ball passes through the branch sensor 2620 and is detected by making a so-called right hand strike, control of the big hit gaming state according to the big hit type is started and the main liquid crystal display device 1900 The effect result of the fate branch effect is derived, and from the effect result, it is possible to determine whether it is a jackpot having a high profit value for the player or a jackpot having a low profit value for the player. . Specifically, when a performance result corresponding to a specific 7R probability variable jackpot of 7 is derived as a jackpot with a high profit value, the game is controlled to a 16R jackpot gaming state that is opened for a long time using the second jackpot 2509, and After the end of the 16R jackpot gaming state, it is determined that the high-probability short-time state (probably changing mode as a production mode corresponding to the high-probability short-time state) is continued, When the corresponding performance result is derived, the control is controlled to the 4R big hit gaming state that is opened for a short time using the first grand prize winning opening 2102, and after the 4R big hit gaming state is finished, the low probability short time state (low Shifted to the short-time / medium mode as the production mode corresponding to the short-term probability state (however, in the case of specific 4R sudden hit big hit B of 6 is internally high-probability short-time state) It can be determined that the shift to continue).

  This fate branch effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 172 to 176. FIG. 172 is a timing chart in the case where the fate branch effect is executed based on the specific 7R probability variable big hit among the big hits related to the second special symbol. FIG. 173 shows the big hits related to the second special symbol other than the specific 7 16R probability big hit (non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4R normal big hit It is a timing chart in the case of performing a fate branch production based on D, specific 4R sudden probability big hit B). 174 to 176 are specific effect images in the main liquid crystal display device 1900 when the fate branch effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 172 and FIG. 173, when a big hit related to the second special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2587b, first, the non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, It is displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 based on any one of the non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, the non-specific 4 4R normal big hit D, the specific 6 4R sudden hit big hit B, and the specific 7 16R positive hit big hit. Control is made so as to change the display state of the second special symbol.

  Specifically, when the main control MPU 4100a becomes a specific 7R probability variation big hit among the big hits related to the second special symbol, the variation time of the second special symbol (the effect displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900) Time) and the content of the effect displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, the type of reach effect), among the plural types of change patterns, the change pattern that can be determined only at the time of the specific 7R probability variation big hit is determined. . Then, the second special symbol display 1186 starts displaying the variation of the second special symbol, and when the variation time set in the variation pattern at the time of 16R probability variation big hit has elapsed, it is determined as the stop symbol of the second special symbol. The 16R probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, among the big hits related to the second special symbol, big hits other than the specified 7 16R probability big hit (non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4R normal big hit D, specific 6), the variation pattern at the time of 16R probability variation big hit is a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol and the effect content displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 are set the same. As described above, a variation pattern that can be determined only at the big hit other than the 16R probability variation big hit is determined. Then, the second special symbol display 1186 starts displaying the variation of the second special symbol, and when the variation time set in the variation pattern at the big hit other than the 16R probability variation big hit has elapsed, as the stop symbol of the second special symbol. The determined big hit symbol (4R normal big hit B big hit symbol, 4R normal big hit C big hit symbol, 4R normal big hit D big hit symbol, 4R sudden hit big hit B big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed. In addition, when starting the variation display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 1186, the peripheral control board uses the determined jackpot type as the determination result notification command and the determined variation pattern as the variation pattern command. When the stop symbol of the second special symbol is displayed, the stop display command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays a variation display of the decorative symbol on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the received variation pattern command in any case where the jackpot related to the second special symbol is specified from the received determination result notification command. After the left and right decorative symbols (reach symbols) are stopped and displayed, a specific reach effect (a reach effect that triggers execution of a fate branch effect) is executed. Note that, in a specific reach production, an effect is performed in which it is necessary to select a fate whether or not a good production result can be obtained. At the end of the reach effect), the main liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the symbol “fate-branching symbol” as a mid-decoration symbol after the reach symbol is formed based on the received stop display command. Control. That is, when the variation time of the second special symbol elapses (at the end of the specific reach production), the second special symbol display 1186 stops and displays the jackpot symbol determined as the stop symbol of the second special symbol. In the main liquid crystal display device 1900, the right and left decorative symbols are displayed as the same symbol (in the case of the main symbol related to the second special symbol). Reached design), and the combination of the decorative symbols with the middle decorative symbol “fate-branching symbol” as a symbol is stopped and displayed to indicate that it is a big hit related to the second special symbol. It is not notified which one of the big hits related to the two special symbols. In the main liquid crystal display device 1900, in the display of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, it is notified that it is a big hit related to the second special symbol, but it is small on the screen so that it is difficult for the player to determine This is not clearly notified by displaying.

  Next, after the control of the above-described variable display state is completed, that is, after the jackpot symbol determined as the stop symbol of the second special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol indicator 1186, the game ball is detected by the branch sensor 2620. The branch sensor is controlled so as to be effective.

  Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a displays the jackpot symbol determined as the stop symbol of the second special symbol, and then whether the game ball passes through the branch sensor 2620 until the game ball is detected by the branch sensor 2620. Monitor whether or not. When a so-called right turn is made in the branch sensor effective state and a game ball passes through the branch sensor 2620 and is detected, the control of the branch sensor effective state is terminated, and a big hit start command ( 4R normal big hit B start command, 4R normal big hit C start command, 4R normal big hit D start command, 4R sudden hit big hit B start command, 16R probability big hit big start command) are transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the stop display command after finishing the specific reach effect, the fate of whether or not the main liquid crystal display device 1900 can obtain a good effect result following the specific reach effect. The fate branch effect that instructs the branch sensor 2620 to pass the game ball is executed. In other words, in the fate branch effect, the player is notified that the game ball must pass through the branch sensor unit 2109 by making a right turn.

  Next, after the above-described control of the branch sensor effective state is finished, that is, after the game ball passes through the branch sensor 2620 and is detected, it is related to the second special symbol as a big hit game state according to the big hit type. When a specific 7R probable big hit in the big win is reached, control is made to a long-open 16R big hit gaming state using the second big prize opening 2509, and a big win other than the specific 716R probable big hit (non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4R normal big hit D, specific 6 4R sudden big hit B) It is controlled to 4R big hit game state.

  Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a, when a game ball passes and is detected by the branch sensor 2620, when the specific 7R probability variation big hit among the big hits related to the second special symbol is 7 As a big hit gaming state corresponding to the 16R probability variable big hit, after the second big prize opening 2509 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the second big prize winning hole 2509 has won nine game balls. The opening / closing pattern to be closed when detected by the count sensor 2578 is repeated 16 times (16 rounds), thereby controlling the 16R big hit gaming state in which a game ball can enter (easy) the second big prize opening 2509. On the other hand, if the jackpot related to the second special symbol is a jackpot other than the specified 7R probable big hit, the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot other than the specified 7R probable jackpot is set as the first big prize opening. The opening / closing pattern in which the game ball 2102 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then closed is repeated four times, thereby controlling the 4R big hit game state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the first big prize opening 2102. When the first big prize opening 2102 or the second big prize opening 2509 is controlled to be in the open state as the big hit gaming state, a big hit round start command corresponding to the type of big hit and the current number of rounds is sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. When the first big prize opening 2102 or the second big prize opening 2509 is controlled to be closed, a big hit round end command according to the big hit type and the current number of rounds is sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 172, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a 16R probability variable big hit start command during execution of the fate branch effect when the specific 7R probability big hit among the big specials related to the second special symbol is reached. When this is done, a result notification effect is performed as if a good effect result was obtained by selecting the fate based on the passage of the game ball to the branch sensor 2620 in the main liquid crystal display device 1900 as the effect result of the fate branch effect. In this way, by executing the result notification effect corresponding to the specific 7R probability variation jackpot on the main liquid crystal display device 1900, it is clear at the end of the specific reach effect (at the time when the variation time of the second special symbol has elapsed). Is clearly notified that it is a big hit related to the second special symbol that has not been notified, and is notified that it is a specific 7R probability variation big hit among the big hits related to the second special symbol. While the result notification effect corresponding to the specific 7R probability variation jackpot is being executed, the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are sequentially received, but the main liquid crystal display device 1900 receives the 16R probability variation jackpot and the current round. The production according to the number is not executed, and the current round number in the 16R big hit gaming state is not notified. Then, at the end of the result notification effect corresponding to the specific 7R probable jackpot, the 3rd to 4th rounds of the 16R jackpot gaming state (when so-called right-handed) are completed, but the specific 7R of 16R After finishing the result notification effect according to the probability variation jackpot, until the control of the 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state is terminated, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 receives the 16R probability variation jackpot based on the received jackpot round start command and jackpot round end command. And the big hit game effect according to the current number of rounds is executed, and the current round number in the 16R big hit game state is notified so as to be discriminated.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 173, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is a big hit other than the specific 7R probability variable big hit (non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4R normal big hit) among the big hits related to the second special symbol. C, non-specific 4 4R normal big hit D, specific 6 4R sudden hit big hit B), when a big hit start command corresponding to the type of big hit is received during execution of the fate branch direction, As the effect result, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 executes a result notification effect as if a good effect result was not obtained by selection of fate based on the passage of the game ball to the branch sensor 2620. As described above, even if the main liquid crystal display device 1900 executes the result notification effect according to the big hit other than the specific 7R probability variation big hit, when the specific reach effect ends (when the variation time of the second special symbol elapses). As with), it is not clearly notified that it is a big hit related to the second special symbol, and it is not notified which one of the big hits other than the specific 7R probable big hit is 7 and it is as if it is a big hit It is notified as if it is. During execution of the result notification effect according to the big hit other than the specific 7R probability variation big hit, the big hit round start command and the big hit round end command are sequentially received. An effect corresponding to the current number of rounds is not executed, and no notification is given so that the current number of rounds in the 4R big hit gaming state can be determined. In addition, until the end of the result notification effect corresponding to the big hit other than the specific 7 16R probability variation big hit, all rounds in the 4R big hit gaming state that is open for a short period of time have been completed. Such a big hit game production is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, when the game ball wins at the second start opening 2587b as a trigger and a big hit related to the second special symbol is obtained, the second special symbol indicator 1186 displays the second special symbol as a variable display state. After the jackpot symbol determined as the stop symbol is stopped and displayed, the branch sensor 2620 is instructed to pass the game ball to the branch sensor 2620 by the main liquid crystal display device 1900 in a branch sensor valid state, and so-called right-handed to make a branch sensor 2620. When a game ball passes and is detected, the game is controlled to a big hit game state corresponding to the type of big hit. That is, even if the big hit symbol determined as the stop symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol indicator 1186, as long as the game ball is not passed through the branch sensor 2620 by making a right hit, the big hit symbol There is no control to the big hit gaming state according to the type. As described above, when the fate branch effect is executed under the control of the branch sensor enabled state, the player must follow the instruction in the main liquid crystal display device 1900. However, when the game ball is passed through the branch sensor 2620, the big hit is always made. The game is controlled to the big hit game state according to the type of the game, and the player's willingness to participate in the fate branch effect is not reduced.

  In addition, in the case of a normal jackpot (a jackpot that does not trigger the execution of the fate branching effect or the destiny selection chance effect. For example, a jackpot that does not trigger the execution of the destiny selection chance effect among the jackpots related to the first special symbol) After the jackpot symbol determined as the stop symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol indicator 1186 as a variable display state, the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the type of jackpot is not controlled without controlling the branch sensor valid state. It comes to control. In other words, compared to the case of such a normal big hit, when the big hit related to the second special symbol (the big hit that triggers the execution of the fate branch effect), the branch sensor effective state is the type of the big hit It can be said that it is a standby state for controlling to the corresponding jackpot gaming state. As described above, in the standby state (branch sensor effective state) for controlling to the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit type, when the game ball is passed through the branch sensor 2620, the big hit gaming state is controlled immediately thereafter. Thus, the player can start the control of the big hit gaming state at an arbitrary timing. For this reason, for example, it is impossible to recognize at which timing the control of the big hit gaming state is started, and a player's loss such as a game ball aiming at the second grand prize winning hole 2509 is generated. Can be difficult.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a game ball is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (with a strength of a predetermined level or more), it rolls on the right route 1100R side along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100. After the game ball is sent to the branch passage 2510k, it enters the branch sensor 2620 with a very high probability. In other words, during the execution of the fate branch effect (during the control of the branch sensor effective state), it is possible to make the game ball enter the branch sensor 2620 with a very high probability only by making a so-called right strike (however, the right strike is made). Most gaming balls may enter the branch sensor 2620 or all game balls may enter the branch sensor 2620). Therefore, during the execution of the fate branch effect (during the control of the branch sensor effective state), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to lose a game ball that is aimed at the branch sensor 2620 and becomes a useless ball.

  In the present embodiment, when the second big prize opening 2509 is controlled to be in the open state as the big hit game state, the game ball is shot to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (the ball is hit with a predetermined strength or more). ), The game ball that has passed through the branch sensor 2620 enters the attacker passage 2509a and is discharged to the upper side of the second big prize opening 2509. In the game area 1100 on the right side (right route side 1100R) of the center bonus 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails are not provided unlike the game area 1100 on the left side, and the rolling direction of the game ball changes. Nor. For this reason, during the control of the big hit gaming state, it is possible to win the game ball at the second big prize opening 2509 with a very high probability by simply making a so-called right strike. Therefore, during the control of the big hit gaming state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to lose a game ball that is aimed at the second big prize opening 2509 and to make a big hit gaming state digestion. You can make time faster.

  Further, as described in step S202 of the branch sensor passage process, the main control MPU 4100a starts the big hit gaming state when it is determined that the game ball has passed to the branch sensor 2620 during the execution of the fate branch effect. After setting the jackpot start command indicating that the waiting time until the jackpot round start command indicating that the second big prize opening 2509 is actually controlled to be opened is set in the interval timer, An extremely short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the interval timer. That is, when a game ball passes through the branch sensor 2620 during execution of the fate branch effect, the second big prize opening 2509 is controlled to be in an open state as a big hit gaming state after a very short time has elapsed. The time set in the interval timer is set to be shorter than the time from when the game ball passes the branch sensor 2620 until it reaches the second big prize opening 2509 by performing so-called right-handed. Yes. For this reason, when the game ball that has passed through the branch sensor 2620 by making a so-called right strike reaches the second big prize opening 2509, the second big prize opening 2509 is already controlled to be in an open state, and the branch sensor 2620 is controlled. The game ball that has passed through is directly awarded to the second grand prize opening 2509. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the branch sensor 2620 during execution of the fate branch effect (during the control of the branch sensor effective state) does not become a useless ball, and it is possible to make the player's loss as difficult as possible.

  Further, in this embodiment, at the start of the variation of the second special symbol in the variation display state, it is determined whether or not to make a specific 7R probability variation big hit among the big hits related to the second special symbol. In the variable display state, a specific reach effect is executed as a common reach effect, and when the second special symbol changes time (at the end of the specific reach effect), a common decorative symbol ( The right and left decorative symbols are the same symbol (reach symbol), and the middle decorative symbol is a combination of decorative symbols with the symbol “fate-branching symbol”. It is not notified which one of them is a big hit. Then, the result notification effect is executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 as the effect result of the fate branch effect only after the game ball passes through the branch sensor 2620 in the branch sensor enabled state, and whether or not the specific 7R probability variation big hit is 7 Notified. For this reason, regarding whether or not to make a specific 7R probability variable big hit among the big hits related to the second special symbol, before the game ball passes through the branch sensor 2620 (before the execution of the fate branch effect). Although it has been determined, it becomes possible to make it seem as if the player has decided by making it possible to discriminate from the effect result of the fate branch effect triggered by the passage of the game ball to the branch sensor 2620. Therefore, when a fate branch effect that derives whether or not it is a specific 7R probability variation big hit is executed, the player is given a fate branch effect by, for example, timing the game ball passing through the branch sensor 2620. Participate actively.

  In the present embodiment, when the variation time of the second special symbol has elapsed (at the end of the specific reach production), the big special symbol determined as the stop symbol of the second special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 1186. By displaying the stop, it is clearly displayed which of the big hits related to the second special symbol is the big hit, but from the stop symbol of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 It is difficult for the player to discriminate whether or not it is a specific 7R probability variation big hit among the big specials related to the two special symbols, and the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided more conspicuously than the second special symbol display 1186. As a result, the player pays attention to the contents produced in the main liquid crystal display device 1900. Specifically, the second special symbol display 1186 is one of a plurality of LEDs provided in the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180, and is configured by eight LEDs. And in addition to not notifying the player that these 8 LEDs function as the second special symbol display 1186, it is possible to display a plurality of types of lighting patterns by lighting each of the 8 LEDs according to the determination result. Therefore, even if the jackpot symbol determined as the stop symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol indicator 1186, the jackpot symbol is stopped on the second special symbol indicator 1186. It is difficult for the player to grasp that, and from the lighting state of the LED, it is difficult to determine which of the big hits related to the second special symbol. Therefore, until the result notification effect is executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1900 as the effect result of the fate branch effect, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not it is the specific 7R probability variation big hit.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a specific 7R probability variation big hit is identified among the big hits related to the second special symbol, the result notification effect corresponding to the specific 716R probability variable big hit is provided as the effect result of the fate branch effect. It is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, and as a result, it is determined from the notification effect that it is a specific 7R probable big hit, and it is controlled to a 16R big hit gaming state that is opened for a long time using the second big prize opening 2509 and the 16R. It is possible to determine whether or not to control to the high probability short time state after the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, among the big hits related to the second special symbol, big hits other than the specified 7 16R probability big hit (non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4R normal big hit D, specific When the 6R 4R sudden hit big hit B) is specified, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 executes a result notification effect according to the big hit other than the 16R specific variable big hit specified 7 as the effect result of the fate branch effect, and the result is notified. It is determined from the performance that it is not a specific 7R probable big hit, and it is controlled to a 4R big hit gaming state that is open for a short time using the first big winning opening 2102 and is controlled to a low probability time short state after the end of the 4R big hit gaming state. (However, the case where the specific 6R 4R sudden hit big B is specified) can be determined. As described above, the effect result of the fate branch effect is either a result notification effect according to the specific 7 16R probability variation big hit or a result notification effect according to the big hit other than the specific 7 16R probability change big hit. Is executed by one of two alternatives, and there is a great disparity in the profit that the player can obtain from the result of the production. Has come to pay particular attention.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the second big prize opening 2509 is used when the game ball passes to the branch sensor 2620 when a specific 7R probability variation big hit among the big hits related to the second special symbol is reached. At the same time as the control of the 16R jackpot gaming state that is opened for a long time, the execution of the result notification effect corresponding to the specific 16R probability variable jackpot is started as the effect result of the fate branch effect based on the jackpot start command. However, even if the execution of the result notification effect according to the specific 7 16R probability variation jackpot is started, if the result notification effect does not proceed for a while, the player determines whether or not the specific 7R probability variation jackpot has occurred. I can't do that. That is, before the player discriminates whether or not the specific 7 16R probability variation big hit is based on the result notification effect, the control of the 16R big hit gaming state that is opened for a long time using the second big prize opening 2509 is started. It has become. As a result, even if the game ball passes through the branch sensor 2620 by making a so-called right-hand strike during execution of the fate-branch effect, even if the right-hand hit is continued while paying attention to the content of the effect on the main liquid crystal display device 1900, As long as it is a specific 7R probable big hit, the game ball will not be a useless ball, and it will continue to win the game ball at the second big prize opening 2509 with a very high probability, making it difficult for the player to lose. Moreover, the digestion of the big hit gaming state can be accelerated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, among the big hits related to the second special symbol, big hits other than the specific 7R probability variable big hit (non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4R In the case where the normal big hit D and the specified 6 4R sudden hit big hit B) are specified, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 executes the result notification effect according to the big hit other than the specific 16R positive change big hit as the effect result of the fate branch effect. However, before the end of the notification effect as a result, all rounds in the 4R big hit gaming state of short-time opening using the first big winning opening 2102 have ended. As described above, the first grand prize opening 2102 was used while the main liquid crystal display device 1900 was performing the result notification effect corresponding to the big hit other than the 16R probability variation big hit of the specific 7 as the effect result of the fate branch effect. As long as the player pays attention to the notification effect as a result of controlling to the 4R jackpot gaming state that is opened for a short time, the game is controlled to the 4R jackpot gaming state that is opened for a short time using the first big prize opening 2102. This makes it possible to eliminate the player's sense of loss that the player is in a big hit gaming state that is hardly noticed and hardly profits.

  Next, a specific effect example of the fate branch effect in the main liquid crystal display device 1900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 176. In this production example, among the big hits related to the second special symbol, the case where the fate branch production is executed based on the specific 7R probability variable big hit, and the big hit other than the specific 7 16R probability variable big hit (non-specific 2 4R normal hit A case where the fate branch effect is executed based on the big hit B, the non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, the non-specific 4 4R normal big hit D, and the specific 6 4R sudden big hit B) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 174 (A), in any case where the jackpot related to the second special symbol is specified, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 starts displaying the decorative symbols on the basis of the variation pattern, and the left and right ornaments are displayed. As a symbol, the reach symbol (in the present production example, the symbol “7”) is stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, since it is not determined that the reach will be lost in the short time, for the player who knows that, it will be a big hit related to the second special symbol at the time of reaching the reach. And can enjoy a specific reach production with peace of mind.

  As shown in FIG. 174 (B), after the reach symbols are stopped and displayed as the left and right decorative symbols, a specific reach effect is started on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the variation pattern, and a sword is held. An effect is performed in which the hero character is chased by the enemy character. During the execution of a specific reach effect, the left and right decorative symbols (reach symbols) that have already been stopped and the middle decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped are small in the upper left of the screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1900. The display is controlled so as not to stand out. For this reason, the player pays attention to the effect contents of a specific reach effect, not the decorative display of the main liquid crystal display device 1900.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 174 (C), at the end of the specific reach production, the enemy character with the sword is about to be defeated by the enemy character, and “Can the tragedy be avoided?” Is sent to the player. At the end of a specific reach production, the symbol “fate-branching symbol” as a medium decoration symbol after the formation of the reach symbol is variably stopped, but it is small and inconspicuous in the upper left of the screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1900. The display is controlled. As described above, in the main liquid crystal display device 1900, the decorative symbols having the left and right decorative symbols as the same symbol (reach symbol) as the decorative symbol stop symbol and the middle decorative symbol as the symbol “fate branch symbol” are displayed. By displaying the combination, it is notified that it is a big hit related to the second special symbol, but it is clearly notified by displaying it small on the screen so that it is difficult to discriminate to the player. However, it is difficult for the player to determine that it is a big hit related to the second special symbol. At the end of the specific reach production, the big special symbol determined as the second special symbol stop symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol indicator 1186, while the decorative symbol stop symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. By controlling the display of the common stop symbol, it is not possible to determine which of the big hits related to the second special symbol is.

  Next, when a specific 7R probability variable big hit is specified among the big hits related to the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 175 (D), the main liquid crystal display device 1900 branches the fate based on the stop display command. The execution of the effect is started, and a message “Cut out fate!” Is notified to the player, and an instruction “right-handed” is given to the upper right portion of the main liquid crystal display device 1900. In this way, during the execution of the fate branch production, it is required to avoid the occurrence of a tragedy subsequent to the scene in the specific reach production. By passing the game ball through the provided branch sensor 2620, an effect as if the fate of whether or not to avoid the tragedy is selected is executed. It should be noted that, while the fate branch effect is being executed, a dynamic effect image (moving image) is controlled to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900, whereas the fate branch effect is being displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. Display control of a still effect image (still image) including the message “Cut out fate!” Is performed. In this way, during execution of the fate branch effect, unless the player follows the “right-handed” instruction displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900, the stationary effect image will not be switched, and the game or effect Thus, the so-called right-handed is urged to cause the branch sensor 2620 to pass the game ball.

  In this embodiment, a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 2 minutes) from the end of the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol memory display 1184 or the second special symbol display 1186, or the end of the jackpot gaming state, Demonstration introducing the concept of the model and the like so that the player can be interested in the pachinko machine 1 in the main liquid crystal display device 1900 when there is no winning of the game ball in the first start port 2201 or the second start port 2578b. Display of the screen (demo screen) is started. That is, when there is no winning of a game ball at the first start port 2201 or the second start port 2578b, the effect image (still image) stopped on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed and controlled, and display control of the demonstration screen is performed. Until this is started, the stationary effect image is not switched. On the other hand, while the fate branch effect is being executed, the effect image (still image) that is stopped on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed and controlled, but even if the game ball is not passed through the branch sensor 2620, The display control of the demonstration screen is not started, and it is clarified that it is necessary to pass the game ball to the branch sensor 2620, and the so-called right strike is performed to prompt the branch sensor 2620 to pass the game ball. ing.

  In addition, when the execution of the fate branch effect is started, in the area around the main liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game area 1100, the light emission decoration is sequentially performed counterclockwise toward the branch sensor 2620. Specifically, the front right upper decorative board 2611, the front side decorative board 2305, the center left decorative board 2632, the center left upper decorative board 2513 and the like on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted are controlled. 2611, front side decorative board 2305, center left decorative board 2632, center left upper decorative board 2513, by sequentially controlling the light emission, the LED lights up counterclockwise toward branch sensor 2620. Yes. By repeating such a mode in which light flows toward the branch sensor 2620 a plurality of times (for example, two to three times), a so-called right-hand strike is performed so that the game ball passes through the branch sensor 2620. Urging to.

  In addition, during the execution of the fate branch effect, a heart-shaped decoration that is provided in the center base 2510 and can be decorated with light emission after repeating a mode in which light flows toward the branch sensor 2620 several times. The member 2515 (see FIG. 146) is controlled to be decorated with light emission. The heart-shaped decorative member 2515 is disposed at the lower left of the branch sensor 2620, and the heart-shaped decorative member 2515 is turned on by controlling the light emission of the LED mounted on the front upper right decorative substrate 2611 disposed on the back side. be able to. At this time, in the area around the main liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game area 1100, a plurality of LEDs are controlled to be turned off so as to be dark, and only the LEDs on the back side of the heart-shaped decorative member 2515 are controlled to be flashed. By doing so, only the heart-shaped decorative member 2515 in the vicinity of the branch sensor 2620 can be made to stand out, and so-called right-handed is urged to allow the branch sensor 2620 to pass the game ball. As the heart-shaped decorative member 2515 is turned on, a sound similar to a heart sound such as “docking, docking” is provided in each speaker 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Output from the speaker 821 or the like. For example, as shown in FIG. 175 (D), with the effect image displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 being displayed, the above-described sound output is increased as time passes, and the player gradually increases. By continuing to output unpleasant sound, a so-called right-handed strike is made so that the game ball must pass through the branch sensor 2620.

  In this embodiment, when the heart-shaped decorative member 2515 is lit, the LED is controlled to emit light with a predetermined single emission color. However, the LED is configured to emit light with a plurality of types of emission colors. The emission control is performed so that the emission color changes sequentially (for example, in the order of red → yellow → blue → green) every time a predetermined time elapses (every time the heart-shaped decorative member 2515 is turned on a plurality of times). Also good. For example, during execution of a fate branch effect, when the heart-shaped decorative member 2515 is lit in a specific emission color, a so-called right-handed strike causes a game ball to pass through the branch sensor 2620, resulting in a fate branch effect result. As a result notification effect corresponding to the specific 7 16R probability variation big hit is obtained, if the game ball can be passed through the branch sensor 2620 when it is lit in this specific emission color, the specific 7 16R probability variation big hit is achieved. It can be assumed that a result notification effect according to the situation is obtained. Then, when the next fate branch effect is executed, when the game ball is passed through the branch sensor 2620, the heart-shaped decorative member 2515 is aimed at the timing when it is lit in a specific light emission color. You can participate with interest in the production.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (E), after a game ball passes and is detected by the branch sensor 2620, the execution of the result notification effect corresponding to the specific 7R probability variation big hit is started as the effect result of the fate branch effect. A scene is displayed that the hero character has escaped from the enemy character with the sword. Then, as shown in FIG. 175 (F), the player is notified of a message “a tragedy avoidance”, and an effect is performed as if the fate selection of avoiding the tragedy was successful. In this way, among the result notification effect corresponding to the specific 7 16R probability variation jackpot, the result notification effect corresponding to the jackpot other than the specific 7R probability variation jackpot, the result notification effect corresponding to the specific 7R probability variation jackpot By being executed, it is clearly determined that it is a big hit related to the second special symbol that was not clearly distinguished at the end of the specific reach production (at the time of the change time of the second special symbol) , It can be determined that it is a specific 7R probability variation big hit among the big hits related to the second special symbol. After the game ball is detected by passing through the branch sensor 2620, it is controlled to a 16R big hit game state that is opened for a long time using the second big prize opening 2509, and the game ball that has passed through the branch sensor 2620 is Control is performed so that the second big prize opening 2509 is won as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (G), after the result notification effect corresponding to the specific 7R probability variation jackpot of 7 is finished, the jackpot round start command and the jackpot are controlled until the control of the 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state opened for a long time is finished. Based on the round end command, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 starts execution of the jackpot game effect according to the 16R probability variation jackpot and the current number of rounds, and the current round number in the 16R jackpot game state and the second grand prize in the round. The number of winnings in the mouth 2509 is displayed.

  On the other hand, among the big hits related to the second special symbol, big hits other than the specified 7 16R probability big hit (non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4R normal big hit D, specific When the 4R sudden hit big hit B) of 6 is specified, as shown in FIG. 176 (D), the main liquid crystal display device 1900 uses the stop display command as shown in FIG. Execution of the fate branch effect is started, a message “Cut out fate!” Is notified to the player, and an instruction “right-handed” is given to the upper right portion of the main liquid crystal display device 1900.

  As shown in FIG. 176 (E ′), after a game ball passes through the branch sensor 2620 and is detected, a result notification effect corresponding to a big hit other than the specific 16R probability variable big hit is given as an effect result of the fate branch effect. Execution is started, and a scene is displayed that the hero character has been defeated by an enemy character with a sword. Then, as shown in FIG. 176 (F ′), the player is informed of the message “failure to avoid the tragedy”, and the performance is performed as if the selection of fate to avoid the tragedy has failed. As described above, among the result notification effect according to the specific 7 16R probability variation big hit and the result notification effect according to the big hit other than the specific 7 16R probability variation big hit, the result according to the big hit other than the specific 7 16R probability variation big hit. Even if the notification effect is executed, since the common result notification effect is executed as the effect result of the fate branch effect, it is not possible to determine which big hit other than the specific 7R probability variation big hit. After the game ball is detected by passing through the branch sensor 2620, the game is controlled to the 4R big hit game state that is opened for a short time using the first big winning opening 2102, but the game that has passed through the branch sensor 2620 is controlled. The ball is controlled so as not to win the first grand prize opening 2102 as it is. In addition, until the result notification effect corresponding to the big hit other than the specific 16R probability variable big hit is finished, all rounds in the 4R big hit gaming state of short-time opening using the first big winning opening 2102 are finished. Thus, the big hit game effect such as the specific 7R probability variation big hit is not executed. In this way, during the period in which the player is paying attention to the result notification effect according to the big hit other than the specific 16R probability variation big hit, the number of rounds in the 4R big hit gaming state is ended and the player is made difficult to notice. Therefore, the jackpot is determined as if it was a big hit without being clearly identified as a jackpot related to the second special symbol.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the case where the jackpot related to the second special symbol is specified, the fate branch effect is executed after the specific reach effect is executed in the main liquid crystal display device 1900, and the fate branch is executed. When a game ball passes and is detected by the branch sensor 2620 during the performance, a result notification effect (specific 7 16R probability variation big hit) according to whether it is a specific 7 16R probability variation big hit or not as an effect result of the fate branch effect. Result notification effect according to the above, or result notification effect according to the big hit other than the 16R probability variation big hit of the specific 7), among these effects, the content of the effect in the specific reach effect, A series of production contents are configured with production contents in the result notification production. As described above, when execution of the fate branch effect is started after the specific reach effect is executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900, the content of the effect is controlled not to proceed from the specific reach effect, and the fate branch effect is being executed. Only when a game ball passes through the branch sensor 2620 and is detected, the game content passes through the branch sensor 2620 by performing so-called right-handed by controlling the content of the effect to continue from a specific reach effect. It is urged to let you.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the case where the jackpot related to the second special symbol is specified, the fate branch effect is executed after the specific reach effect is executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900, and the fate branch effect is executed. Unless a game ball passes through the branch sensor 2620 and is detected, the fate branch effect (branch sensor enabled state) continues to be executed without any limitation on the effect time of the fate branch effect. When a game ball passes through the branch sensor 2620 and is detected during execution of the fate branch effect, the effect time of the result notification effect to be executed thereafter is fixed, and the specified 7 16R as the effect result of the fate branch effect Control to execute a result notification effect according to whether it is a probable big hit or not (a result notification effect according to a specific 7 16R probable big hit or a result notification effect according to a big hit other than a specific 7R probable big hit) Yes. In this way, during the execution of the fate branch effect, unless the game ball passes through the branch sensor 2620 and is detected, the fate branch effect continues to be executed without limitation on the effect time, so the player branches at the timing desired by the player. A game ball may be passed through the sensor 2620, and the player can advance the game at a free pace. In addition, by allowing the player to freely determine the timing for starting the result notification effect as the effect time of the fate branch effect, that is, the result of the fate branch effect, the result corresponding to the specific 7R probability variation jackpot of 7 Whether or not the notification effect is executed can be given an impression as if the player has decided, and the player can actively participate in the fate branch effect.

[9. Fate choice chance production]
In the present embodiment, in the decorative display of the decorative pattern executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1900 in response to the winning of the game ball at the first start port 2101, the decorative pattern that is displayed in a variable manner according to the player's operation is displayed. The fate selection chance effect to be stopped and displayed can be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 177, the main control MPU 4100a includes a non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, a specific 1 4R latent big hit, a specific 2 4R sudden big hit A, and a specific big hit related to the first special symbol. 5 when 12R probability variation big hit B, the variation time of the first special symbol (effect time displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900) and the effect content displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, reach effect) Of 4R normal big hit A, specific 1 4R latent probability big hit, specific 2 4R sudden hit big hit A and specific 5 12R right odd big hit B When a specific variation pattern that can only be determined is determined, the first special symbol display 1185 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol and is set to the specific variation pattern. Jackpot symbol determined as the stop symbol of the first special symbol (4R normal big hit A for non-specific 1 4R, big hit A symbol for specific 1R, big hit symbol for specific 1R) 4R latent probability big hit symbol, 4R random probability big hit A for 4R, 4R sudden big hit A symbol for 12R, and 5R for 12R certainty big hit B for specific 5) are stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a variation pattern command for instructing execution of a specific variation pattern, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 starts the variation display of the decorative symbols, and the variation time set in the specific variation pattern. That is, the big hit symbol determined by the first special symbol display 1185 (4R normal big hit A symbol if it is a non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, 4R latent if it is a special 1R 4R latent probability big hit) The right and left decorative symbols are stopped at the same design when the 4R rush accuracy hit A for the specified 2R accuracy hit A, 4R rush accuracy hit A for the specified 2R, and the 12R accuracy change big hit B for the specified 5R stop stop display. The display is controlled and the reach state is maintained in which the variable display of the medium decoration symbol is continued. Even if the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a stop display command indicating that the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (stop displaying the first special symbol) from the main control MPU 4400a during the reach state. The main decorative display symbol 1900 does not display the decorative symbol stop symbol on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 by continuously displaying the medium decorative symbol. That is, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol indicator 1185 relates to the first special symbol by displaying the jackpot symbol determined as the stop symbol of the first special symbol. The main liquid crystal display device 1900 clearly shows which big hit of the big hits, whereas the main liquid crystal display device 1900 has a big hit as well as which of the big hits related to the first special symbol. Even not clearly notified. However, the first special symbol display 1185 is one of a plurality of LEDs provided in the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180, and is configured by eight LEDs. Further, in addition to not notifying the player that the eight LEDs function as the first special symbol display 1185, it is possible to display a plurality of types of lighting patterns by lighting each of the eight LEDs according to the determination result. Therefore, even if the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 1185, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the big hit symbol is stopped on the first special symbol indicator 1185. It is difficult to determine whether or not the symbol is a big hit symbol. Therefore, it can be assumed that the variable display is continued until the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is difficult to realize that it has been a big hit.

  In addition, after the main control MPU 4100a ends the above-described variable display control of the first special symbol, that is, after displaying the jackpot symbol determined as the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 1185, The branch sensor 2620 is controlled to enable the branch sensor 2620 to detect the game ball. Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a monitors the detection of the game ball by the branch sensor 2620 after displaying the jackpot symbol determined as the stop symbol of the first special symbol. When it is detected that the game ball has passed the branch sensor 2620 by making a so-called right turn in the branch sensor effective state, the detection of the game ball by the branch sensor 2620 after the branch sensor effective state is terminated is invalidated. Then, the jackpot start command (4R normal jackpot A start command, 4R latent probability big hit start command, 4R sudden hit big hit A start command, 12R probability big hit B start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010.

  When the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a stop display command from the main control MPU 4100a during the reach state of the decorative symbol, the peripheral control MPU 4140a selects whether or not the main liquid crystal display device 1900 can select a fate for obtaining a good display result. As described above, a fate selection chance effect is instructed to stop and display the decorative symbol (medium decorative symbol) that is variably displayed by driving the game ball to the right route 1100R side and passing the game ball through the branch sensor 2620. To do. That is, in the fate selection chance effect, the player is notified that the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed by making a so-called right strike and passing the game ball through the branch sensor 2620.

  When it is detected that the game ball has passed the branch sensor 2620 while the branch sensor is valid, the main control MPU 4100a starts controlling the big hit game state. Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a opens and closes the first big prize opening 2102 if the non-specific 1R 4R normal big hit A or the specific 1R 4R latent big hit is detected when the branch sensor 2620 detects a game ball. An opening / closing pattern to be closed after the member 2104 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 2111 detects that nine game balls have been won in the first big prize opening 2102. If the control is repeated 4 times (4 rounds), and the specified 2R sudden hit is A, the second opening / closing member 2572 that closes the second winning prize opening 2509 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then closed. The control of repeating the opening / closing pattern to be performed four times is performed, and if the 5R 12R probability variation hit B is specified, the second opening / closing member 2572 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the first large input The game ball has won nine mouth 2102 executes 12 times (12 rounds) repeating controlling the opening and closing pattern to be closed when it is detected by the first counting sensor 2111. When the first big prize opening 2102 and the second big prize opening 2509 are controlled to be in the open state as the big hit gaming state, a big hit round start command corresponding to the type of big hit and the current number of rounds is sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. When the first big prize opening 2102 and the second big prize opening 2509 are controlled to be closed, a big hit round end command corresponding to the type of big hit and the current number of rounds is sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4140a selects the fate in the case of the non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, the specific 1 4R latent big hit, and the specific 5 12R positive variation big hit B among the big hits related to the first special symbol. A big hit start command (4R normal big hit A start command, 4R latent probability) while the chance effect is being executed (the left and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the same design and the middle decorative symbols are still displayed without being stopped). When the big hit start command, 12R probability change big hit B start command) is received, the medium decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the main liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the big hit symbol of the decorative symbol (non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A is 4R. Normal big hit A symbol, 4R latent probability big hit symbol for specific 1 4R latent big hit symbol, 12R positive variation big hit symbol for 12R positive variation big hit B for specific 5 Deriving Show symbols), notifying that the good effect results were obtained by selection fate based on passage of the game ball to the branch sensor 2620.

  Thus, the big hit symbol corresponding to each of the non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, the specific 1 4R latent big hit B, and the specific 5 12R positive variable big hit B (if the non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A is 4R normal big hit A symbol, 4R latent probability hit symbol for specific 1 4R latent probability hit, and 12R probability variable hit symbol B for specific 5 12R probability variable hit B) are derived and displayed on main liquid crystal display device 1900. A special jackpot related to the first special symbol that was not clearly displayed when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed is clearly notified, and the non-specific 1 4R normal jackpot A and the specific 1 4R latent It is clearly notified that either the big hit or the specific 5 12R positive variation big hit B has been reached.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is executing the fate selection chance effect when the specific 2R sudden hit big hit A among the big hits related to the first special symbol is being executed (the left and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the same symbol). When the big hit start command (4R sudden hit big hit A start command) is received in a state where the middle decorative symbol is still displayed without being stopped, the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. The 4R sudden hit big A symbol of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed. As described above, the 4R sudden hit big hit A symbol is a symbol combination different from the left and right decorative symbols, and the same symbol combination as the off symbol in which the middle decorative symbol is stopped. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the big hit has occurred. . The peripheral control MPU 4140a notifies that a good performance result has not been obtained due to selection of fate based on the passage of the game ball to the branch sensor 2620 after the 4R sudden hit big hit A symbol is stopped and displayed. However, in this case as well, since the transition control to the high probability time-short state is performed and the player is notified to that effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Thus, even if the big hit symbol corresponding to the specific 2R 4R sudden hit big hit A (4R hit big hit A symbol) is stopped and displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900, the same as when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has elapsed, It is not clearly notified that it is a big hit related to a special symbol, but as if it was a disappointment. In addition, when the big hit symbol corresponding to the specific 2R sudden hit big hit A is stopped and displayed, the big hit round start command and the big hit round end command are sequentially received. However, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 receives the type of the big hit and the current round. The performance according to the number is not executed, and the current round number in the 4R big hit gaming state is not notified so that it can be determined.

  Further, in this example, during the execution of the fate selection chance effect, the medium decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at a high speed, and the medium decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed based on the passage of the game ball to the branch sensor 2620. Is gradually decelerated and stopped and displayed with a desired symbol, and even if the game ball is passed through the branch sensor 2620, the medium decorative symbol is not immediately stopped and displayed. In the case of the specific 2R 4R sudden hit big hit A, based on the passing of the game ball to the branch sensor 2620, until the 4R hit big hit symbol is stopped or displayed, or the 4R sudden hit big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. All rounds in the 4R jackpot gaming state that is open for a short period of time have been completed until the end of notification of failure to obtain (until the notification of control to the high probability short-time state), The game production is not executed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to realize that the big hit game is being executed, and it can be assumed that the transition control is suddenly made into the high probability time-short state regardless of the occurrence of the big hit. It should be noted that the middle decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed simultaneously with the detection of the passage of the game ball to the branch sensor 2620. In this case, when the 4R sudden hit big hit A is reached, the effect of notifying the effect result is ended ( All rounds in the 4R jackpot gaming state that is open for a short time may be terminated and the jackpot gaming effect may not be executed until the notification of controlling to the high probability short-time state is completed).

  In the present embodiment, when the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 2101 is a big win related to the first special symbol, the first special symbol indicator 1185 is displayed as a variable display state of the first special symbol. After the jackpot symbol determined as the stop symbol is stopped and displayed, the branch sensor is controlled to be in an effective state, and the main liquid crystal display device 1900 continues to display the variation of the decorative symbol and instructs the branch sensor 2620 to pass the game ball. To do. When a so-called right hit is made and it is detected that the game ball has passed through the branch sensor 2620, the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state corresponding to the type of the big hit. That is, even if the jackpot symbol determined as the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 1185, as long as the game ball is not passed through the branch sensor 2620 by making a right-hand hit, the decorative symbol is displayed. The variable display continues and the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot type is not controlled. As described above, when the fate selection chance effect is executed by controlling the branch sensor to be in an effective state, the player must follow the instruction on the main liquid crystal display device 1900, but whenever a game ball is passed through the branch sensor 2620, it is always necessary. The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed to control the jackpot gaming state according to the jackpot type, and the player's willingness to participate in the fate selection chance production is not reduced.

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball is shot to the right side of the center actor 2500 (with a strength higher than a predetermined level), the game ball that has flowed down to the right route 1100R has a high probability (when a right strike is performed). Most of the game balls pass through the branch sensor 2620 and some of the game balls do not pass through the branch sensor 2620. It passes through the sensor 2620. That is, during execution of the fate selection chance effect (during the control of the branch sensor effective state), it is possible to pass the game ball to the branch sensor 2620 with a high probability only by performing so-called right-handed. Therefore, during the execution of the fate selection chance effect (during the control of the branch sensor effective state), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to lose a game ball that is aimed at the branch sensor 2620 becomes a useless ball.

  When the main control MPU 4100a detects that the game ball has passed the branch sensor 2620 during execution of the fate selection chance effect, the main control MPU 4100a sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot gaming state is started, and then the first big prize The waiting time until the jackpot round start command indicating that the mouth 2102 and the second grand prize winning opening 2509 are actually controlled to be opened is set in the interval timer, but this interval timer has a very short time ( For example, 0.5 seconds) is set. That is, when it is detected that the game ball has passed the branch sensor 2620 during the execution of the fate selection chance effect, the first big prize opening 2102 and the second big prize opening 2509 are controlled to be opened in an extremely short time. become. In addition, the time set in the interval timer is shorter than the time until the game ball that has passed through the branch sensor 2620 reaches the first big prize opening 2102 and the second big prize opening 2509 by so-called right-handed. Is set to For this reason, when a game ball that has passed through the branch sensor 2620 by making a so-called right strike reaches the first grand prize opening 2102 and the second big prize opening 2509, the first grand prize opening 2102 and the second grand prize winning are already made. If opening / closing control of the mouth 2509 is started and the opening / closing member 2104 for closing the first big prize opening 2102 and the second opening / closing member 2572 for closing the second big prize opening 2509 are opened for a long time, the branch sensor 2620 is set. The game ball that has passed passes through the first grand prize opening 2102 and the second big prize opening 2509 as it is. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the branch sensor 2620 during execution of the fate selection chance effect (during the control of the branch sensor effective state) does not become a useless ball, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to generate a loss as much as possible.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the big hit symbol is stopped on the first special symbol display 1185 by determining whether or not to win the big special symbol at the start of the variation of the first special symbol. Does not control the display of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and does not clearly notify even the big hit. Only when the game ball passes through the branch sensor 2620 in the branch sensor enabled state, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 stops displaying the decorative symbol and notifies whether it is a big hit. For this reason, whether or not to make a big hit related to the first special symbol is determined before the game ball passes the branch sensor 2620 (before execution of the fate selection chance effect), but the branch By making it possible to determine when the game ball passes to the sensor 2620, it is possible to make it seem as if the player has won a big hit by passing the game ball through the branch sensor 2620. Therefore, when the fate selection chance effect is executed when the non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, the specific 1 4R latent big hit, and the specific 5 12R positive variation big hit B are executed, the timing at which the game ball passes the branch sensor 2620 Players will actively participate in the fate selection chance production.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the specific 5R 12R probability variation big hit B among the big hits related to the first special symbol is reached, the 12R big hit gaming state that is opened for a long time triggered by the passage of the game ball to the branch sensor 2620 At the same time as the above control, the 12R probability variation big hit B symbol is stopped and notified as a big hit based on the big hit start command as an effect result of the fate selection chance effect. However, if control of the big hit gaming state does not proceed for a while even if the 12R probability variable big hit B symbol is stopped and notified that it will be a big hit, it is either the specified 5 12R positive change big hit B or the non-specific 1 4R normal The player cannot discriminate whether it is a big hit A or a specific 1R 4R latent big hit. That is, before the player can determine whether the specific 5 12R probability variation big hit B or the non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A or the specific 1 4R latent big hit is a 12R big hit with a long open time. Control of the gaming state is started. As a result, even if the game ball passes the branch sensor 2620 by making a so-called right-hand strike during the execution of the fate selection chance effect, the right-hand strike is continued while paying attention to the effect content on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. As long as 12R probability variation big hit B of 5 is specified, the game ball will not be a useless ball, it will continue to win the game ball at the second big prize opening 2101 with a very high probability, making it difficult for the player to generate a loss. In addition, it is possible to speed up the digestion of the big hit gaming state.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a specific 2R sudden hit big hit A among the big hits related to the first special symbol is reached, the 4R big hit gaming state that is opened for a short time triggered by the passage of the game ball to the branch sensor 2620 At the same time as this control, the 4R sudden hit big hit A symbol is stopped and displayed as a production result of the fate selection chance effect based on the big hit start command, and a notification is made that the high probability short-time state is controlled. At this time, the control of all the round numbers in the 4R big hit gaming state that is opened for a short time is finished before the effect of notifying the control to the high probability short time state is finished. As described above, while the 4R sudden hit big hit A symbol is stopped and displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 as a production result of the fate selection chance effect, and it is notified that the high probability short-time state is controlled, the 4R big hit with a short opening time is displayed. As long as the player is paying attention to the notification effect as a result of controlling to the gaming state, it is difficult to notice that it is controlled to the 4R big hit gaming state that is open for a short time, and in the big hit gaming state where almost no profit can be obtained The player's feeling of loss can be eliminated. Even when it is recognized that the 4R sudden hit big hit A symbol, which is the same as the off symbol, is not displayed due to the stop display, it is controlled to a high probability time-short state, so that the player is not excessively discouraged.

  In addition, the control which repeats the opening / closing pattern which closes after opening the 2nd opening-and-closing member 2572 which closes the 2nd big prize opening 2509 for a short time (for example, 0.5 second) as a big hit related to the 1st special symbol is performed 4 times. After the big hit game state, control to a low probability short-time state (the transition to the low-probability non-short-time state may be made when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times)) It is also possible to provide a 4R pseudo-accuracy big hit and execute a fate selection chance effect by the peripheral control MPU 4140a when it is determined that the main control MPU 4100a is a 4R pseudo-accuracy big hit. In this case, it is difficult to determine whether it is a 4R pseudo-accuracy big hit A or a 4R pseudo-accuracy big hit by not notifying that the control is performed in a high-probability time-short state when the 4R sudden accuracy big hit A. It becomes difficult to determine whether the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is a short state with a high probability or a short state with a low probability, making it difficult to stop the game.

  Next, a specific example of the fate selection chance effect will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, a fate selection chance effect is executed based on a non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, a specific 1 4R latent big hit and a specific 5 12R right odd big hit B among the big hits related to the first special symbol. In the case and the case where the fate selection chance effect is executed based on the specific 2R 4R sudden hit big hit A, different effect results are notified.

  As shown in FIG. 178, the peripheral control MPU 4140a includes non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, specific 1 4R latent big hit A, specific 2 4R sudden big hit A, and specific 5 among big hits related to the first special symbol. When the variation pattern command instructing the execution of a specific variation pattern is received when the 12R probability variation big hit B is, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 starts the variation display of the decorative symbols (FIG. 178 (A)). The player displays that the reach design has been reached by displaying the reach design (“5” design in this production example) where the design is stopped at the same design and displaying “reach” on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. (FIG. 178B).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 “fate selection chance! Right strike!” To execute a fate selection chance effect, and to throw a game ball into the right route 1100R side. The person is notified (FIG. 178C). Note that when the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs the display of FIG. 178 (C), the jackpot symbol that has already been determined as the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 1185. However, as described above, the first special symbol display 1185 is one of a plurality of LEDs and not only notifies the player that it functions as the first special symbol display 1185, but also the big hit symbol stops. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to clearly determine that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped or that it has been a big hit.

  When it is detected that the game ball has passed through the branch sensor 2620, the peripheral control MPU 4140a stops displaying the middle decoration symbol so as to display the big hit symbol corresponding to the type of the big hit. At this time, among the big hits related to the first special symbol, if the non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, the specific 1 4R latent probable big hit, and the specific 5 12R probable big hit B, the middle decorative symbol is the left and right decorative A jackpot symbol with the same symbol as the symbol and the left, right, and right decorative symbols all aligned in the same symbol (4R normal jackpot A symbol for non-specific 1R 4R normal jackpot A, 4R latent hit jackpot for specific 1) If it is, 4R latent probability big hit symbol is displayed, and if 12R probability variation big hit B of 5 is specified, 12R probability variation big hit B symbol) is displayed (FIG. 178 (D)), and it is notified that the big hit has been reached (FIG. 178 (E)). ).

  On the other hand, if it is a specific 2R 4R hit big hit A among the big bonuses related to the first special symbol, the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the left and right decorative symbols, and the left middle right decorative symbol is the same symbol. The 4R-accuracy big hit A symbol is displayed (FIG. 178 (D ′)), which is the same as the out-of-order off symbol, and notification that the big hit has not been made and that the high probability time-short state is controlled (FIG. 178 (E ′)). ). In this case, although it is actually a big hit, as described above, the execution of all the rounds is completed in the period until the notification of the effect results in FIGS. 178 (D ′) to 178 (E ′) is ended. It is difficult for players to realize that it was a big hit.

  In this way, in the fate selection chance effect, the player himself hits the game ball to the right route 1100R side and passes the game ball through the branch sensor 2620, so that the middle decorative symbol is the same as the left and right decorative symbols. An effect is performed as if the fate of selecting whether to stop display or stop display with a symbol different from the left and right decorative symbols is selected.

  In addition, as described above, in the fate selection chance effect, the medium decoration symbol is displayed at a high speed until it is detected that the game ball has passed the branch sensor 2620, and it is detected that the game ball has passed the branch sensor 2620. Based on this, the variation display of the medium decorative design is gradually slowed down and finally stopped. In this way, during the execution of the fate selection chance effect, unless the player obeys the instruction “Right-handed!” Displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900, the inside decoration symbol does not stop display, The game doesn't progress and prompts you to make a right strike.

  In addition, since it will be notified as if it is out of place when it becomes a specific 2R sudden hit big hit A among the big hits related to the first special symbol, it is clear that it is a big hit related to the first special symbol It cannot be determined. Further, when it is detected that the game ball has passed the branch sensor 2620 when the specific 2R sudden hit big hit A is reached, it is controlled to the 4R big hit gaming state that is released for a short time, but the start of this short release 4R big hit gaming state is started. The game ball that has been detected as having passed through the branch sensor 2620 by driving to the right route 1100R side in order to stop the center decoration symbol in the fate selection chance production, is the first. Control is performed so as not to win the two big prize opening 2509.

[10. Processing for prize ball payout]
In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 180, even if a game ball wins one of the first start port 2201 or the second start port 2587b, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning port immediately Without paying the player to the player, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning opening is added to the count value of the prize ball number counter. And when the jackpot gaming state is finished, that is, when the jackpot gaming state is executed with the big hit related to the first special symbol or the big bonus related to the second special symbol as an opportunity, and when the jackpot gaming state is finished Assuming that a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter is paid out to the player. That is, every time a big hit related to the first special symbol or a big hit related to the second special symbol is reached, at the end of the big hit gaming state, the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter is paid to the player. I try to put it out.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the number of winning balls according to the winning at either the first starting port 2201 or the second starting port 2587b is awarded until the next big hit. The game is continuously added to the count value of the ball number counter, and the player wins the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter when the game becomes a big hit. For this reason, after the end of the big hit gaming state, the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter increases in proportion to the number of winnings in the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b. As a result, the number of prize balls to be paid out will increase. In addition, when a game ball wins the first start port 2201 and the second start port 2587b, a special number is not required unless the number of stored first special random numbers or second special random numbers (holding number) exceeds four. Since the variation display of the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed, the variation display count of the special symbol is approximately proportional to the number of winning in the first start port 2201 and the second start port 2587b. (For example, if the number of stored first special random numbers or second special random numbers does not exceed four at any time of winning, the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b are won. The number of times the special symbol fluctuates will increase in proportion to the number of For this reason, after the end of the big hit gaming state, if the big win is reached when the number of times the number of special symbol changes is increased, the number of winning balls as the number of winning balls according to the count value of the winning ball number counter On the other hand, if the big win is reached at the time when the number of the special symbol fluctuation display is small after the big hit gaming state is ended, a small number of prize balls is given as the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter. Will be paid out.

  Specifically, in a non-time-short state such as a low probability non-time-short state (normal state), a winning of a game ball to the second start-up port 2587b does not occur, and so-called left-handed, the first start port Only the winning of the game ball to 2201 will occur, and only the first special symbol display on the first special symbol display 1185 is displayed, except when there is a second special symbol hold ball, the first special symbol Big hits related to symbols (non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A, specific 1 4R latent positive big hit, specific 2 4R sudden hit big hit A, specific 3 4R positive big hit, specific 4 12R positive big hit A, specific 5 12R Probable big hit B) will occur. Since the number of winning balls for winning a game ball at the first starting port 2201 is 3, until the big hit related to the first special symbol is generated, The number of prize balls multiplied by “3” is continuously added to the count value of the prize ball number counter. For example, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is set to 3/1171 (approximately 1/390), and the end of the jackpot gaming state is the theoretical value until the jackpot calculated from the jackpot probability is reached. If the number of times the first special symbol fluctuates later becomes a big hit at the 390th change, 3 × 390 = 1170 award balls are counted in the award ball counter, resulting in 1170 award balls Will be paid out.

  On the other hand, in a time-short state such as a high-probability time-short state (probability change state), the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301, and the door member 2589 is driven. Only the winning of the game ball to the mouth 2587b is generated, and only the second special symbol display on the second special symbol display unit 1186 is displayed except for the case where there is a holding ball of the first special symbol. Big hits related to special symbols (non-specific 2 4R normal big hit B, non-specific 3 4R normal big hit C, non-specific 4 4R normal big hit D, specific 6 4R sudden big hit B, specific 7 16R right big hit) Will occur. Since the number of winning balls for winning a game ball at the second starting port 2587b is one, until the big hit related to the second special symbol is generated, The number of prize balls multiplied by “1” is continuously added to the count value of the prize ball number counter. For example, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is set to 24/1171 (approximately 1/49), and the end of the jackpot gaming state is a theoretical value until the jackpot calculated from the jackpot probability is reached. If the number of times the second special symbol is changed is a big hit after the 49th change, only 1 × 49 = 49 prize balls are counted in the prize ball counter, resulting in only 49 prize balls. Numbers are not paid out.

  Conventionally, in the low probability non-short-time state (normal state), the jackpot calculated from the jackpot probability of the special symbol (mainly the first special symbol) after the jackpot gaming state ends, Even if it exceeds the theoretical value up to (in this embodiment, about 390th variation), if it is not a big hit, the player will be recognized as a stand that the gaming machine does not hit. Even if you play a game on the so-called Hamari table, you can't expect a big hit, and if you stop the game or if it is a vacant stand, you should expect a big hit I couldn't feel like trying to play a new game on that platform. And, the so-called so-called Hamari stand, the player's willingness to play has decreased, leading to a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter increases as the number of times of display change of the special symbol from the end of the big hit gaming state until the next big hit is increased, Next, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases as a big hit. For example, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, a theoretical value (in the present embodiment, about 390th variation) until the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol (mainly the first special symbol) becomes a jackpot calculated from the jackpot probability. If it is significantly exceeded and the 800th change is reached, 3 × 800 = 2400 prize balls are counted in the prize ball counter. For this reason, even if a game is played on a so-called Hamari table, the number of prize balls is counted as the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter. Since the number of prize balls to be paid out can be expected, the player's willingness to obtain the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter is increased, and the game can be continued. In addition, even if it is a vacant stand, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the number of prize balls is counted as the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter is a big hit. Therefore, the player's willingness to obtain the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter is increased, and a new game can be performed on the stand. Therefore, the player's willingness to play the so-called Hamari table does not decrease, and the decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the high probability short-time state (probability variation state), the big hit probability is higher than in the low-probability state, and the above-mentioned first is achieved by hitting so-called right than the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2201 in the non-time-short state. Since it is easy to win a game ball to the second start opening 2587b, the next big hit is guaranteed as long as the game continues, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. However, in the high-probability short-time state, the theoretical value until the number of changes in the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) after the end of the big-hit gaming state becomes a big-spot calculated from the jackpot probability in the high-probability short-time state ( In this embodiment, if it is not a big hit even if it exceeds about 49th variation), it will be doubted whether it is a really high probability state, and the player is frustrated until the next big hit. I had to keep playing games while recruiting. In particular, when controlled to a high probability state as well as a high probability short time state, but controlled to a high probability non-short state state that is not controlled to a short time state, the player's holding ball will decrease drastically, next time Since it takes time until the big hit, the player cannot play the game with a margin. For this reason, even if it exceeds the above-mentioned theoretical value, if it is not a big hit, the discomfort that the player is irritated increases.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the high probability short-time state (probability variation state) and the high probability non-short-time state as well as the low probability non-time short state (normal state), after the big hit gaming state, until the next big hit As the number of display variations of the special symbol increases, the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter increases, and the number of prize balls to be paid out increases as the next big hit. . For example, after the end of the big hit gaming state, a theoretical value (in the present embodiment, about 49th change) until the fluctuation display count of the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) becomes a big hit calculated from the big hit probability. When the number of change is reached and the 100th change is reached, 1 × 100 = 100 prize balls are counted in the prize ball counter. For this reason, even if the above-mentioned theoretical value is not exceeded and a big hit is made, a large number of prize balls are counted as the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter. Since it can be expected for the number of prize balls to be paid out as a trigger, it is possible to continue the game while reducing the discomfort that the player is irritated.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of stored first special random numbers or the second special random number (holding number) exceeds four and a game ball wins the first starting port 2201 or the second starting port 2587b. In addition, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning is added to the count value of the prize ball number counter, but the number of memories of the first special random number or the second special random number exceeds four, and the special symbol ( For winnings where the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in a variable manner, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning is not added to the count value of the winning ball counter, but is immediately paid out. May be. In this case, in the low-probability non-short-time state (normal state), in proportion to the number of game balls won in the first start port 2201, in the high-probability short-time state (probability change state), the game is played in the second start port 287b. In proportion to the number of winning balls, the number of times the special symbol is changed will increase. At the top of the pachinko machine 1, there is a data display (not shown) that can display the number of big hits on the current day or the previous day, and the number of display changes of special symbols since the end of the big hit gaming state. By providing the player with visual recognition of the data display, the player can grasp the number of times the special symbol has been changed since the end of the big hit gaming state. The player can easily recognize the number of winning balls counted in the winning ball counter by knowing the number of times the special symbol has been changed since the end of the jackpot gaming state. Whether or not the subsequent game is to be performed can be determined in consideration of the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter that is paid out as a trigger.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A or the specific 1 4R latent big hit is hit, the probability change latent mode is entered after the 4R big hit gaming state which is opened for a long time. Even if the control of the high probability non-time-short state is started after the end of the 4R big-hit gaming state that has been opened for a long time, when the 4R latent big hit of the specific 1 is triggered, the high-probability non-time-short state is low or low Although it is difficult to determine whether the probability is in a non-temporal state, the chance to enter the probability variation latent mode is a big hit, so depending on the count value of the award ball counter triggered by that big hit The number of winning balls is paid out to the player. However, as an opportunity to enter the probability variation latent mode, in addition to a big hit, for example, a general small hit (a non-specific 1 4R normal big hit A or a specific 1 4R latent big hit as well as a long-open 4R big hit gaming state However, after the small hit game state is completed, the game state before the small hit game is continued (for example, when a small hit is made during the control of the low probability non-short state) As a low probability non-short-time state) after the end of the small hit gaming state.

  In the above case, if the player wins the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter when the player wins the big hit, the probability will change when the number of prize balls is not paid to the player. Even if the player enters the latent mode, it is determined by the player that there is no possibility of being controlled to the high probability non-time-short state. That is, in such a case, it is preferable not to pay out to the player the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter even if a big hit is triggered to enter the probability variation latent mode. Whether it is difficult to determine whether the trigger to enter the latent mode is a big hit or a small hit, and is a high probability non-short-time state after the end of the 4R big hit gaming state (or the small hit gaming state) that is open for a long time Alternatively, it is preferable to make it difficult to determine whether the low probability non-time-short state.

  Also, in this embodiment, regardless of the number of times the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed after the end of the big hit gaming state, the winning ball counter is triggered by the next big hit. The number of prize balls corresponding to the count value is paid out to the player. For example, the theoretical value until the big hit calculated from the big hit probability in the low probability non-short-time state (in this embodiment, about 390 fluctuations) If it is not over the eye), even if a big hit is made, the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter may not be paid out to the player. In such a case, the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter is paid out to the player if the theoretical value until the big hit is calculated from the big hit probability in the low probability non-short-time state is not exceeded. A player who has exceeded the theoretical value prefers a new player to play a game rather than a table that does not exceed the theoretical value. That is, the player actively plays the game against the so-called Hamari stand, and the decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed. In addition, the number of special symbols that can be used as a boundary for determining whether or not to pay out to the player the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter is not limited to the above-described theoretical value. The number of times that is lower than the theoretical value may be set. In addition, as the number of times the special symbol fluctuates, which is a boundary on whether or not to pay out to the player the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter, for example, a low probability state or a high probability state The number of times may be set differently depending on the state change.

  In this embodiment, the player is always paid out the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter in response to a big hit. And determining means for determining whether or not to pay out the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter to the player, and when the determination result of the determining means is a determination to pay out, You may make it pay | pay out the number of prize balls according to the count value of a counter to a player. For the determination by the determination means, a random number different from the jackpot random number or the special symbol random number (the first special symbol random number, the second special symbol random number) may be used. By including information on whether or not to pay out to the player the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter, the special symbol random number is used to determine the count value of the prize ball number counter along with the type of jackpot It is also preferable to determine whether or not to pay out the corresponding number of prize balls to the player.

  In the determination by the determination means described above, for example, the number of prize balls corresponding to the count value of the prize ball number counter is increased as the number of times of special symbol variation display until the next big hit is reached after the end of the big hit gaming state. The determination may be made so that the probability of paying out to the player increases stepwise. For example, when the number of times of change display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the end of the jackpot gaming state is 1st to 200th variation, the determination is made with a probability of 1/4, and the variation is 201 to 400 In the eyes, the determination is made with a probability of 1/2, and after the 401st change, the determination is made with a probability of 3/4. In such a case, even if a game is played on a so-called Hamari table, a lot of prize balls are counted as the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter, which is a big hit. As a result, there is a high probability that the number of prize balls will be paid out, and the player can be expected to win the number of prize balls. Can do. Also, even if it is empty, a large number of prize balls are counted as the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter. Since the player has a high probability of winning and can expect the number of winning balls, the player's willingness to obtain the number of winning balls is increased, and a new game can be played on the stand.

  In the present embodiment, whether the time for adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the first start port 2201 and the second start port 2587b to the prize ball number counter is controlled to either the short-time state or the non-short-time state. Regardless, it covers the entire period. For example, in the case of a big hit game state that is open for a long time in the big hit game state, it is easy to make a game ball win in the first big winning port 2102 or the second big winning port 2509 that is opened, Since a large amount of prize balls are paid out in a short time in accordance with the winnings at the first grand prize opening 2102 or the second big prize opening 2509, the first start opening 2201 and the second start opening are immediately released. Even if the number of prize balls corresponding to 2587b is not paid out to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the prize is not paid out. Also, in the short-time state, there is no large amount of payout in a short time as in the big hit game state that is open for a long time, but it is very easy to win a game ball in the second start port 2587b by making a so-called right-handed. It is easy, and the number of times of display of the special symbol change per unit time increases, so that the player is paying attention to the lottery result of the special symbol, and immediately, the first start port 2201 and the second start port 2587b. Even if the player does not pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the player is not paid out.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit gaming state is executed when the big hit related to the first special symbol or the big special hit related to the second special symbol is triggered, and at the end of the big liquid crystal display device 1900 Is used to execute the payout appearance based on the payout appearance executing flag, and the player is notified that the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter is to be paid out. In the present embodiment, in the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, as the effect based on the jackpot start command, the jackpot round start command, etc., the jackpot game effect during the execution of the jackpot game state is paid out. Are separately executed before the payout appearance, but the jackpot game effect and the payout appearance may be executed integrally. Thus, in the case of executing a jackpot gaming state that is released for a short time as a jackpot gaming state, for example, by executing a jackpot gaming state during the execution of an integrated rendering of a jackpot gaming effect and payout appearance It becomes difficult to notice that the opening / closing member 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 or the second opening / closing member 2572 of the second attacker unit 2570 is controlled to open, and unlike the big hit gaming state of long-time opening, almost no winning ball is obtained. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to feel lost. In the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 displays the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter. According to this, as the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter is displayed, the player has the right to obtain a large amount of game balls at a time, and the player plays a game with expectation. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, when winning a prize winning port of either the first starting port 2201 or the second starting port 2587b, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning port is added to the winning ball number counter. However, the same is true if the number of winning prizes is counted and stored in each of the first start port 2201 or the second start port 2587b. In this case, the jackpot gaming state is executed when either the jackpot related to the first special symbol or the jackpot related to the second special symbol is triggered, and at the end of that time, the number won in each winning mouth Based on this, the number of prize balls may be calculated and the number of prize balls may be paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls corresponding to the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b out of the winning ports excluding the first large winning port 2102 and the second large winning port 2509 is calculated. Although it is added to the prize ball number counter, it does not target both the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b, but the first starting port 2201 or the second starting port. Only one of the openings 2587b may be targeted. For example, in a non-time-short state such as a low-probability non-time-short state (normal state), a winning of a game ball to the second start port 2587b does not occur, so only the first start port 2201 is targeted, In a time-short state such as a high-probability time-short state (probability variation state), as long as the player hits the right, only the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2587b is generated, so only the second start port 2587b is targeted. Also good. Of the winning ports other than the first big winning port 2102 and the second big winning port 2509, not only the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b but also the general winning port 2301 are used. The number of prize balls may also be added to the prize ball number counter. In addition, not all of the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening such as the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b are targeted, but for example, according to one winning out of two winnings. Only the number of winning balls is added to the winning ball number counter, or the place where three payout balls are paid out is immediately paid out, and the remaining two are added to the winning ball number counter. Good. In this case, even if the number of prize balls corresponding to the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b is not paid out to the player immediately, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a sense of not being paid out.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 1100 Game area 1110A Front structural member 1150 Game panel 1158 Opening 1900 Liquid crystal display device 2000 Table unit 2100 Attacker unit 2101 General winning opening 2102 First big winning opening 2200 Start Mouth unit 2201 First start port 2300 Front side unit 2301 General winning port 2500 Center accessory 2502 Peripheral wall portion 2509 Second major winning port (receiving port)
2509a Attacker passage (distribution passage)
2510 Center base 2510k Branch passage 2510l Branch space 2510m Connection passage 2510n Second attacker space 2510p Guide part 2570 Second attacker unit 2571 Unit base 2571e Receiver part 2571f Guide part 2571i Lower right protrusion part 2571j Stopper part 2572 Second opening / closing member )
2572a Blade portion 2572b Shaft portion 2580 Second start port unit 2585a Gate portion 2587b Second start port

Claims (1)

A game panel in which a game area where game balls can flow down is formed;
A center accessory provided in the game panel;
A game machine having a right passage area part into which a game ball that flows down over the upper part of the center role of game balls to be driven into the game area can enter;
The right passage region portion is
An area entry portion that is an entrance portion of the right passage area portion;
A discharge portion that is an exit portion of the right passage region portion and discharges a game ball that has flowed down inside the right passage region portion to the downstream side of the right passage region portion;
A first variable receiving port having a switching member that switches between accepting and not accepting a game ball;
A flow path of a game ball flowing down inside the right passage region portion, the first flow path in which the game ball may be received in the first variable receiving port;
A flow path of a game ball flowing down inside the right passage area, and a second flow path in which the game ball may not be received in the first variable receiving port,
The discharge part is
A first discharge portion for discharging the game ball flowing down the first flow path to the downstream side of the right passage region portion;
Separately having a second discharge portion for discharging the game ball flowing down the second flow path to the downstream side of the right passage region portion;
The first flow path and the second flow path are configured such that the possibility that a game ball flows down the first flow path is higher than that of the second flow path. Only the first flow path is configured to selectively switch between a flow path communicating with the first discharge portion and a flow path communicating with the first variable receiving port,
Furthermore, a gaming machine characterized in that a second variable receiving port capable of receiving a game ball released from the first discharge part of the discharge part is provided on the downstream side of the right passage region part.